Variador M300, Centrífuga 3

User Guide
Unidrive M300
Model size 1 to 6
Variable Speed AC drive for induction
motors
Part Number: 0478-0043-07

Issue: 7
www.controltechniques.com
Original Instructions
For the purposes of compliance with the EU Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
General information
The manufacturer accepts no liability for any consequences resulting from inappropriate, negligent or incorrect
installation or adjustment of the optional operating parameters of the equipment or from mismatching the variable speed
drive with the motor.
The contents of this guide are believed to be correct at the time of printing. In the interests of a commitment to a policy
of continuous development and improvement, the manufacturer reserves the right to change the specification of the
product or its performance, or the contents of the guide, without notice.
All rights reserved. No parts of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electrical or
mechanical including photocopying, recording or by an information storage or retrieval system, without permission in
writing from the publisher.
Drive firmware version
This product is supplied with the latest firmware version. If this drive is to be connected to an existing system or machine,
all drive firmware versions should be verified to confirm the same functionality as drives of the same model already
present. This may also apply to drives returned from a Control Techniques Service Centre or Repair Centre. If there is
any doubt please contact the supplier of the product.
The firmware version of the drive can be checked by looking at Pr 11.029.
Environmental statement
Control Techniques is committed to minimising the environmental impacts of its manufacturing operations and of its
products throughout their life cycle. To this end, we operate an Environmental Management System (EMS) which is
certified to the International Standard ISO 14001. Further information on the EMS, our Environmental Policy and other
relevant information is available on request, or can be found at www.greendrives.com.
The electronic variable-speed drives manufactured by Control Techniques have the potential to save energy and
(through increased machine/process efficiency) reduce raw material consumption and scrap throughout their long
working lifetime. In typical applications, these positive environmental effects far outweigh the negative impacts of product
manufacture and end-of-life disposal.
Nevertheless, when the products eventually reach the end of their useful life, they must not be discarded but should
instead be recycled by a specialist recycler of electronic equipment. Recyclers will find the products easy to dismantle
into their major component parts for efficient recycling. Many parts snap together and can be separated without the use
of tools, while other parts are secured with conventional fasteners. Virtually all parts of the product are suitable for
recycling.
Product packaging is of good quality and can be re-used. Large products are packed in wooden crates, while smaller
products come in strong cardboard cartons which themselves have a high recycled fibre content. If not re-used, these
containers can be recycled. Polythene, used on the protective film and bags for wrapping product, can be recycled in the
same way. Control Techniques' packaging strategy prefers easily-recyclable materials of low environmental impact, and
regular reviews identify opportunities for improvement.
When preparing to recycle or dispose of any product or packaging, please observe local legislation and best practice.
REACH legislation
EC Regulation 1907/2006 on the Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and restriction of Chemicals (REACH) requires
the supplier of an article to inform the recipient if it contains more than a specified proportion of any substance which is
considered by the European Chemicals Agency (ECHA) to be a Substance of Very High Concern (SVHC) and is
therefore listed by them as a candidate for compulsory authorisation.
For current information on how this requirement applies in relation to specific Control Techniques products, please
approach your usual contact in the first instance. Control Techniques position statement can be viewed at:
http://www.controltechniques.com/REACH
Copyright © June 2014 Control Techniques Ltd

Issue Number: 7
Drive Firmware: 01.03.00 onwards
For patent and intellectual property related information please go to: www.ctpatents.info
How to use this guide
This user guide provides complete information for installing and operating the drive from start to finish.
The information is in logical order, taking the reader from receiving the drive through to fine tuning the performance.
NOTE
There are specific safety warnings throughout this guide, located in the relevant sections. In addition, Chapter 1 Safety
information contains general safety information. It is essential that the warnings are observed and the information
considered when working with or designing a system using the drive.
This map of the user guide helps to find the right sections for the task you wish to complete, but for specific information,
refer to Contents on page 4:
1 Safety information
2 Product information
3 Mechanical installation
4 Electrical installation
5 Getting started
6 Basic parameters
7 Running the motor
8 Optimization
9 NV media card operation
10 Advanced parameters
11 Technical data
12 Diagnostics
13 UL listing information
Contents
1 Safety information .................................9 5 Getting started .................................... 76
1.1 Warnings, Cautions and Notes .............................9 5.1 Understanding the display .................................. 76
1.2 Electrical safety - general warning ........................9 5.2 Keypad operation ............................................... 76
1.3 System design and safety of personnel ................9 5.3 Menu structure ................................................... 78
1.4 Environmental limits ..............................................9 5.4 Menu 0 ............................................................... 78
1.5 Access ...................................................................9 5.5 Advanced menus ............................................... 79
1.6 Fire protection .......................................................9 5.6 Changing the operating mode ............................ 80
1.7 Compliance with regulations .................................9 5.7 Saving parameters ............................................. 80
1.8 Motor .....................................................................9 5.8 Restoring parameter defaults ............................. 80
1.9 Mechanical brake control ......................................9 5.9 Parameter access level and security ................. 80
1.10 Adjusting parameters ............................................9 5.10 Displaying parameters with non-default
1.11 Electrical installation ............................................10 values only ......................................................... 81
1.12 Hazard .................................................................10 5.11 Displaying destination parameters only ............. 81
5.12 Communications ................................................ 81
2 Product information ............................11
2.1 Model number .....................................................11 6 Basic parameters ................................ 82
2.2 Ratings ................................................................12 6.1 Menu 0: Basic parameters ................................. 82
2.3 Operating modes .................................................15 6.2 Parameter descriptions ...................................... 86
2.4 Drive features ......................................................16
2.5 Keypad and display .............................................17 7 Running the motor .............................. 87
2.6 Nameplate description ........................................18 7.1 Quick start connections ...................................... 87
2.7 Options ................................................................19 7.2 Changing the operating mode ............................ 87
2.8 Items supplied with the drive ...............................20 7.3 Quick start commissioning / start-up .................. 91
3 Mechanical installation .......................21 8 Optimization ........................................ 93

3.1 Safety information ...............................................21 8.1 Motor map parameters ....................................... 93
3.2 Planning the installation ......................................21 8.2 Maximum motor rated current ............................ 99
3.3 Terminal cover removal .......................................22 8.3 Current limits ...................................................... 99
3.4 Installing / removing options ................................26 8.4 Motor thermal protection .................................... 99
3.5 Dimensions and mounting methods ....................29 8.5 Switching frequency ......................................... 100
3.6 Enclosure for standard drives .............................35
3.7 Enclosure design and drive ambient 9 NV Media Card .................................. 101
temperature .........................................................37 9.1 Introduction ...................................................... 101
3.8 Heatsink fan operation ........................................37 9.2 SD card support ............................................... 101
3.9 Enclosing the size 5 to 6 drives for high 9.3 NV Media Card parameters ............................. 103
environmental protection .....................................38 9.4 NV Media Card trips ......................................... 103
3.10 External EMC filter ..............................................40
3.11 Electrical terminals ..............................................43
3.12 Routine maintenance ..........................................45
4 Electrical installation ...........................47

4.1 Power connections ..............................................47
4.2 AC supply requirements ......................................51
4.3 24 Vdc supply ......................................................54
4.4 Ratings ................................................................55
4.5 Output circuit and motor protection .....................58
4.6 Braking ................................................................61
4.7 Ground leakage ...................................................63
4.8 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) ..................63
4.9 Communications connections .............................71
4.10 Control connections ............................................71
4.11 SAFE TORQUE OFF (STO) ...............................74
4 Unidrive M300 User Guide

Issue Number: 7
10 Advanced parameters .......................104
10.1 Menu 1: Frequency reference ...........................114
10.2 Menu 2: Ramps .................................................118
10.3 Menu 3: Frequency control ...............................121
10.4 Menu 4: Torque and current control ..................126
10.5 Menu 5: Motor control .......................................129
10.6 Menu 6: Sequencer and clock ..........................133
10.7 Menu 7: Analog I/O ...........................................135
10.8 Menu 8: Digital I/O ............................................138
10.9 Menu 9: Programmable logic, motorized
pot, binary sum and timers ................................144
10.10 Menu 10: Status and trips .................................148
10.11 Menu 11: General drive set-up .........................150
10.12 Menu 12: Threshold detectors, variable
selectors and brake control function .................151
10.13 Menu 14: User PID controller ............................156
10.14 Menu 15: Option module set-up ........................159
10.15 Menu 18: Application menu 1 ...........................160
10.16 Menu 20: Application menu 2 ...........................161
10.17 Menu 21: Second motor parameters ................162
10.18 Menu 22: Additional Menu 0 set-up ..................163
11 Technical data ...................................165

11.1 Drive technical data ..........................................165
11.2 Optional external EMC filters ............................184
12 Diagnostics ........................................185
12.1 Status modes (Keypad and LED status) ...........185
12.2 Trip indications ..................................................185
12.3 Identifying a trip / trip source .............................185
12.4 Trips, Sub-trip numbers ....................................187
12.5 Internal / Hardware trips ....................................204
12.6 Alarm indications ...............................................204
12.7 Status indications ..............................................205
12.8 Displaying the trip history ..................................205
12.9 Behaviour of the drive when tripped .................205
13 UL listing information .......................206

13.1 General .............................................................206
13.2 Mounting ...........................................................206
13.3 Environment ......................................................206
13.4 Electrical installation .........................................206
13.5 UL listed accessories ........................................206
13.6 Motor overload protection .................................206
13.7 Motor overspeed protection ..............................206
13.8 Thermal memory retention ................................206
13.9 Electrical ratings ................................................206
13.10 cUL requirements for frame size 4 ....................206
13.11 Group installation ..............................................206
Unidrive M300 User Guide 5

Issue Number: 7
Declaration of Conformity
Control Techniques Ltd Moteurs Leroy-Somer

The Gro Usine des Agriers
Newtown Boulevard Marcellin Leroy
Powys CS10015
UK 16915 Angoulême Cedex 9
SY16 3BE France
This declaration applies to Unidrive M variable speed drive products, These products comply with the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC and
comprising models numbers as shown below: the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2004/108/EC.
Maaa-bbcddddd Valid characters:

aaa 100, 101, 200, 201, 300, 400
bb 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08
c 1, 2, 4, 5 or 6
00017, 00024, 00033, 00042
00013, 00018, 00023, 00024, 00032, 00033,
00041, 00042, 00056, 00075 T. Alexander
00056, 00073, 00094, 00100 Vice President, Technology
00133, 00135, 00170, 00176 Newtown
ddddd 00030, 00040, 00069, 00250, 00270, 00300
00100, 00150, 00190, 00230, 00290, 00330, Date: 29th May 2014
00350, 00420, 00440, 00470
00190, 00240, 00290, 00380, 00440, 00540,
These electronic drive products are intended to be used with
00550, 00610, 00660, 00750, 00770, 00830,
appropriate motors, controllers, electrical protection components
01000
and other equipment to form complete end products or systems.
00630, 00860, 01160, 01320, 01340, 01570 Compliance with safety and EMC regulations depends upon
installing and configuring drives correctly, including using the
The AC variable speed drive products listed above have been designed specified input filters. The drives must be installed only by
and manufactured in accordance with the following European professional assemblers who are familiar with requirements for
harmonized standards: safety and EMC. The assembler is responsible for ensuring that the
end product or system complies with all the relevant laws in the
Adjustable speed electrical power drive country where it is to be used. Refer to the User Guide. An EMC
EN 61800-5-1:2007 systems - safety requirements - electrical, Data Sheet is also available giving detailed EMC information.
thermal and energy
Adjustable speed electrical power drive

EN 61800-3:2004 systems. EMC product standard including
specific test methods
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic

EN 61000-6-2:2005 standards. Immunity standard for industrial
environments
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic

EN 61000-6-4:2007 standards. Emission standard for industrial
environments
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), Limits,

EN 61000-3-2:2006 Limits for harmonic current emissions
(equipment input current <16 A per phase)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), Limits,

Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in
EN 61000-3-3:2008
low-voltage supply systems for equipment
with rated current <16 A
EN 61000-3-2:2006 Applicable where input current <16 A. No limits

apply for professional equipment where input power >1 kW.

Issue Number: 7
Declaration of Conformity (including 2006 Machinery Directive)
Powys CS10015
SY16 3BE France
This declaration applies to the Unidrive M variable speed drive product range, comprising model numbers composed as shown below:
Maaa-bbbbbbbbb Valid characters:
aaa 300, 400
01100017A, 01100024A, 01200017A, 01200024A, 01200033A, 01200042
02100042A, 02100056A, 02200024A, 02200033A, 02200042A, 02200056A, 02200075A, 02400013A, 02400018A, 02400023A,
bbbbbbbbb 02400032A, 02400041A
03200100A, 03400056A, 03400073A, 03400094A
04200133A, 04200176A, 04400135A, 04400170A
This declaration relates to these products when used as a safety component of a machine. Only the SAFE TORQUE OFF function may be
used for a safety function of a machine. None of the other functions of the drive may be used to carry out a safety function.
These products fulfil all the relevant provisions of Directive 2006/42/EC (The Machinery Directive).
EC type-examination has been carried out by the following notified body:
TÜV Rheinland Industrie Service GmbH
Alboinstraße 56
12103 Berlin, Germany
Notified Body identification number: 0035
EC type-examination certificate number: 01/205/5383.00/14
The harmonised standards used are shown below:

EN 61800-5-1:2007 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Safety requirements. Electrical, thermal and energy
EN 61800-5-2:2007 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Safety requirements. Functional
EN ISO 13849-1:2008 Safety of machinery. Safety-related parts of control systems. General principles for design
EN ISO 13849-2:2008 Safety of machinery. Safety-related parts of control systems. Validation
EN 62061:2005 Safety of machinery. Functional safety of safety related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems
Person authorised to compile the technical file:

C Hargis
Chief Engineer
Newtown, Powys. UK
T. Alexander
VP Technology
Date: 9th April 2014
Place: Newtown, Powys. UK
IMPORTANT NOTICE
These drive products are intended to be used with appropriate motors, sensors, electrical protection components and other equipment to
form complete systems. It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that the design of the complete machine, including its safety-
related control system, is carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Machinery Directive and any other relevant legislation.
The use of a safety-related drive in itself does not ensure the safety of the machine.
Compliance with safety and EMC regulations depends upon installing and configuring inverters correctly. The inverters must be installed
only by professional assemblers who are familiar with requirements for safety and EMC. The assembler is responsible for ensuring that
the end product or system complies with all the relevant laws in the country where it is to be used. Refer to the User Guide.

Issue Number: 7
Declaration of Conformity (including 2006 Machinery Directive)
Powys CS10015
SY16 3BE France
This declaration applies to the Unidrive M variable speed drive product range, comprising model numbers composed as shown below:
Maaa-bbbbbbbbb Valid characters:
aaa 300, 400
05200250A, 05400270A, 05400300A, 05500030A, 05500040A, 05500069A

06200330A, 06200440A, 06400350A, 06400420A, 06400470A, 06500100A, 06500150A, 06500190A, 06500230A, 06500290A,
06500350A
bbbbbbbbb
07200610A, 07200750A, 07200830A, 07400660A, 07400770A, 07401000A, 07500440A, 07500550A, 07600190A, 07600240A,
07600290A, 07600380A, 07600440A, 07600540A
08201160A, 08201320A, 08401340A, 08401570A, 08500630A, 08500860A, 08600630A, 08600860A
This declaration relates to these products when used as a safety component of a machine. Only the SAFE TORQUE OFF function may be
used for a safety function of a machine. None of the other functions of the drive may be used to carry out a safety function.
These products fulfil all the relevant provisions of Directive 2006/42/EC (The Machinery Directive).
EC type-examination has been carried out by the following notified body:
TÜV Rheinland Industrie Service GmbH
Alboinstraße 56
12103 Berlin, Germany
Notified Body identification number: 0035

EC type-examination certificate number: 01/205/5387.00/14
The harmonised standards used are shown below:

EN 61800-5-1:2007 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Safety requirements. Electrical, thermal and energy
EN 61800-5-2:2007 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Safety requirements. Functional
EN ISO 13849-1:2008 Safety of machinery. Safety-related parts of control systems. General principles for design
EN ISO 13849-2:2008 Safety of machinery. Safety-related parts of control systems. Validation
EN 62061:2005 Safety of machinery. Functional safety of safety related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems
Person authorised to compile the technical file:
C Hargis
Chief Engineer
Newtown, Powys. UK
T. Alexander
VP Technology
Date: 13th May 2014
Place: Newtown, Powys. UK
IMPORTANT NOTICE
These drive products are intended to be used with appropriate motors, sensors, electrical protection components and other equipment to
form complete systems. It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that the design of the complete machine, including its safety-
related control system, is carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Machinery Directive and any other relevant legislation.
The use of a safety-related drive in itself does not ensure the safety of the machine.
Compliance with safety and EMC regulations depends upon installing and configuring inverters correctly. The inverters must be installed
only by professional assemblers who are familiar with requirements for safety and EMC. The assembler is responsible for ensuring that
the end product or system complies with all the relevant laws in the country where it is to be used. Refer to the User Guide.

Issue Number: 7
Safety Product Mechanical Electrical Getting Basic Running the NV Media Advanced UL listing
Optimization Technical data Diagnostics
information information installation installation started parameters motor Card parameters information
1 Safety information 1.5 Access

Drive access must be restricted to authorized personnel only. Safety
1.1 Warnings, Cautions and Notes regulations which apply at the place of use must be complied with.
1.6 Fire protection

A Warning contains information which is essential for The drive enclosure is not classified as a fire enclosure. A separate fire
avoiding a safety hazard. enclosure must be provided. For further information, refer to section
WARNING 3.2.5 Fire protection on page 21.
1.7 Compliance with regulations

A Caution contains information which is necessary for The installer is responsible for complying with all relevant regulations,
avoiding a risk of damage to the product or other equipment. such as national wiring regulations, accident prevention regulations and
CAUTION electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) regulations. Particular attention
must be given to the cross-sectional areas of conductors, the selection
NOTE of fuses or other protection, and protective ground (earth) connections.
A Note contains information which helps to ensure correct operation of This User Guide contains instruction for achieving compliance with
the product. specific EMC standards.
Within the European Union, all machinery in which this product is used
1.2 Electrical safety - general warning must comply with the following directives:
The voltages used in the drive can cause severe electrical shock and/or 2006/42/EC Safety of machinery.
burns, and could be lethal. Extreme care is necessary at all times when 2004/108/EC: Electromagnetic Compatibility.
working with or adjacent to the drive.
Specific warnings are given at the relevant places in this User Guide. 1.8 Motor
1.3 System design and safety of Ensure the motor is installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Ensure the motor shaft is not exposed.
personnel
Standard squirrel cage induction motors are designed for single speed
The drive is intended as a component for professional incorporation into operation. If it is intended to use the capability of the drive to run a motor
complete equipment or a system. If installed incorrectly, the drive may at speeds above its designed maximum, it is strongly recommended that
present a safety hazard. the manufacturer is consulted first.
The drive uses high voltages and currents, carries a high level of stored Low speeds may cause the motor to overheat because the cooling fan
electrical energy, and is used to control equipment which can cause becomes less effective. The motor should be installed with a protection
injury. thermistor. If necessary, an electric forced vent fan should be used.
Close attention is required to the electrical installation and the system The values of the motor parameters set in the drive affect the protection
design to avoid hazards either in normal operation or in the event of of the motor. The default values in the drive should not be relied upon.
equipment malfunction. System design, installation, commissioning/
It is essential that the correct value is entered in Pr 00.006 motor rated
start-up and maintenance must be carried out by personnel who have
current. This affects the thermal protection of the motor.
the necessary training and experience. They must read this safety
information and this User Guide carefully.
1.9 Mechanical brake control
The STOP and SAFE TORQUE OFF functions of the drive do not isolate
dangerous voltages from the output of the drive or from any external The brake control functions are provided to allow well co-ordinated
option unit. The supply must be disconnected by an approved electrical operation of an external brake with the drive. While both hardware and
isolation device before gaining access to the electrical connections. software are designed to high standards of quality and robustness, they
are not intended for use as safety functions, i.e. where a fault or failure
With the sole exception of the SAFE TORQUE OFF function, none would result in a risk of injury. In any application where the incorrect
of the drive functions must be used to ensure safety of personnel, operation of the brake release mechanism could result in injury,
i.e. they must not be used for safety-related functions. independent protection devices of proven integrity must also be
Careful consideration must be given to the functions of the drive which incorporated.
might result in a hazard, either through their intended behavior or
through incorrect operation due to a fault. In any application where a 1.10 Adjusting parameters
malfunction of the drive or its control system could lead to or allow
Some parameters have a profound effect on the operation of the drive.
damage, loss or injury, a risk analysis must be carried out, and where
They must not be altered without careful consideration of the impact on
necessary, further measures taken to reduce the risk - for example, an
the controlled system. Measures must be taken to prevent unwanted
over-speed protection device in case of failure of the speed control, or a
changes due to error or tampering.
fail-safe mechanical brake in case of loss of motor braking.
The SAFE TORQUE OFF function may be used in a safety-related
application. The system designer is responsible for ensuring that the
complete system is safe and designed correctly according to the
relevant safety standards.
1.4 Environmental limits

Instructions in this User Guide regarding transport, storage, installation
and use of the drive must be complied with, including the specified
environmental limits. Drives must not be subjected to excessive physical
force.

Issue Number: 7
1.11 Electrical installation

1.11.1 Electric shock risk
The voltages present in the following locations can cause severe electric
shock and may be lethal:
AC supply cables and connections
Output cables and connections
Many internal parts of the drive, and external option units
Unless otherwise indicated, control terminals are single insulated and
must not be touched.
1.11.2 Stored charge
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a potentially lethal
voltage after the AC supply has been disconnected. If the drive has been
energized, the AC supply must be isolated at least ten minutes before
work may continue.
1.12 Hazard
1.12.1 Falling hazard
The drive presents a falling or toppling hazard. This can still cause injury
to personnel and therefore should be handled with care.
Maximum weight:
Size 1: 0.75 kg (1.65 Ib).
Size 2: 1.3 kg (3.0 lb).
Size 3: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb).
Size 4: 3.13 kg (6.9 Ib).
Size 5: 7.4 kg (16.3 Ib).
Size 6: 14 kg (30.9 Ib).

Issue Number:7
2 Product information
2.1 Model number
The way in which the model numbers for the Unidrive M range are formed is illustrated below:
Figure 2-1 Model number
Identification Label
Derivative Electrical Specifications Reserved Documentation Customer Code Optional Build
M300 - 03 4 00073 A 1 0 1 01 A B 1 0 0
Unidrive M300 Reserved:

Product Line
Conformal Coating:
Frame Size : 0 = Standard
IP / NEMA Rating:
Voltage Rating: 1 = IP20 / NEMA 1
1 - 100 V (100 - 120 ± 10 %)
2 - 200 V (200 - 240 ± 10 %)
4 - 400 V (380 - 480 ± 10 %) Brake Transistor:
5 - 575 V (500 - 575 ± 10 %) B = Brake
6 - 690 V (500 - 690 ± 10 %)
Cooling:
Current Rating: A = Air
Heavy Duty current rating x 10
Customer Code:
Drive Format: 00 = 50 Hz
A - AC in AC out 01 = 60 Hz
Documentation:
0 - Supplied separately
1 - English

Issue Number: 7
2.2 Ratings
The size 1 to 4 drive is Heavy Duty rated only.
Available output
The size 5 to 6 drive is dual rated. current Overload limit -
The setting of the motor rated current determines which rating applies - Heavy Duty
Heavy Duty or Normal Duty. Maximum Overload limit -
The two ratings are compatible with motors designed to IEC60034. continuous Normal Duty
current (above
The graph aside illustrates the difference between Normal Duty and 50% base
Heavy Duty with respect to continuous current rating and short term speed) -
Normal Duty
overload limits.
Maximum
continuous
current -
Heavy Duty
Motor rated
current set
in the drive
Heavy Duty - with high Normal Duty
overload capability
Normal Duty Heavy Duty (default)

For applications which use Self ventilated (TENV/TEFC) induction For constant torque applications or applications which require a high
motors and require a low overload capability, and full torque at low overload capability, or full torque is required at low speeds (e.g. winders,
speeds is not required (e.g. fans, pumps). hoists).
Self ventilated (TENV/TEFC) induction motors require increased The thermal protection is set to protect force ventilated induction motors
protection against overload due to the reduced cooling effect of the fan by default.
at low speed. To provide the correct level of protection the I2t software NOTE N
operates at a level which is speed dependent. This is illustrated in the If the application uses a self ventilated (TENV/TEFC) induction motor
graph below. and increased thermal protection is required for speeds below 50 %
NOTE base speed, then this can be enabled by setting Low Speed Thermal
The speed at which the low speed protection takes effect can be Protection Mode (04.025) = 1.
changed by the setting of Low Speed Thermal Protection Mode
(04.025). The protection starts when the motor speed is below 15 % of
base speed when Pr 04.025 = 0 (default) and below 50 % when
Pr 04.025 = 1.
Operation of motor I2t protection
Motor I2t protection is fixed as shown below and is compatible with: Motor I2t protection defaults to be compatible with:
• Self ventilated (TENV/TEFC) induction motors • Forced ventilation induction motors
Motor total Motor total

current (Pr 04.001) current (Pr 04.001)
as a percentage as a percentage
of motor rated I2t protection operates in this region of motor rated 2
I t protection operates in this region
current current
100% 100%
70% 70%
Max. permissible Max. permissible
continuous continuous
current current
Pr 04.025 = 0 Pr 04.025 = 0
Pr 04.025 = 1 Pr 04.025 = 1
15% 50% 100% Motor speed as a 50% 100% Motor speed as a

percentage of base speed percentage of base speed
The continuous current ratings given are for maximum 40 °C (104 °F), 1000 m altitude and 3.0 kHz switching. Derating is required for higher switching
frequencies, ambient temperature >40 °C (104 °F) and high altitude. For further information, refer to Chapter 11 Technical data on page 165.

Issue Number: 7
Table 2-1 100 V drive ratings (100 V to 120 V ±10 %)
Heavy Duty
Maximum
Open loop peak Nominal power at Motor power at
Model continuous RFC peak current
current 100 V 100 V
output current
A A A kW hp
01100017 1.7 2.6 3.1 0.25 0.33

Frame size 1
01100024 2.4 3.6 4.3 0.37 0.5
02100042 4.2 6.3 7.6 0.75 1

Frame size 2
02100056 5.6 8.4 10.1 1.1 1.5
Normal Duty Heavy Duty

Maximum Maximum Open
Nominal Motor RFC Nominal Motor
continuous Peak continuous loop
Model power at power at peak power at power at
output current output peak
230 V 230 V current 230 V 230 V
current current current
A kW hp A A A A kW hp
01200017 1.7 2.6 3.1 0.25 0.33
01200024 2.4 3.6 4.3 0.37 0.5
Frame size 1
01200033 3.3 5 5.9 0.55 0.75
01200042 4.2 6.3 7.6 0.75 1
02200024 2.4 3.6 4.3 0.37 0.5
02200033 3.3 5 5.9 0.55 0.75
Frame size 2 02200042 4.2 6.3 7.6 0.75 1
02200056 5.6 8.4 10.1 1.1 1
02200075 7.5 11.3 13.5 1.5 2
Frame size 3 03200100 10 15 18 2.2 3
04200133 13.3 20 23.9 3 3
Frame size 4
04200176 17.6 16.4 31.7 4 5
Frame size 5 05200250 30 7.5 10 33 25 37.5 50 5.5 7.5
06200330 50 11 15 55 33 49.5 66 7.5 10
Frame size 6
06200440 58 15 20 63.8 44 66 88 11 15

Issue Number: 7

400 V 460 V current 400 V 460 V
02400013 1.3 2 2.3 0.37 0.5
02400018 1.8 2.7 3.2 0.55 0.75
Frame size 2 02400023 2.3 3.5 4.1 0.75 1
02400032 3.2 4.8 5.8 1.1 1.5
02400041 4.1 6.2 7.4 1.5 2
03400056 5.6 8.4 10.1 2.2 3
Frame size 3 03400073 7.3 11 13.1 3 3
03400094 9.4 14.1 16.9 4 5
04400135 13.5 20.3 24.3 5.5 7.5
Frame size 4
04400170 17 25.5 30.6 7.5 10
05400270 30 15 20 33 27 40.5 54 11 20
Frame size 5
05400300 31 15 20 34.1 30 45 60 15 20
06400350 38 18.5 25 41.8 35 52.5 70 15 25
Frame size 6 06400420 48 22 30 52.8 42 63 84 18.5 30
06400470 63 30 40 69.3 47 70.5 94 22 30

575 V 575 V current 575 V 575 V
05500030 3.9 2.2 3 4.3 3 4.5 6 1.5 2
Frame size 5 05500040 6.1 4 5 6.7 4 6 8 2.2 3
05500069 10 5.5 7.5 11 6.9 10.3 13.8 4 5
06500100 12 7.5 10 13.2 10 15 20 5.5 7.5
06500150 17 11 15 18.7 15 22.5 30 7.5 10
06500190 22 15 20 24.2 19 28.5 38 11 15
Frame size 6
06500230 27 18.5 25 29.7 23 34.5 46 15 20
06500290 34 22 30 37.4 29 43.5 58 18.5 25
06500350 43 30 40 47.3 35 52.5 70 22 30
2.2.1 Typical short term overload limits

The maximum percentage overload limit changes depending on the selected motor. Variations in motor rated current, motor power factor and motor
leakage inductance all result in changes in the maximum possible overload. The exact value for a specific motor can be calculated using the
equations detailed in Menu 4 in the Parameter Reference Guide.
Typical values are shown in the table below for RFC-A and open loop (OL) modes:
Table 2-5 Typical overload limits
Operating mode RFC From cold RFC From 100 % Open loop from cold Open loop from 100 %
Normal Duty overload with motor rated
110 % for 165 s 110 % for 9 s 110 % for 165 s 110 % for 9 s
current = drive rated current
Heavy Duty overload with motor rated
180 % for 3 s 180 % for 3 s 150 % for 60 s 150 % for 8 s
current = drive rated current
Generally the drive rated current is higher than the matching motor rated current allowing a higher level of overload than the default setting.
The time allowed in the overload region is proportionally reduced at very low output frequency on some drive ratings.
NOTE
The maximum overload level which can be attained is independent of the speed.

Issue Number: 7
2.3 Operating modes

The drive is designed to operate in any of the following modes:
1. Open loop mode
Open loop vector mode
Fixed V/F mode (V/Hz)
Square V/F mode (V/Hz)
2. RFC - A
Without position feedback sensor (Sensorless)
2.3.1 Open loop mode

The drive applies power to the motor at frequencies varied by the user. The motor speed is a result of the output frequency of the drive and slip due
to the mechanical load. The drive can improve the speed control of the motor by applying slip compensation. The performance at low speed depends
on whether V/F mode or open loop vector mode is selected.
Open loop vector mode

The voltage applied to the motor is directly proportional to the frequency except at low speed where the drive uses motor parameters to apply the
correct voltage to keep the flux constant under varying load conditions.
Typically 100 % torque is available down to 1 Hz for a 50 Hz motor.
Fixed V/F mode
The voltage applied to the motor is directly proportional to the frequency except at low speed where a voltage boost is provided which is set by the
user. This mode can be used for multi-motor applications.
Typically 100 % torque is available down to 4 Hz for a 50 Hz motor.
Square V/F mode
The voltage applied to the motor is directly proportional to the square of the frequency except at low speed where a voltage boost is provided which is
set by the user. This mode can be used for running fan or pump applications with quadratic load characteristics or for multi-motor applications. This
mode is not suitable for applications requiring a high starting torque.
2.3.2 RFC-A mode
Rotor Flux Control for Asynchronous (induction) motors (RFC-A) encompasses closed loop vector control without a position feedback device
Without position feedback sensor
Rotor flux control provides closed loop control without the need for position feedback by using current, voltages and key motor parameters to estimate
the motor speed. It can eliminate instability traditionally associated with open loop control for example when operating large motors with light loads at
low frequencies.

Issue Number: 7
2.4 Drive features

Figure 2-2 Features of the drive (size 1 to 4)
1
2
3
5 4
13
3
1 1 7 3
5 4 11
8 13 6
10
7 6
8
11 10
9
12 12
5 4
1
13
3 4
3
4
5
13 9
7 3 8
7
6
8
11 10
9 6
11 10
12 12
Key
1. Rating label (On side of drive) 6. Braking terminal 11. AC supply connections
2. Identification label 7. Internal EMC filter screw 12. Ground connections
3. Option module connection 8. DC bus + 13. SAFE TORQUE OFF connections
4. Relay connections 9. DC bus -
5. Control connections 10. Motor connections

Issue Number: 7
Figure 2-3 Features of the drive (size 5 to 6)
7 8 6 8 7 6
2 2
2
1
3
5 4
5 6
3
12
11
9 10 10 11 9
Key
1. Keypad 6. Braking terminal 11. Ground connections
2. Rating label 7. DC bus + 12. SAFE TORQUE OFF connections
3. Option module slot 1 8. DC bus -
4. Relay connections 9. Motor connections
5. Control connections 10. AC supply connections
2.5 Keypad and display

The keypad and display provide information to the user regarding the operating status of the drive and trip codes, and provide the means for changing
parameters, stopping and starting the drive, and the ability to perform a drive reset.
Figure 2-4 Unidrive M300 keypad detail
6 1
5 2
4 3
(1) The Enter button is used to enter parameter view or edit mode, or to accept a parameter edit.
(2, 5) The Navigation keys can be used to select individual parameters or to edit parameter values. In keypad mode, the ‘Up’ and ‘Down’ keys are
also used to increase or decrease the motor speed.
(3) The Stop / Reset button is used to stop and reset the drive in keypad mode. It can also be used to reset the drive in terminal mode.
(4) The Start button is used to start the drive in keypad mode.
(6) The Escape button is used to exit from the parameter edit / view mode or disregard a parameter edit.

Issue Number: 7
2.6 Nameplate description

See Figure 2-2 for location of rating labels.
Figure 2-5 Typical drive rating labels size 2
Model number Key to approvals
CE approval Europe
M300-022 00042 A
Input C Tick approval Australia
voltage 200-240V 0.75kW Power rating
Refer to USA &
V40 UL / cUL approval
User Guide R
Canada
Date code RoHS compliant Europe
Model Input Power

number frequency rating
M300-022 00042 A 0.75kW Date code

Input voltage 5.4A No. of phases &
Typical input current
Output
voltage
Serial Heavy duty

number output current
Manuals: www.ctmanuals.info
Approvals
Refer to Figure 2-1 Model number on page 11 for further information relating to the labels.

Issue Number: 7
2.7 Options
Figure 2-6 Options available with the drive
4 1
1. AI 485 Adaptor
2. SI module
3. CT Comms cable
4. Remote mountable LCD keypad
5. AI-Backup adaptor module
Table 2-6 System Integration (SI) option module identification
Type Option module Color Name Further details
Profibus option
Purple SI-PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS adaptor for communications with the drive
Medium DeviceNet option

Fieldbus SI-DeviceNet
Grey DeviceNet adaptor for communications with the drive
CANopen option
Light Grey SI-CANopen
CANopen adaptor for communications with the drive
Extended I/O
Increases the I/O capability by adding the following
combinations:
Automation • Digital I/O
Orange SI-I/O
(I/O expansion) • Digital Inputs
• Analog Inputs (differential or single ended)
• Analog Output
• Relays

Issue Number: 7
Table 2-7 Adaptor Interface (AI) option module identification

Type Option module Name Further Details
485 serial communications option

Communications AI-485 Adaptor Provides a 485 serial communications interface via an RJ45
connector or alternative screw terminals.
Backup AI-Backup Adaptor + 24 V Backup and SD Card Interface
2.8 Items supplied with the drive

The drive is supplied with a copy of the Quick Start Guide, a safety information booklet, the Certificate of Quality and an accessory kit box (size 5 to 6
only), including the items shown in Table 2-8.
Table 2-8 Parts supplied with the drive
Description Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6
STO connector
x1
Grounding bracket
x1
M4 x 8 Double Sem
Torx screw
x2
Grounding bracket
x1
Surface mounting
brackets
x2 x2
Grounding clamp
x1 x1
Terminal nuts
M6 x 11
Supply and motor

connector
x1 x1
Finger guard
grommets
x3 x2

Issue Number: 7
3 Mechanical installation For further information, refer to section 3.6 Enclosure for standard
drives on page 35.
This chapter describes how to use all mechanical details to install the 3.2.4 Electrical safety
drive. The drive is intended to be installed in an enclosure. Key features The installation must be safe under normal and fault conditions.
of this chapter include: Electrical installation instructions are given in Chapter 4 Electrical
• Through hole mounting installation on page 47.
• High IP as standard or Through-panel mounting
• Enclosure sizing and layout
3.2.5 Fire protection
The drive enclosure is not classified as a fire enclosure. A separate fire
• Option module installing
enclosure must be provided.
• Terminal location and torque settings
For installation in the USA, a NEMA 12 enclosure is suitable.
3.1 Safety information For installation outside the USA, the following (based on IEC 62109-1,
Follow the instructions standard for PV inverters) is recommended.
The mechanical and electrical installation instructions must Enclosure can be metal and/or polymeric, polymer must meet
be adhered to. Any questions or doubt should be referred to requirements which can be summarized for larger enclosures as using
the supplier of the equipment. It is the responsibility of the materials meeting at least UL 94 class 5VB at the point of minimum
WARNING owner or user to ensure that the installation of the drive and thickness.
any external option unit, and the way in which they are Air filter assemblies to be at least class V-2.
operated and maintained, comply with the requirements of
The location and size of the bottom shall cover the area shown in Figure
the Health and Safety at Work Act in the United Kingdom or
applicable legislation and regulations and codes of practice in 3-1. Any part of the side which is within the area traced out by the 5°
angle is also considered to be part of the bottom of the fire enclosure.
the country in which the equipment is used.
Figure 3-1 Fire enclosure bottom layout
Competence of the installer
The drive must be installed by professional assemblers who
are familiar with the requirements for safety and EMC. The
assembler is responsible for ensuring that the end product or
WARNING system complies with all the relevant laws in the country
where it is to be used. Drive
Enclosure
The drive is intended to be mounted in an enclosure which
prevents access except by trained and authorized
personnel, and which prevents the ingress of contamination.
WARNING
It is designed for use in an environment classified as
pollution degree 2 in accordance with IEC 60664-1. This
means that only dry, non-conducting contamination is
acceptable. o
5
3.2 Planning the installation
The following considerations must be made when planning the installation: o
5
3.2.1 Access
Access must be restricted to authorized personnel only. Safety
regulations which apply at the place of use must be complied with.
The IP (Ingress Protection) rating of the drive is installation dependent. The bottom, including the part of the side considered to be part of the
For further information, refer to section 3.9 Enclosing the size 5 to 6 bottom, must be designed to prevent escape of burning material - either
drives for high environmental protection on page 38. by having no openings or by having a baffle construction. This means
that openings for cables etc. must be sealed with materials meeting the
3.2.2 Environmental protection 5VB requirement, or else have a baffle above. See Figure 3-2 for
The drive must be protected from:
acceptable baffle construction. This does not apply for mounting in an
• Moisture, including dripping water or spraying water and enclosed electrical operating area (restricted access) with concrete floor.
condensation. An anti-condensation heater may be required, which
Figure 3-2 Fire enclosure baffle construction
must be switched off when the drive is running.
• Contamination with electrically conductive material Not less
than 2
• Contamination with any form of dust which may restrict the fan, or times ‘X’
N o t le s s
th a n 2 X
Baffle plates (may be above or
B a f f le p la t e s ( m a y b e
impair airflow over various components below bottom of enclosure)

a b o v e o r b e lo w b o t t o m
o f e n c lo s u r e )
• Temperature beyond the specified operating and storage ranges X

• Corrosive gasses X
B o t t o m o f fir e
NOTE Bottom of fire enclosure

e n c lo s u r e
During installation it is recommended that the vents on the drive are

covered to prevent debris (e.g. wire off-cuts) from entering the drive.
3.2.3 Cooling
The heat produced by the drive must be removed without its specified
operating temperature being exceeded. Note that a sealed enclosure
gives much reduced cooling compared with a ventilated one, and may
need to be larger and/or use internal air circulating fans.

Issue Number: 7
3.2.6 Electromagnetic compatibility

Variable speed drives are powerful electronic circuits which can cause electromagnetic interference if not installed correctly with careful attention to
the layout of the wiring.
Some simple routine precautions can prevent disturbance to typical industrial control equipment.
If it is necessary to meet strict emission limits, or if it is known that electromagnetically sensitive equipment is located nearby, then full precautions
must be observed. In-built into the drive, is an internal EMC filter, which reduces emissions under certain conditions. If these conditions are exceeded,
then the use of an external EMC filter may be required at the drive inputs, which must be located very close to the drives. Space must be made
available for the filters and allowance made for carefully segregated wiring. Both levels of precautions are covered in section 4.8 EMC
(Electromagnetic compatibility) on page 63.
3.2.7 Hazardous areas

The drive must not be located in a classified hazardous area unless it is installed in an approved enclosure and the installation is certified.
3.3 Terminal cover removal
Isolation device
The AC and / or DC power supply must be disconnected from the drive using an approved isolation device before any cover is removed
from the drive or before any servicing work is performed.
WARNING
Stored charge
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a potentially lethal voltage after the AC and / or DC power supply has been
disconnected. If the drive has been energized, the power supply must be isolated at least ten minutes before work may continue.
Normally, the capacitors are discharged by an internal resistor. Under certain, unusual fault conditions, it is possible that the capacitors may
WARNING
fail to discharge, or be prevented from being discharged by a voltage applied to the output terminals. If the drive has failed in a manner that
causes the display to go blank immediately, it is possible the capacitors will not be discharged. In this case, consult Control Techniques or
their authorized distributor.
3.3.1 Removing the terminal covers

Figure 3-3 Location and identification of terminal covers (size 1 to 4)
4
3
3
3
2
1
3
Control / AC / Control / AC / Control / AC / Control / AC /

Motor Terminal Cover Motor Terminal Cover Motor Terminal Cover Motor Terminal Cover
NOTE
The drives shown in Figure 3-3 have a single removable terminal cover which provides access to all electrical connections, i.e. Control, AC, Motor
and Brake functions. Figure 3-5 on page 23 illustrates the three steps required to remove the drive terminal covers.

Issue Number: 7
Figure 3-4 Location and identification of terminal covers (size 5 to 6)

DC / Braking DC / Braking
terminal cover terminal cover
left left
AC motor Control AC motor Control

terminal cover terminal terminal cover terminal cover
cover
Figure 3-5 Removing the terminal cover (size 1 to 4)
3
1. Using a flat bladed screwdriver, turn the terminal cover locking clip anti-clockwise by approximately 30°
2. Slide the terminal cover down
3. Remove terminal cover

Issue Number: 7
Figure 3-6 Removing the size 5 terminal covers
Pozi Pz 2
1. Control terminal cover

When replacing the terminal covers, the screws should be tightened to a maximum torque of 1 N m (0.7 lb ft).
Figure 3-7 Removing the size 6 terminal covers
Pozi Pz 2
1. Control terminal cover

When replacing the terminal covers, the screws should be tightened to a maximum torque of 1 N m (0.7 lb ft).

Issue Number: 7
3.3.2 Removing the finger-guard and DC terminal

cover break-outs
Figure 3-8 Removing the finger-guard break-outs
A: All sizes
B: Size 5 only
C: Size 6 only
Place finger-guard on a flat solid surface and hit relevant break-outs with
hammer as shown (1). Continue until all required break-outs are
removed (2). Remove any flash / sharp edges once the break-outs are
removed.

Issue Number: 7
3.4 Installing / removing options
Power down the drive before installing / removing the SI option module. Failure to do so may result in damage to the product.
CAUTION
Figure 3-9 Installation of an SI option module (size 2 to 4)
1
• With the option module tilted slightly backwards, align and locate the two holes in the rear of the option module onto the two tabs (1) on the drive.
• Press the option module onto the drive as shown in (2) until the connector mates with the drive, ensuring that the tab (3) retains the option module
in place.
NOTE
Check that the option module is securely located on the drive. Always ensure that the terminal cover is always replaced before use as this ensures
that the option module is firmly secured.
Figure 3-10 Removal of an SI option module (size 2 to 4)
2
1
• Press down on the tab (1) to release the option module from the drive housing as shown.
• Tilt the option module slightly towards you and pull away from the drive housing (2).

Issue Number: 7
Figure 3-11 Installation of an SI option module (size 5 to 6)
1 2
• Move the option module in the direction shown (1).

• Align and insert the option module tab into the slot provided (2), This is shown in the detailed view (A).
• Press down on the option module until it clicks in place.
Figure 3-12 Removal of an SI option module (size 5 to 6)
A
1 2 3
• To release the option module from the drive housing, press down on the tab (1) as shown in detailed view (A).
• Tilt the option module towards you as shown in (2).
• Remove the option module by lifting away from the drive as shown in (3).

Issue Number: 7
Figure 3-13 Installing the AI-485 adaptor to the drive
2
1
• Identify the two plastic fingers on the underside of the AI-485 adaptor (1) - then insert the two fingers into the corresponding slots in the spring
loaded sliding cover on the top of the drive.
• Hold the adaptor firmly and push the spring loaded protective cover towards the back of the drive to expose the connector block (2) below.
• Press the adaptor downwards (3) until the adaptor connector locates into the drive connection below.
Figure 3-14 Removal of the AI-485 adaptor
• To remove the AI-485 adaptor, pull it up and away from the drive in the direction shown (1)
Figure 3-15 Installing the AI-Backup adaptor
1 2
• Identify the two plastic fingers on the underside of the AI-Backup adaptor (1) - then insert the two fingers into the corresponding slots in the
spring-loaded sliding cover on the top of the drive.
• Hold the adaptor firmly and push the spring loaded protective cover towards the back of the drive to expose the connector block (2) below.
• Press the adaptor downwards (3) until the adaptor connector locates into the drive connection as shown.

Issue Number: 7
Figure 3-16 Removal of the AI-Backup adaptor
• To remove the AI-Backup adaptor, pull it up and away from the drive in the direction shown (1).
3.5 Dimensions and mounting methods

The drive can be either surface or through-panel mounted using the appropriate brackets. The following drawings show the dimensions of the drive
and mounting holes for each method to allow a back plate to be prepared.
The Through-panel mounting kit is not supplied with the drive and can be purchased separately, below are the relevant part numbers:
Table 3-1 Through-panel mounting kit part numbers for size 5 to 6
Size CT part number
5 3470-0067
6 3470-0055
If the drive has been used at high load levels for a period of time, the heatsink can reach temperatures in excess of 70 °C (158 °F). Human
contact with the heatsink should be prevented.If the drive has been used at high load levels for a period of time, the heatsink can reach
temperatures in excess of 70 °C (158 °F). Human contact with the heatsink should be prevented.
WARNING
Many of the drives in this product range weigh in excess of 15 kg (33 lb). Use appropriate safeguards when lifting these models.
A full list of drive weights can be found in section 11.1.19 Weights on page 175.
WARNING

Issue Number: 7
3.5.1 Surface mounting

Figure 3-17 Surface mounting the size 1 drive
11 mm
(0.35 in)
9.0 mm
(0.43 in)
75 mm (3.0 in) Æ5.0 mm
53 mm (2.1 in) (0.2 in) x 4 holes
160 mm (6.3 in)
137 mm (5.4 in)
143 mm
(5.63 in)
(0.31 in)
8.0 mm
130 mm (5.12 in)

11 mm
5.5 mm (0.43 in)
(0.22 in) Æ5.0 mm
75 mm (3.0 in) 55 mm (2.20 in) (0.2 in) x 4 holes
205 mm (8.07 in)
180 mm (7.1 in)
194 mm
(7.63 in)
5.5 mm
(0.22 in)
150 mm (6.0 in)

Issue Number: 7

9.5 mm
5.5 mm (0.37 in)
(0.21 in)
90 mm (3.54 in) 70.7 mm (2.80 in) ∅5.0 mm
(0.2 in) x 4 holes
226 mm (8.9 in)
200 mm (7.9 in)
215 mm
(8.5 in)
160 mm (6.3 in)

6.0 mm
(0.24 in)
14.5 mm
(0.57 in)
115 mm (4.53 in) 86.0 mm (3.40 in) Æ6.0 mm
(0.24 in)
6.0 mm
(0.24 in) x 4 holes

277 mm (10.90 in)
245 mm (9.65 in)
265 mm
(10.43 in)
(0.24 in)
6.0 mm
175 mm (6.90 in)

Issue Number: 7
9.0 mm 106 mm (4.17 in) 8.0 mm

143.0 mm (5.63 in) 192.0 mm (7.60 in) (0.35 in) (0.32 in)
391.0 mm (15.39.0 in)
365.0 mm (14.37 in)
375 mm
(14.78 in)
Æ 6.5 mm (0.30 in)

x 4 holes
7.0 mm 6.0 mm
196.0 mm (7.72 in)
210.0 mm (8.27 in) 221.0 mm (8.70 in) (0.28 in) (0.24 in)
389.0 mm (15.32 in)
365.0 mm (14.37 in)
376 mm
(14.80 in)
Æ7.0 mm (0.27 in)

x 4 holes

Issue Number: 7
3.5.2 Through-panel mounting

Figure 3-23 Through-panel mounting the size 5 drive
67.0 mm
(2.64 in)
157 mm (6.18 in)
143.0 mm (5.63 in) 125.0 mm (4.92 in) 17 mm 106 mm (4.17 in)

(0.66 in)
53 mm 53 mm
(2.1 in) (2.1 in)
169 mm (6.65 in)
167 mm (6.58 in)

78.5 mm 78.5 mm
(3.09 in) (3.09 in)
359 mm (14.13 in)

409.0 mm (16.10 in)
365.0 mm (14.37 in)
393 mm (15.47 in)

26 mm 26 mm
(1.02 in)
(1.02 in)
Æ5.0 mm
(0.20 in)
(x 4 holes)
68 mm 68 mm
(2.67 in) (2.67 in)
Radius 1.0 mm 137 mm (5.47 in) Æ 6.5 mm (0.3 in)

(0.04 in) (x 4 holes)
Figure 3-24 Through-panel mounting the size 6 drive

196.0 mm (7.72 in)
221.0 mm (8.70 in)
98.0 mm (3.86 in) 98.0 mm (3.86 in) Æ 7.0 mm (0.276 in)
210.0 mm (8.27 in) 125.0 mm (4.92 in) 96.0 mm
(3.78 in)
120.0 mm (4.73 in)
21.0 mm (0.83 in)
167.0 mm (6.58 in)

264.0 mm (10.39 in)
365.0 mm (14.37 in)
412.0 mm (16.22 in)
356.0 mm (14.02 in)
399.0 mm (15.71 in)
26.0 mm (1.02 in)
26.0 mm (1.02 in)

26.0 mm
(1.02 in)
Æ 5.0 mm
(0.20 in)
Radius 1.0 mm
(0.04 in)
101.0 mm (3.98 in) 101.0 mm (3.98 in)
202.0 mm (7.95 in)
NOTE
The outer holes plus the hole located in the center of the bracket are to be used for through panel mounting.

Issue Number: 7
3.5.3 Mounting brackets

Table 3-2 Mounting brackets (size 5 to 6)
Frame size Surface Qty Through-panel Qty
x2
5 x2 Hole size: 5.2 mm (0.21 in)
x2
Hole size: 6.5 mm (0.26 in) Hole size: 6.5 mm (0.26 in)
x3
6 x2 Hole size: 5.2 mm (0.21 in)
x2
Hole size: 6.5 mm (0.26 in) Hole size: 6.5 mm (0.26 in)
3.5.4 Recommended spacing between the drives

Figure 3-25 Recommended spacing between the drives
Enclosure
3
2 3
2
Table 3-3 Spacing required between the drives (without high IP bung)
Spacing (A)
Drive size
40 °C 50 °C*
1
2
0 mm (0.00)
3
4
5 0 mm (0.00) 30 mm (1.18 in)
6 0 mm (0.00 in)
* 50 °C derating applies, refer to Table 11-5 Maximum permissible
continuous output current @ 50 °C (122 °F) (size 5 to 6) on page 168.
NOTE
When through-panel mounted, ideally drives should be spaced 30 mm
(1.18 in) to maximize panel stiffness.

Issue Number: 7
3.6 Enclosure for standard drives

3.6.1 Enclosure layout
Please observe the clearances in the diagram below taking into account any appropriate notes for other devices / auxiliary equipment when planning
the installation.
Figure 3-26 Enclosure layout
Locate optional braking

Optional braking resistor and overload resistor external to
cubicle (preferably near to or
on top of the cubicle).
Locate
Locateasas Locate the overload protection
required
required device as required
Enclosure
AC supply
contactor and
fuses or MCB ³100 mm
(4 in)
Ensure minimum clearances

are maintained for the drive
and external EMC filter. Forced
or convection air-flow must not
be restricted by any object or
cabling
B B
The external EMC filter can be

bookcase mounted (next to the Note
drive) or footprint mounted (with For EMC compliance:
the drive mounted onto the filter). 1) When using an external EMC
filter, one filter is required for
³100 mm
each drive
(4 in)
2) Power cabling must be at
least 100 mm (4 in) from the
drive in all directions
External
controller
Signal cables
Plan for all signal cables
to be routed at least
300 mm (12 in) from the
drive and any power cable
Table 3-4 Spacing required between drive / enclosure and drive / 3.6.2 Enclosure sizing
EMC filter 1. Add the dissipation figures from section 11.1.2 Power dissipation on
Drive size Spacing (B) page 169 for each drive that is to be installed in the enclosure.
2. If an external EMC filter is to be used with each drive, add the
1 dissipation figures from section on page 184 for each external EMC
2 filter that is to be installed in the enclosure.
0 mm (0.00 in) 3. If the braking resistor is to be mounted inside the enclosure, add the
3 average power figures from for each braking resistor that is to be
4 installed in the enclosure.
4. Calculate the total heat dissipation (in Watts) of any other equipment
5 to be installed in the enclosure.
30 mm (1.18 in) 5. Add the heat dissipation figures obtained above. This gives a figure
6
in Watts for the total heat that will be dissipated inside the enclosure.

Issue Number: 7
Calculating the size of a sealed enclosure The minimum required heat conducting area is then:
The enclosure transfers internally generated heat into the surrounding 392.4
A e = ---------------------------------
air by natural convection (or external forced air flow); the greater the 5.5 ( 40 – 30 )
surface area of the enclosure walls, the better is the dissipation
= 7.135 m2 (77.8 ft2) (1 m2 = 10.9 ft2)
capability. Only the surfaces of the enclosure that are unobstructed (not
in contact with a wall or floor) can dissipate heat. Estimate two of the enclosure dimensions - the height (H) and depth (D),
for instance. Calculate the width (W) from:
Calculate the minimum required unobstructed surface area Ae for the
A e – 2HD
enclosure from: W = --------------------------
H+D
P
A e = ----------------------------------- Inserting H = 2m and D = 0.6 m, obtain the minimum width:
k ( Tint – T ext )
7.135 – ( 2 × 2 × 0.6 )
Where: W = -----------------------------------------------------
2 + 0.6
Ae Unobstructed surface area in m2 (1 m2 = 10.9 ft2) =1.821 m (71.7 in)
T
ext Maximum expected temperature in oC outside the If the enclosure is too large for the space available, it can be made
enclosure smaller only by attending to one or all of the following:
Tint Maximum permissible temperature in oC inside the • Using a lower PWM switching frequency to reduce the dissipation in
enclosure the drives
P Power in Watts dissipated by all heat sources in the • Reducing the ambient temperature outside the enclosure, and/or
enclosure applying forced-air cooling to the outside of the enclosure
k Heat transmission coefficient of the enclosure material • Reducing the number of drives in the enclosure
2o • Removing other heat-generating equipment
in W/m / C
Example Calculating the air-flow in a ventilated enclosure
To calculate the size of an enclosure for the following: The dimensions of the enclosure are required only for accommodating
• Two drives operating at the Normal Duty rating the equipment. The equipment is cooled by the forced air flow.
• External EMC filter for each drive Calculate the minimum required volume of ventilating air from:
• Braking resistors are to be mounted outside the enclosure
3kP
• Maximum ambient temperature inside the enclosure: 40°C V = ---------------------------
T int – T ext
• Maximum ambient temperature outside the enclosure: 30°C
For example, if the power dissipation from each drive is 187 W and the Where:
power dissipation from each external EMC filter is 9.2 W. V Air-flow in m3 per hour (1 m3/hr = 0.59 ft3/min)
Total dissipation: 2 x (187 + 9.2) =392.4 W Text Maximum expected temperature in °C outside the
enclosure
NOTE
Tint Maximum permissible temperature in °C inside the
Power dissipation for the drives and the external EMC filters can be
obtained from Chapter 11 Technical data on page 165. enclosure
P Power in Watts dissipated by all heat sources in the
The enclosure is to be made from painted 2 mm (0.079 in) sheet steel enclosure
having a heat transmission coefficient of 5.5 W/m2/oC. Only the top, Po
front, and two sides of the enclosure are free to dissipate heat. k Ratio of -------
Pl
The value of 5.5 W/m2/ºC
can generally be used with a sheet steel Where:
enclosure (exact values can be obtained by the supplier of the material). P0 is the air pressure at sea level
If in any doubt, allow for a greater margin in the temperature rise.
PI is the air pressure at the installation
Figure 3-27 Enclosure having front, sides and top panels free to Typically use a factor of 1.2 to 1.3, to allow also for pressure-drops in
dissipate heat dirty air-filters.
Example
To calculate the size of an enclosure for the following:
• Three drives operating at the Normal Duty rating
• External EMC filter for each drive
H
• Braking resistors are to be mounted outside the enclosure
• Maximum ambient temperature inside the enclosure: 40 °C
• Maximum ambient temperature outside the enclosure: 30 °C
For example, dissipation of each drive: 101 W and dissipation of each
external EMC filter: 6.9 W (max).
D Total dissipation: 3 x (101 + 6.9) = 323.7 W
W Insert the following values:
Tint 40 °C
Insert the following values: Text 30 °C
Tint 40 °C k 1.3
Text 30 °C P 323.7 W
k 5.5 Then:
P 392.4 W
3 × 1.3 × 323.7
V = ---------------------------------------
40 – 30
= 126.2 m3/hr (74.5 ft3 /min) (1 m3/ hr = 0.59 ft3/min)

Issue Number: 7
3.7 Enclosure design and drive ambient

temperature
Drive derating is required for operation in high ambient temperatures
Totally enclosing or through panel mounting the drive in either a sealed
cabinet (no airflow) or in a well ventilated cabinet makes a significant
difference on drive cooling.
The chosen method affects the ambient temperature value (Trate) which
should be used for any necessary derating to ensure sufficient cooling
for the whole of the drive.
The ambient temperature for the four different combinations is defined
below:
1. Totally enclosed with no air flow (<2 m/s) over the drive
Trate = Tint + 5 °C
2. Totally enclosed with air flow (>2 m/s) over the drive
Trate = Tint
3. Through panel mounted with no airflow (<2 m/s) over the drive
Trate = the greater of Text +5 °C, or Tint
4. Through panel mounted with air flow (>2 m/s) over the drive
Trate = the greater of Text or Tint
Where:
Text = Temperature outside the cabinet
Tint = Temperature inside the cabinet
Trate = Temperature used to select current rating from tables in
Chapter 11 Technical data on page 165.
3.8 Heatsink fan operation

The drive is ventilated by an internal heatsink fan. The fan channels air
through the heatsink chamber.
Ensure the minimum clearances around the drive are maintained to
allow air to flow freely.
The heatsink fan on all drive sizes is a variable speed fan. The drive
controls the speed at which the fan runs based on the temperature of the
heatsink and the drive's thermal model system. The maximum speed at
which the fan operates can be limited in Pr 06.045. This could incur an
output current derating. Refer to section 3.12.1 Fan removal
procedure on page 45 for information on fan removal. The size 6 is also
installed with a variable speed fan to ventilate the capacitor bank. The
heatsink fan on the size 5 to 6 is supplied internally by the drive.

Issue Number: 7
3.9 Enclosing the size 5 to 6 drives for high environmental protection

An explanation of the environmental protection rating is provided in section 11.1.9 IP / UL Rating on page 173.
The standard drive is rated to IP20 pollution degree 2 (dry, non-conductive contamination only). However, it is possible to configure the size 5 to 6
drive to achieve IP65 rating at the rear of the heatsink for through-panel mounting (some current derating is required).
Refer to Table 11-3 on page 166
This allows the front of the size 5 to 6 drive, along with the various switchgear, to be housed in an IP65 enclosure with the heatsink protruding through
the panel to the external environment. The majority of the heat generated by the drive is dissipated outside the enclosure, thereby maintaining a
reduced temperature inside the enclosure.
This relies on a good seal being made between the heatsink and the rear of the enclosure using the gaskets provided.
Figure 3-28 Example of IP65 through-panel layout
IP65 enclosure
IP20
Drive with
high IP
insert installed
Gasket seal
The main gasket should be installed as shown in Figure 3-29

In order to achieve the high IP rating on the size 5 drive, it is necessary to seal a heatsink vent by installing the high IP insert as shown in
Figure 3-31.
Table 3-5 Through-panel mounting kit part numbers
Size CT part number
5 3470-0067
6 3470-0055

Issue Number: 7
Figure 3-29 Installing the gasket Figure 3-31 Installation of high IP insert for size 5
Enclosure
rear wall
Drive Gasket
To seal the space between the drive and the backplate, use the two
securing brackets as shown in Figure 3-30. The securing brackets,
gasket and high IP inserts are included in the through-panel mounting
kit. The part numbers are shown in Table 3-5.
Figure 3-30 Through-panel mounting detail
• To install the high IP insert, firstly place a flat head screwdriver into
the slot highlighted (1).
• Pull the hinged baffle up to expose the ventilation holes, install the
Enclosure high IP inserts into the ventilation holes in the heatsink (2).
rear wall
• Ensure the high IP inserts are securely installed by firmly pressing
them into place (3).
• Close the hinged baffle as shown (1).
To remove the high IP inserts, reverse the above instructions.
The guidelines in Table 3-7 should be followed.
Table 3-6 Environmental considerations
Through panel Through panel
securing bracket securing bracket Environment High IP insert Comments
Clean Not installed
Dry, dusty (non-conductive) Installed
Regular cleaning
Dry, dusty (conductive) Installed
recommended
IP65 compliance Installed
A current derating must be applied to the drive if the high IP insert is
installed. Derating information is provided in section 11.1.1 Power and
current ratings (Derating for switching frequency and temperature) on
page 165.
Failure to do so may result in nuisance tripping.
NOTE
When designing an IP65 enclosure, refer to Figure 3-28 on page 38 for
an example of an IP65 through-panel layout. Consideration should be
made with regard to the heat dissipation from the front of the drive.

Issue Number: 7
Table 3-7 Power losses from the front of the drive when through-
panel mounted
Frame size Power loss

5
6
3.10 External EMC filter

The external EMC filter details for each drive rating are provided in the table below.
Weight
Model CT part number
kg lb
200 V
05200250 4200-0312 5.5 12.13
06200330 to 06200440 4200-2300 6.5 14.3
400 V
05400270 to 05400300 4200-0402 5.5 12.13
06400350 to 06400470 4200-4800 6.7 14.8
575 V
05500030 to 05500069 4200-0122
06500100 to 06500350 4200-3690 7.0 15.4
Mount the external EMC filter following the guidelines in section 4.8.5 Compliance with generic emission standards on page 68.
Figure 3-32 Footprint mounting the EMC filter Figure 3-33 Bookcase mounting the EMC filter

Issue Number: 7
Figure 3-34 Size 1 to 6 external EMC filter

A
Y
Z
V
U1 V1 W1
PE U2 V2 W2
Netz / Line
Last / Load
L1'
W C X X L2'
L3'
Y
Z
D E Y Z
V: Ground stud X: Threaded holes for footprint mounting of the drive Y: Footprint mounting hole diameter
Z: Bookcase mounting slot diameter. CS: Cable size

Issue Number: 7
Table 3-8 Size 1 external EMC filter dimensions

CT part
A B C D E H W V X Y Z CS
number

CT part
number

CT part
number

CT part
number

CT part
A B C D E F H W V X Y Z CS
number
4200-0312 10 mm2
4200-0402 395 mm 425 mm 106 mm 60 mm 33 mm 11.5 mm 437 mm 143 mm 6.5 mm 6.5 mm (8 AWG)
M6 M6
(15.55 in) (16.73 in) (4.17 in) (2.36 in) (1.30 in) (0.45 in) (17.2 in) (5.63 in) (0.26 in) (0.26 in) 2.5 mm2
4200-0122
(14 AWG)

CT part
A B C D E F H W V X Y Z CS
number
4200-2300
4200-4800
392 mm 420 mm 180 mm 60 mm 33 mm 11.5 mm 434 mm 210 mm
M6 M6
6.5 mm 6.5 mm 16 mm2
(15.43 in) (16.54 in) (7.09 in) (2.36 in) (1.30 in) (0.45 in) (17.09 in) (8.27 in) (0.26 in) (0.26 in) (6 AWG)
4200-3690

Issue Number: 7
3.11 Electrical terminals

3.11.1 Location of the power and ground terminals
Figure 3-35 Locations of the power and ground terminals (size 1 to 4)
1 2
4
3
2 1 2
1 2
1 4
1 2 5 4 5
4 5 4 5
3 3 6 8 3 6 3 6 8
8 7
7 6 8
7
Key:
1. Control terminals 4. AC power terminals 7. DC bus +
2. Relay terminals 5. Motor terminals 8. Brake terminal
3. Ground connections 6. DC bus -

Issue Number: 7
Figure 3-36 Locations of the power and ground terminals (size 5 to 6)
8 7 9 7 8 9
1 2
5 6
3
11
4
4
6 5 5 4 6 4
Key
1. Control terminals 4. Ground connections 7. DC bus -
2. Relay terminals 5. AC power terminals 8. DC bus +
3. Additional ground connection 6. Motor terminals 9. Brake terminal
3.11.2 Terminal sizes and torque settings
To avoid a fire hazard and maintain validity of the UL listing,

adhere to the specified tightening torques for the power and
ground terminals. Refer to the following tables.
WARNING
Table 3-14 Drive control terminal data

Model Connection type Torque setting
All Screw terminals 0.2 N m (0.15 lb ft)
Table 3-15 Drive relay terminal data

Table 3-16 Drive power terminal data
Model AC and motor terminals DC and braking Ground terminal

size Recommended Maximum Recommended Maximum Recommended Maximum
1 0.5 N m (0.4 lb ft) 0.5 N m (0.4 lb ft)
2
1.5 N m (1.1 lb ft)
3 1.4 N m (1 lb ft) 1.4 N m (1 lb ft)
4
Plug-in terminal block M4 Nut (7 mm AF) M5 Nut (8 mm AF)
5
1.5 N m (1.1 lb ft) 1.8 N m (1.3 lb ft) 1.5 N m (1.1 lb ft) 2.5 N m (1.8 lb ft) 2.0 N m (1.4 lb ft) 5.0 N m (3.7 lb ft)
M6 Nut (10 mm AF) M6 Nut (10 mm AF) M6 Nut (10 mm AF)
6

Issue Number: 7
Table 3-17 Terminal block maximum cable sizes

Table 3-18 External EMC filter terminal data
Terminal block
Model size Max cable size Power Ground
description
CT part connections connections
All Control connector 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) number Max cable Ground
Max torque Max torque
All 2-way relay connector 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG) size stud size
STO connector 0.5 mm2 (20 AWG) 4200-2300
2.3 N m 4.8 N m
AC input power connector 6 mm2 (10 AWG)
4200-4800 16 mm2 (1.70 Ib ft)
M6
(2.8 Ib ft)
1 to 4
4200-3690
AC output power
connector 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG)
3-way AC power
5 connector 8 mm2 (8 AWG)
3-way motor connector
5 to 6 STO connector 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG)
3.12 Routine maintenance

The drive should be installed in a cool, clean, well ventilated location. Contact with moisture and/or dust with the drive should be avoided.
Regular checks of the following should be carried out to ensure drive / installation reliability are maximized:
Environment
Ambient temperature Ensure the enclosure temperature remains at or below maximum specified
Ensure the drive remains dust free – check that the heatsink and drive fan are not gathering dust.
Dust
The lifetime of the fan is reduced in dusty environments
Moisture Ensure the drive enclosure shows no signs of condensation
Enclosure
Enclosure door filters Ensure filters are not blocked and that air is free to flow
Electrical
Screw connections Ensure all screw terminals remain tight
Ensure all crimp terminals remains tight – check for any discoloration which could indicate
Crimp terminals
overheating
Cables Check all cables for signs of damage
3.12.1 Fan removal procedure

Figure 3-37 Removal of size 5 heatsink fan
1
2
A: Press the tabs (1) inwards to release the fan assembly from the underside of the drive.
B: Use the tabs (1) to withdraw the fan by pulling it away from the drive.
C: Depress and hold the locking release on the fan cable lead as shown (2).
D: With the locking release depressed (2), take hold of the fan supply cable and carefully pull to separate the connectors.

Issue Number: 7
Figure 3-38 Removal of the size 6 heatsink fan
A: Press the tabs (1) inwards to release the fan assembly from the underside of the drive.
B: Use the tabs (1) to withdraw the fan by pulling it away from the drive.
C: Depress and hold the locking release on the fan cable lead as shown (2).
D: With the locking release depressed (2), take hold of the fan supply cable and carefully pull to separate the connectors.

Issue Number: 7
Safety Product Mechanical Electrical Getting Basic Running NV Media Advanced UL listing
information information installation installation started parameters the motor Card parameters information
4 Electrical installation 4.1 Power connections

4.1.1 AC and DC connections
Many cable management features have been incorporated into the
product and accessories, this chapter shows how to optimize them. Key Figure 4-1 Size 1 power connections
features include:
• SAFE TORQUE OFF function
• Internal EMC filter
• EMC compliance with shielding / grounding accessories
• Product rating, fusing and cabling information
• Brake resistor details (selection / ratings)
Electric shock risk

The voltages present in the following locations can cause
severe electric shock and may be lethal:
WARNING
• AC supply cables and connections
PE L1 L2-N + BR U V W
• DC and brake cables, and connections
• Output cables and connections
• Many internal parts of the drive, and external option units
Unless otherwise indicated, control terminals are single Optional EMC
filter
insulated and must not be touched.
Optional Thermal
Isolation device line reactor overload
protection
The AC and / or DC power supply must be disconnected device
from the drive using an approved isolation device before any Fuses
cover is removed from the drive or before any servicing work Optional
braking
WARNING is performed. resistor
Motor
STOP function
The STOP function does not remove dangerous voltages
L1 L2-N
from the drive, the motor or any external option units. Mains
Optional ground
Supply connection
WARNING Ground Supply
SAFE TORQUE OFF function See Figure 4-7 Size 1 to 4 ground connections (size 2 shown) on
The SAFE TORQUE OFF function does not remove page 50 for further information on ground connections.
dangerous voltages from the drive, the motor or any external Figure 4-2 Size 2 power connections
WARNING
option units.
Stored charge
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a
potentially lethal voltage after the AC and / or DC power
supply has been disconnected. If the drive has been
WARNING energized, the AC and / or DC power supply must be
isolated at least ten minutes before work may continue.
Normally, the capacitors are discharged by an internal
resistor. Under certain, unusual fault conditions, it is possible
that the capacitors may fail to discharge, or be prevented
from being discharged by a voltage applied to the output
terminals. If the drive has failed in a manner that causes the
display to go blank immediately, it is possible the capacitors
will not be discharged. In this case, consult Control
Techniques or their authorized distributor.
PE L1 L2 L3 U V W + BR
Equipment supplied by plug and socket
Special attention must be given if the drive is installed in
equipment which is connected to the AC supply by a plug Optional EMC
and socket. The AC supply terminals of the drive are filter Thermal
overload
WARNING connected to the internal capacitors through rectifier diodes protection
Optional device
which are not intended to give safety isolation. If the plug line reactor Optional
braking
terminals can be touched when the plug is disconnected resistor
from the socket, a means of automatically isolating the plug Fuses

from the drive must be used (e.g. a latching relay).
Motor
L1 L2 L3
Optional ground
Supply Mains connection
Ground Supply
See Figure 4-7 Size 1 to 4 ground connections (size 2 shown) on

page 50 for further information on ground connections.

Issue Number: 7
NOTE Figure 4-4 Size 4 power connections

On the size 2 110 V drives, the supply should be connected to L1 and
L3. Also the -DC Bus (-) terminal has no internal connection.
Figure 4-3 Size 3 power connections
PE L1 L2 L3 + BR U V W
PE L1 L2 L3 + BR U V W
Optional EMC
Optional EMC filter Thermal
filter Thermal overload
overload protection
protection Optional device
Optional device line reactor
line reactor
Optional
Optional Fuses braking
Fuses braking resistor
resistor
Internal
Internal EMC
EMC filter
filter Motor
Motor
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 Optional ground
Optional ground Supply Mains connection
Supply Mains connection Ground Supply
Ground Supply
See Figure 4-7 Size 1 to 4 ground connections (size 2 shown) on See Figure 4-7 Size 1 to 4 ground connections (size 2 shown) on
page 50 for further information on ground connections. page 50 for further information on ground connections.

Issue Number: 7
Figure 4-5 Size 5 power connections Figure 4-6 Size 6 power connections
DC / Brake connections DC / Brake connections
Thermal
Optional
overload
protection
braking Thermal
device
resistor overload
protection
device
DC + DC - BR
DC - DC + BR
1 2
AC Connections Motor Connections
L1 L2 L3 PE U V W
1
Optional EMC AC Connections Motor Connections
filter
L1 L2 L3 PE U V W
Optional
line reactor
Optional EMC
Fuses filter
Optional
line reactor
Motor
L1 L2 L3 Fuses
Optional ground
Mains Supply connection
Supply Ground
The upper terminal block (1) is used for AC supply connection.

The lower terminal block (2) is used for Motor connection. Motor
L1 L2 L3
Optional ground
Mains Supply connection
Supply Ground

Issue Number: 7
4.1.2 Ground connections Size 6

On a size 6, the supply and motor ground connections are made using
Electrochemical corrosion of grounding terminals the M6 studs located above the supply and motor terminals. Refer to
Ensure that grounding terminals are protected against Figure 4-9 below.
corrosion i.e. as could be caused by condensation. Figure 4-9 Size 6 ground connections
WARNING
Size 1 to 4
On sizes 1 to 4, the supply and motor ground connections are made
using the ground connections located at the bottom of the drive as
shown in Figure 4-7.
Figure 4-7 Size 1 to 4 ground connections (size 2 shown)
1: 4 x M4 threaded holes for the ground connection

Size 5
On size 5 the supply and motor ground connections are made using the
M5 studs located near the plug-in power connector.
Figure 4-8 Size 5 ground connections
1. Ground connection studs
The ground loop impedance must conform to the

requirements of local safety regulations.
The drive must be grounded by a connection capable of
WARNING carrying the prospective fault current until the protective
device (fuse, etc.) disconnects the AC supply.
The ground connections must be inspected and tested at
appropriate intervals.
Table 4-1 Protective ground cable ratings

1
Input phase
Minimum ground conductor size
conductor size
1. Ground connection studs. Either 10 mm2 or two conductors of the
≤ 10 mm2 same cross-sectional area as the input
phase conductor.
The same cross-sectional area as the input
> 10 mm2 and ≤ 16 mm2 phase conductor
> 16 mm2 and ≤ 35 mm2 16 mm2

Half of the cross-sectional area of the input
> 35 mm2 phase conductor

Issue Number: 7
4.2 AC supply requirements Line reactors are particularly recommended for use with the following
drive models when one of the above factors exists, or when the supply
Voltage:
capacity exceeds 175 kVA: Size 1 to 3.
100 V drive: 100 V to 120 V ±10 %
Model sizes 04200133 to 06500350 have an internal DC choke so they
200 V drive: 200 V to 240 V ±10 %
do not require AC line reactors except for cases of excessive phase
400 V drive: 380 V to 480 V ±10 %
unbalance or extreme supply conditions.
575 V drive: 500 V to 575 V ±10 %
Number of phases: 3 When required, each drive must have its own reactor(s). Three individual
reactors or a single three-phase reactor should be used.
Maximum supply imbalance: 2 % negative phase sequence (equivalent
to 3 % voltage imbalance between phases). Reactor current ratings
The current rating of the line reactors should be as follows:
Frequency range: 48 to 62 Hz
Continuous current rating:
For UL compliance only, the maximum supply symmetrical fault current
Not less than the continuous input current rating of the drive
must be limited to 100 kA
Repetitive peak current rating:
4.2.1 Supply types Not less than twice the continuous input current rating of the drive
All drives are suitable for use on any supply type i.e TN-S, TN-C-S, TT
and IT. 4.2.3 Input inductor calculation
• Supplies with voltage up to 600 V may have grounding at any To calculate the inductance required (at Y%), use the following equation:
potential, i.e. neutral, centre or corner (“grounded delta”) Y V 1
L = ---------- × ------- × ------------
• Supplies with voltage above 600 V may not have corner grounding 100 3 2πfI
Drives are suitable for use on supplies of installation category III and Where:
lower, according to IEC60664-1. This means they may be connected I = drive rated input current (A)
permanently to the supply at its origin in a building, but for outdoor L = inductance (H)
installation additional over-voltage suppression (transient voltage surge f = supply frequency (Hz)
suppression) must be provided to reduce category IV to category III. V = voltage between lines
Operation with IT (ungrounded) supplies:

Special attention is required when using internal or external
EMC filters with ungrounded supplies, because in the event
of a ground (earth) fault in the motor circuit the drive may not
WARNING
trip and the filter could be over-stressed. In this case, either
the filter must not be used i.e. removed, or additional
independent motor ground fault protection must be provided.
For instructions on removal, refer to section 4.8.2 Internal
EMC filter on page 65.
For details of ground fault protection contact the supplier of
the drive.
A ground fault in the supply has no effect in any case. If the motor must
continue to run with a ground fault in its own circuit, then an input
isolating transformer must be provided, and if an EMC filter is required it
must be located in the primary circuit.
Unusual hazards can occur on ungrounded supplies with more than one
source, for example on ships. Contact the supplier of the drive for more
information.
4.2.2 Supplies requiring line reactors
Input line reactors reduce the risk of damage to the drive resulting from
poor phase balance or severe disturbances on the supply network.
Where line reactors are to be used, reactance values of approximately 2
% are recommended. Higher values may be used if necessary, but may
result in a loss of drive output (reduced torque at high speed) because of
the voltage drop.
For all drive ratings, 2 % line reactors permit drives to be used with a
supply unbalance of up to 3.5 % negative phase sequence (equivalent to
5 % voltage imbalance between phases).
Severe disturbances may be caused by the following factors, for example:
• Power factor correction equipment connected close to the drive.
• Large DC drives having no or inadequate line reactors connected to
the supply.
• Across the line (DOL) started motor(s) connected to the supply such
that when any of these motors are started, the voltage dip exceeds
20 %.
Such disturbances may cause excessive peak currents to flow in the
input power circuit of the drive. This may cause nuisance tripping, or in
extreme cases, failure of the drive.
Drives of low power rating may also be susceptible to disturbance when
connected to supplies with a high rated capacity.

Issue Number: 7
4.2.4 Input line reactor specification for size 1 to 6

Table 4-2 AC line reactor values
Reactor Continuous Peak Dimensions

Drives used Input Inductance Weight
part rms current current (mm)
with phases
number mH A A kg L D H
01200017
4402-0224 1 2.25 6.5 13 0.8 72 65 90
01200024
01200033
01200042
02200024 4402-0225 1 1.0 15.1 30.2 1.1 82 75 100
02200033
02200042
02200056
02200075
4402-0226 1 0.5 26.2 52.4 1.5 82 90 105
03200100
04200133
02200024
02200033
02200042
02400013
4402-0227 3 2.0 7.9 15.8 3.5 150 90 150
02400018
02400023
02400032
02400041
02200056
02200075
03200100
03400056
4402-0228 3 1.0 15.4 47.4 3.8 150 90 150
03400073
03400094
04200133
04400135
05200250 4402-0229 3 0.4 24.6 49.2 3.8 150 90 150
04200176
04400170
4402-0232 3 0.6 27.4 54.8 6 180 100 190
05400270
05400300
06200330
06400350 4400-0240** 3 0.45 46 92 11 190 150 225
06400420
06200440
4400-0241** 3 0.3 74 148 15 250 150 275
06400470
**These input reactors are not stocked by Control Techniques. Contact your local Drive Centre.
The AC line reactors for the 110 V and other size drives should be sourced locally.
NOTE
The reactance values will be higher than 2 % with some of these drives, which may result in a loss of drive output (reduced torque at high speed)
because of the voltage drop.

Issue Number: 7
Figure 4-10 Input line reactor 4402-0224, 4402-0225 and 4402-0226

Ground
terminal
C D
B E
Table 4-3 Dimensions

Dimensions Ground
Part No
A B C D E Mounting hole terminal
4402-0224 90 mm (3.54 in) 72 mm (2.84 in) 44.5 mm (1.75in) 35 mm (1.38 in) 65 mm (2.56 in)
8 mm x 4 mm
4402-0225 100 mm (3.94 in) 40 mm (1.58 in) 75 mm (2.95 in) M3
82 mm (3.23 in) 54 mm (2.13in) (0.32 in x 0.16 in)
4402-0226 105 mm (4.13 in) 53 mm (2.09 in) 90 mm (3.54 in)
Figure 4-11 Input line reactor 4402-0227, 4402-0228, 4402-0229
Ground
terminal
D
C
E
B
Table 4-4 Dimensions
Dimensions Ground
Part No
A B C D E Mounting slot terminal
4402-0227
17 mm x 7 mm
4402-0228 150 mm (5.91in) 150 mm (5.91in) 120 mm (4.72 in) 47 mm (1.85 in) 90 mm (3.54in) M5
(0.67 in x 0.28 in)
4402-0229

Issue Number: 7
4.3 24 Vdc supply

The 24 Vdc supply connected to the +24 V supply terminals on the AI-
Backup adaptor provides the following functions:
• It can be used as a back-up power supply to keep the control circuits
of the drive powered up when the line power supply is removed. This
allows any fieldbus modules or serial communications to continue to
operate. If the line power supply is re-applied, then the normal
operation can carry on after the drive automatically re-initializes the
power board parameters.
• It can be used to clone or load parameters in order to pre-configure
drives when the line power supply is not available. The keypad can
be used to setup parameters if required. However, the drive will be in
the Under Voltage state unless the line power supply is enabled,
therefore diagnostics may not be possible. (Power down save
parameters are not saved when using the 24 V back-up power
supply input).
The working voltage range of the 24 V back-up power supply is as
follows:
0V 0V
+ 24 V + 24 V Backup supply input
Nominal operating voltage 24.0 Vdc
Minimum continuous operating voltage 19.2 V
Maximum continuous operating voltage 30.0 V
Minimum start up voltage 12.0 V
Minimum power supply requirement at 24 V 20 W
Recommended fuse 1 A, 50 Vdc
Minimum and maximum voltage values include ripple and noise. Ripple
and noise values must not exceed 5 %.
Figure 4-12 Location of the 24 Vdc power supply connection on
the AI-Backup adaptor

Issue Number: 7
4.4 Ratings
The input current is affected by the supply voltage and impedance.
Typical input current
The values of typical input current are given to aid calculations for power flow and power loss.
The values of typical input current are stated for a balanced supply.
Maximum continuous input current
The values of maximum continuous input current are given to aid the selection of cables and fuses. These values are stated for the worst case
condition with the unusual combination of stiff supply with bad balance. The value stated for the maximum continuous input current would only be
seen in one of the input phases. The current in the other two phases would be significantly lower.
The values of maximum input current are stated for a supply with a 2 % negative phase-sequence imbalance and rated at the supply fault current
given in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5 Supply fault current used to calculate maximum input currents
Model Symmetrical fault level (kA)
All 100
Fuses
The AC supply to the drive must be installed with suitable protection against overload and short-circuits. Table 4-6, Table 4-7, Table 4-8
and Table 4-9 show the recommended fuse ratings. Failure to observe this requirement will cause risk of fire.
WARNING
Table 4-6 AC Input current and fuse ratings (100 V)

Maximum Maximum Fuse rating
Typical input
continuous overload input
current IEC gG Class CC or Class J
Model input current current
Maximum Maximum
A A A A A
01100017 8.7 8.7 10 10
01100024 11.1 11.1 16 16
02100042 18.8 18.8 20 20
02100056 24.0 24.0 25 25
Fuse rating
Maximum Maximum
Typical
continuous overload IEC UL / USA
input
Model input input
current Maximum Maximum
current current Nominal Nominal
A Class A Class
A A A A 1ph 3ph A 1ph 3ph
01200017 4.5 4.5 5
6
01200024 5.3 5.3
gG 10 CC or J
01200033 8.3 8.3 10
01200042 10.4 10.4 16 16
02200024 5.3/3.2 5.3/4.1 6 10 5
02200033 8.3/4.3 8.3/6.7 10 10
CC
02200042 10.4/5.4 10.4/7.5 16 10 gG 16 10
or J
02200056 14.9/7.4 14.9/11.3
20 16 20 16
02200075 18.1/9.1 18.1/13.5
CC
03200100 23.9/12.8 23.9/17.7 30/25 25 20 gG 25 20
or J
04200133 23.7/13.5 23.7/16.9 25 20 25 20 CC
gG
04200176 17.0 21.3 25 25 or J
CC
05200250 24 31 52 40 40 gG 40 40
or J
06200330 42 48 64 60 CC
63 63 gG 60
06200440 49 56 85 60 or J

Issue Number: 7

Typical
continuous overload
input IEC UL / USA
Model input input
current
current current Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum
Class Class
A A A A A A A
02400013 2.1 2.4
02400018 2.6 2.9 5
6
02400023 3.1 3.5 gG CC or J
02400032 4.7 5.1
10
02400041 5.8 6.2 10
03400056 8.3 8.7 13 10 10
03400073 10.2 12.2 18 gG 16 CC or J
16
03400094 13.1 14.8 20.7 20
04400135 14.0 16.3 20 20
gG CC or J
04400170 18.5 20.7 25 25
05400270 26 29 52
40 40 gG 35 35 CC or J
05400300 27 30 58
06400350 32 36 67 40
06400420 41 46 80 63 63 gG 50 60 CC or J
06400470 54 60 90 60
Maximum Fuse rating

Typical Maximum
overload
input continuous IEC UL / USA
Model input
current input current
current Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum
Class Class
A A A A A A A
05500030 4 4 7 10
10 10
05500040 6 7 9 20 gG 10 CC or J
05500069 9 11 15 20 20 20
06500100 12 13 22 20 20
06500150 17 19 33 32 40 25 30
06500190 22 24 41 40 30
gG CC or J
06500230 26 29 50 35
50
06500290 33 37 63 63 40 50
06500350 41 47 76 63 50
NOTE
Ensure cables used suit local wiring regulations.
The nominal cable sizes below are only a guide. The mounting and grouping of cables affects their current-carrying capacity, in some cases
smaller cables may be acceptable but in other cases a larger cable is required to avoid excessive temperature or voltage drop. Refer to
local wiring regulations for the correct size of cables.
CAUTION
Table 4-10 Cable ratings (100 V)
Cable size (IEC 60364-5-52) Cable size (UL508C)

mm2 AWG
Model
Input Output Input Output
Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum
01100017 1 1 16
6 2.5 10 16 12
01100024 1.5 1 14
02100042 2.5 1 12
6 2.5 10 16 12
02100056 4 1 10

Issue Number: 7

mm2 AWG
Model
01200017
01200024
1 6 1 2.5 16 10 16 12
01200033
01200042
02200024
02200033 1 16
02200042 6 1 2.5 10 16 12
02200056 2.5/1.5 12/14
02200075 2.5 12
03200100 4 6 1.5 2.5 10/12 10 14 12
04200133 4/2.5
6 2.5 2.5 10 10 12 12
04200176 4
05200250 10 10 10 10 8 8 8 8
06200330 16 16 4 4
25 25 3 3
06200440 25 25 3 3

mm2 AWG
Model
02400013
02400018
02400023 1 6 1 2.5 16 10 16 12
02400032
02400041
03400056 1 1 14 16
03400073 1.5 6 1 2.5 12 10 16 12
03400094 2.5 1.5 12 14
04400135 2.5
6 2.5 2.5 10 10 12 12
04400170 4
05400270
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8
05400300
06400350 10 10 6 6
06400420 16 25 16 25 4 3 4 3
06400470 25 25 3 3

mm2 AWG
Model
05500030 0.75 0.75 16 16
05500040 1 1.5 1 1.5 16 16
14 14
05500069 1.5 1.5
06500100 2.5 2.5 14 14
06500150 4 4
10 10
06500190 6 6
25 25 3 3
06500230 8 8
10
06500290 10
6 6
06500350 16

Issue Number: 7
NOTE
PVC insulated cable should be used.
NOTE
Cable sizes are from IEC60364-5-52:2001 table A.52.C with correction factor for 40°C ambient of 0.87 (from table A52.14) for cable installation
method B2 (multicore cable in conduit).
Installation class (ref: IEC60364-5-52:2001)
B1 - Separate cables in conduit.
B2 - Multicore cable in conduit.
C - Multicore cable in free air.
Cable size may be reduced if a different installation method is used, or if the ambient temperature is lower.
NOTE N
The nominal output cable sizes assume that the motor maximum current matches that of the drive. Where a motor of reduced rating is used the cable
rating may be chosen to match that of the motor. To ensure that the motor and cable are protected against overload, the drive must be programmed
with the correct motor rated current.
A fuse or other protection must be included in all live connections to the AC supply.
Fuse types
The fuse voltage rating must be suitable for the drive supply voltage.
MCB
Do not use an MCB instead of the recommended fuses.
Ground connections
The drive must be connected to the system ground of the AC supply. The ground wiring must conform to local regulations and codes of practice.
NOTE N
For information on ground cable sizes, refer to Table 4-1 Protective ground cable ratings on page 50.
4.4.1 Main AC supply contactor

The recommended AC supply contactor type for size 1 to 6 is AC1.
4.5 Output circuit and motor protection

The output circuit has fast-acting electronic short-circuit protection which limits the fault current to typically no more than 2.5 times the rated output
current, and interrupts the current in approximately 20 µs. No additional short-circuit protection devices are required.
The drive provides overload protection for the motor and its cable. For this to be effective, Rated Current (00.006) must be set to suit the motor.
Motor Rated Current (00.006) must be set correctly to avoid a risk of fire in the event of motor overload.
WARNING
There is also provision for the use of a motor thermistor to prevent over-heating of the motor, e.g. due to loss of cooling.
4.5.1 Cable types and lengths
Since capacitance in the motor cable causes loading on the output of the drive, ensure the cable length does not exceed the values given in Table 4-
14 to Table 4-17.
Use 105 °C (221 °F) (UL 60/75 °C temp rise) PVC-insulated cable with copper conductors having a suitable voltage rating, for the following power
connections:
• AC supply to external EMC filter (when used)
• AC supply (or external EMC filter) to drive
• Drive to motor
• Drive to braking resistor
Table 4-14 Maximum motor cable lengths (100 V drives)
100 V Nominal AC supply voltage
Model Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of the following switching frequencies
0.667 kHz 1 kHz 2 kHz 3 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz
01100017 37.5 m 25 m 18.75 m 12.5 m 9m
50 m (164 ft)
01100024 (123 ft) (82 ft) (61 ft) (41 ft) (30 ft)
02100042 75 m 50 m 37.5 m 25 m 18 m
100 m (328 ft)
02100056 (246 ft) (164 ft) (123 ft) (82 ft) (59 ft)

Issue Number: 7

Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of the following switching frequencies
Model 0.667 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz
01200017
01200024 50 m 37.5 m 25 m 18.75 m 12.5 m 9m
01200033 (165 ft) (122 ft) (82.5 ft) (61 ft) (41 ft) (30 ft)
01200042
02200024
02200033
100 m 75 m 50 m 37.5 m 25 m 18 m
02200042
(330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (122 ft) (82.5 ft) (60 ft)
02200056
02200075
100 m 75 m 50 m 37.5 m 25 m 18 m
03200100
(330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (122 ft) (82.5 ft) (60 ft)
04200133 100 m 75 m 50 m 37.5 m 25 m 18 m
04200176 (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (122 ft) (82.5 ft) (60 ft)
200 m 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m 37 m
05200250
(660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (120 ft)
06200330 300 m 200 m 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m
06200440 (984 ft) (660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft)

Model 0.667 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
02400013
02400018
100 m 75 m 50 m 37.5 m 25 m 18.25 m
02400023
(330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (122 ft) (82.5 ft) (60 ft)
02400032
02400041
03400056
100 m 75 m 50 m 37.5 m 25 m 18.25 m
03400073
(330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (122 ft) (82.5 ft) (60 ft)
03400094
04400135 100 m 75 m 50 m 37.5 m 25 m 18.25 m
04400170 (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (122 ft) (82.5 ft) (60 ft)
05400270 200 m 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m 37 m
05400300 (660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (120 ft)
06400350
300 m 200 m 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m
06400420
(984 ft) (660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft)
06400470

Issue Number: 7

Model 0.667 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
05500030
200 m
05500040
(660 ft)
05500069
06500100
06500150
06500190 300 m 200 m 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m
06500230 (984 ft) (660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft)
06500290
06500350
4.5.2 High-capacitance / reduced diameter cables

The maximum cable length is reduced from that shown in section Users of 575 V NEMA rated motors should note that the specification for
4.5.1 Cable types and lengths on page 58, if high capacitance or inverter-rated motors given in NEMA MG1 section 31 is sufficient for
reduced diameter motor cables are used. motoring operation but not where the motor spends significant periods
Most cables have an insulating jacket between the cores and the armor braking. In that case an insulation peak voltage rating of 2.2 kV is
or shield; these cables have a low capacitance and are recommended. recommended.
Cables that do not have an insulating jacket tend to have high If it is not practical to use an inverter-rated motor, an output choke
capacitance; if a cable of this type is used, the maximum cable length is (inductor) should be used. The recommended type is a simple iron-cored
half that quoted in the tables, (Figure 4-13 shows how to identify the two component with a reactance of about 2 %. The exact value is not critical.
types). This operates in conjunction with the capacitance of the motor cable to
increase the rise-time of the motor terminal voltage and prevent
Figure 4-13 Cable construction influencing the capacitance
excessive electrical stress.
4.5.4 Multiple motors
Open-loop only
If the drive is to control more than one motor, one of the fixed V/F modes
should be selected (Pr 05.014 = Fixed or Squared). Make the motor
connections as shown in Figure 4-14 and Figure 4-15. The maximum
Normal capacitance High capacitance cable lengths in Table 4-14 to Table 4-17 apply to the sum of the total
Shield or armour Shield or armour close cable lengths from the drive to each motor.
separated from the cores to the cores It is recommended that each motor is connected through a protection relay
since the drive cannot protect each motor individually. For connection, a
sinusoidal filter or an output inductor must be connected as shown in
The maximum motor cable lengths specified in section 4.5.1 Cable types
Figure 4-15, even when the cable lengths are less than the maximum
and lengths on page 58 is shielded and contains four cores. Typical
permissible. For details of inductor sizes refer to the supplier of the drive.
capacitance for this type of cable is 130 pF/m (i.e. from one core to all
Figure 4-14 Preferred chain connection for multiple motors
others and the shield connected together).
4.5.3 Motor winding voltage Motor protection
relay
The PWM output voltage can adversely affect the inter-turn insulation in
the motor. This is because of the high rate of change of voltage, in
conjunction with the impedance of the motor cable and the distributed
nature of the motor winding.
For normal operation with AC supplies up to 500 Vac and a standard
motor with a good quality insulation system, there is no need for any Chain connection (preferred)
special precautions. In case of doubt the motor supplier should be
consulted.
Special precautions are recommended under the following conditions,
but only if the motor cable length exceeds 10 m:
• AC supply voltage exceeds 500 V
• DC supply voltage exceeds 670 V
• Operation of 400 V drive with continuous or very frequent sustained
braking
• Multiple motors connected to a single drive
For multiple motors, the precautions given in section 4.5.4 Multiple
motors on page 60 should be followed.
For the other cases listed, it is recommended that an inverter-rated
motor be used taking into account the voltage rating of the inverter. This
has a reinforced insulation system intended by the manufacturer for
repetitive fast-rising pulsed voltage operation.

Issue Number: 7
Figure 4-15 Alternative connection for multiple motors 4.6 Braking

Motor protection Braking occurs when the drive is decelerating the motor, or is preventing
relay
the motor from gaining speed due to mechanical influences. During
braking, energy is returned to the drive from the motor.
When motor braking is applied by the drive, the maximum regenerated
power that the drive can absorb is equal to the power dissipation
(losses) of the drive.
When the regenerated power is likely to exceed these losses, the DC
connection
bus voltage of the drive increases. Under default conditions, the drive
brakes the motor under PI control, which extends the deceleration time
as necessary in order to prevent the DC bus voltage from rising above a
Inductor user defined set-point.
If the drive is expected to rapidly decelerate a load, or to hold back an
overhauling load, a braking resistor must be installed.
Table 4-18 shows the default DC voltage level at which the drive turns on
the braking transistor. However the braking resistor turn on and the turn
off voltages are programmable with Braking IGBT Lower Threshold
(06.073) and Braking IGBT Upper Threshold (06.074).
Table 4-18 Default braking transistor turn on voltage
Drive voltage rating DC bus voltage level
100 & 200 V 390 V
400 V 780 V
4.5.5 / Δ motor operation 575 V 930 V
The voltage rating for and Δ connections of the motor should always NOTE N
be checked before attempting to run the motor. When a braking resistor is used, Pr 02.004 should be set to Fast ramp
The default setting of the motor rated voltage parameter is the same as mode.
the drive rated voltage, i.e.
High temperatures
400 V drive 400 V rated voltage
Braking resistors can reach high temperatures. Locate
230 V drive 230 V rated voltage
braking resistors so that damage cannot result. Use cable
A typical 3 phase motor would be connected in for 400 V operation or having insulation capable of withstanding high temperatures.
WARNING
Δ for 230 V operation, however, variations on this are common e.g.
690 V Δ 400 V. Braking resistor overload protection parameter settings
Failure to observe the following information may damage
Incorrect connection of the windings will cause severe under or over
the resistor.
fluxing of the motor, leading to a very poor output torque or motor
The drive software contains an overload protection function
saturation and overheating respectively. CAUTION
for a braking resistor.
4.5.6 Output contactor For more information on the braking resistor software
overload protection, see Pr 10.030, Pr 10.031 and
If the cable between the drive and the motor is to be Pr 10.061 full descriptions in the Parameter Reference
interrupted by a contactor or circuit breaker, ensure that the Guide.
drive is disabled before the contactor or circuit breaker is
opened or closed. Severe arcing may occur if this circuit is 4.6.1 External braking resistor
WARNING interrupted with the motor running at high current and low
speed. Overload protection
A contactor is sometimes required to be installed between the drive and When an external braking resistor is used, it is essential that
motor for safety purposes. an overload protection device is incorporated in the braking
The recommended motor contactor is the AC3 type. WARNING
resistor circuit; this is described in Figure 4-16 on page 62.
Switching of an output contactor should only occur when the output of When a braking resistor is to be mounted outside the enclosure, ensure
the drive is disabled. that it is mounted in a ventilated metal housing that will perform the
Opening or closing of the contactor with the drive enabled will lead to: following functions:
1. OI ac trips (which cannot be reset for 10 seconds) • Prevent inadvertent contact with the resistor
2. High levels of radio frequency noise emission • Allow adequate ventilation for the resistor
3. Increased contactor wear and tear When compliance with EMC emission standards is required, external
The Drive Enable terminal (T31 and T34 frames 1 to 4), (T31 and 35 connection requires the cable to be armored or shielded, since it is not
frames 5 to 6) when opened provides a SAFE TORQUE OFF function. fully contained in a metal enclosure. See section 4.8.5 Compliance with
This can in many cases replace output contactors. generic emission standards on page 68 for further details.
For further information see section 4.11 SAFE TORQUE OFF (STO) on Internal connection does not require the cable to be armored or
page 74. shielded.

Issue Number: 7
Minimum resistance values and peak power rating for the Table 4-22 Braking resistor resistance and power rating (575 V)
braking resistor at 40 °C (104 °F)
Table 4-19 Braking resistor resistance and power rating (100 V) Minimum Instantaneous Continuous
Model resistance* power rating power rating
Minimum Instantaneous Continuous Ω kW kW
Model resistance* power rating power rating 05500030 2.6
Ω kW kW
05500040 80 12.1 4.6
01100017
130 1.2 05500069 6.5
01100024
06500100 8.7
02100042
68 2.2 06500150 12.3
02100056
06500190 16.3
13 74
Table 4-20 Braking resistor resistance and power rating (200 V) 06500230 19.9
06500290 24.2
Minimum Instantaneous Continuous
06500350 31.7
Ω kW kW * Resistor tolerance: ±10 %
01200017 For high-inertia loads or under continuous braking, the continuous power
01200024 dissipated in the braking resistor may be as high as the power rating of
130 1.2 the drive. The total energy dissipated in the braking resistor is dependent
01200033
on the amount of energy to be extracted from the load.
01200042
The instantaneous power rating refers to the short-term maximum power
02200024
dissipated during the on intervals of the pulse width modulated braking
02200033 control cycle. The braking resistor must be able to withstand this
02200042 dissipation for short intervals (milliseconds). Higher resistance values
68 2.2
02200056 require proportionately lower instantaneous power ratings.
02200075 In most applications, braking occurs only occasionally. This allows the
03200100 45 3.4 2.2 continuous power rating of the braking resistor to be much lower than
the power rating of the drive. It is therefore essential that the
04200133
22 6.9 instantaneous power rating and energy rating of the braking resistor are
04200176
sufficient for the most extreme braking duty that is likely to be
05200250 16.5 10.3 8.6 encountered.
06200330 12.6 Optimization of the braking resistor requires careful consideration of the
8.6 19.7
06200440 16.4 braking duty.
Select a value of resistance for the braking resistor that is not less than
Table 4-21 Braking resistor resistance and power rating (400 V)
the specified minimum resistance. Larger resistance values may give a
Minimum Instantaneous Continuous cost saving, as well as a safety benefit in the event of a fault in the
Model resistance* power rating power rating braking system. Braking capability will then be reduced, which could
Ω kW kW cause the drive to trip during braking if the value chosen is too large.
02400013 Thermal protection circuit for the braking resistor
02400018 The thermal protection circuit must disconnect the AC supply from the
02400023 270 2.3 drive if the resistor becomes overloaded due to a fault. Figure 4-16
shows a typical circuit arrangement.
02400032
02400041 Figure 4-16 Typical protection circuit for a braking resistor
03400056 2.2
Optional
03400073 100 6.1 3 EMC
03400094 4 filter
04400135
50 12.2
04400170
05400270 31.5 21.5 16.2 Main contactor
05400300 18 37.5 19.6 power supply
06400350 21.6 Drive

Stop
06400420 17 39.8 25
06400470 32.7
Start / Thermal
Reset protection
device
+DC
BR
Braking resistor
See Figure 4-1 on page 47 to Figure 4-6 on page 49 for the location of
the +DC and braking resistor connections.

Issue Number: 7
4.6.2 Braking resistor software overload protection With internal filter removed:
The drive software contains an overload protection function for a braking Size 1: <1.5 mA (line to line supply, star point ground)
resistor. In order to enable and set-up this function, it is necessary to
<1 mA (line to neutral supply, star point ground)
enter three values into the drive:
• Braking Resistor Rated Power (10.030) Size 2: <1.7 mA (line to line supply, star point ground)
• Braking Resistor Thermal Time Constant (10.031) <1.9 mA (line to neutral supply, star point ground)
• Braking Resistor Resistance (10.061) Size 3: <3.3 mA (star point ground)
This data should be obtained from the manufacturer of the braking
<4.9 mA (corner ground)
resistors.
Size 4: < 3.5 mA (star point ground)
Pr 10.039 gives an indication of braking resistor temperature based on a
simple thermal model. Zero indicates the resistor is close to ambient and NOTE
100 % is the maximum temperature the resistor can withstand. A ‘br.rES’ The above leakage currents are just the leakage currents of the drive
alarm is given if this parameter is above 75 % and the braking IGBT is with the internal EMC filter connected and do not take into account any
active. An It.br trip will occur if Pr 10.039 reaches 100 %, when leakage currents of the motor or motor cable.
Pr 10.037 is set to 0 (default value) or 1.
If Pr 10.037 is equal to 2 or 3, an It.br trip will not occur when Pr 10.039 When the internal filter is installed the leakage current is
reaches 100 %, but instead the braking IGBT will be disabled until high. In this case a permanent fixed ground connection must
Pr 10.039 falls below 95 %.This option is intended for applications with be provided, or other suitable measures taken to prevent a
parallel connected DC buses where there are several braking resistors, WARNING
safety hazard occurring if the connection is lost.
each of which cannot withstand full DC bus voltage continuously. With
this type of application it is unlikely the braking energy will be shared When the leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA, a permanent
equally between the resistors because of voltage measurement fixed ground connection must be provided using two
tolerances within the individual drives. Therefore with Pr 10.037 set to 2 independent conductors each with a cross-section equal to
or 3, then as soon as a resistor has reached its maximum temperature or exceeding that of the supply conductors. The drive is
WARNING
the drive will disable the braking IGBT, and another resistor on another provided with two ground connections to facilitate this. Both
drive will take up the braking energy. Once Pr 10.039 has fallen below ground connections are necessary to meet EN 61800-5-1:
95 % the drive will allow the braking IGBT to operate again. 2007.
See the Parameter Reference Guide for more information on Pr 10.030, 4.7.1 Use of residual current device (RCD)
Pr 10.031, Pr 10.037 and Pr 10.039. There are three common types of ELCB / RCD:
This software overload protection should be used in addition to an 1. AC - detects AC fault currents
external overload protection device. 2. A - detects AC and pulsating DC fault currents (provided the DC
current reaches zero at least once every half cycle)
4.7 Ground leakage 3. B - detects AC, pulsating DC and smooth DC fault currents
The ground leakage current depends upon whether the internal EMC • Type AC should never be used with drives.
filter is installed or not. The drive is supplied with the filter installed. • Type A can only be used with single phase drives
Instructions for removing the internal filter are given in section • Type B must be used with three phase drives
4.8.2 Internal EMC filter on page 65.
With internal filter installed:
Size 1: Only type B ELCB / RCD are suitable for use with 3 phase
inverter drives.
2.5 mA* AC at 230 V 50 Hz (line to line supply, star point ground)
9.2 mA* AC at 230 V 50 Hz (line to neutral supply, star point ground) WARNING
Size 2: If an external EMC filter is used, a delay of at least 50 ms should be

9.36 mA* AC at 110 V, 50 Hz (2 phase, line to line supply, star point incorporated to ensure spurious trips are not seen. The leakage current
ground) is likely to exceed the trip level if all of the phases are not energized
16.4 mA* AC at 110 V, 50 Hz (1 phase, line to neutral supply, star simultaneously.
point ground)
5.3 mA* AC at 230 V, 50 Hz (3 phase supply, star point ground) 4.8 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility)
15.4 mA* AC at 230 V, 50 Hz (1 phase, line to neutral supply, star The requirements for EMC are divided into three levels in the following
point ground) three sections:
9.6 mA* AC at 400 V, 50 Hz (3 phase supply, star point ground) Section 4.10.3, General requirements for all applications, to ensure
Size 3: reliable operation of the drive and minimise the risk of disturbing nearby
equipment. The immunity standards specified in Chapter 11 Technical
19.7 mA* AC at 400 V 50 Hz (star point ground)
data on page 165 will be met, but no specific emission standards are
47.4 mA* AC at 400 V 50 Hz (corner ground)
applied. Note also the special requirements given in Surge immunity of
Size 4:
control circuits - long cables and connections outside a building on
21 mA* AC at 230 V 50 Hz (3 phase, star point ground) page 70 for increased surge immunity of control circuits where control
6.8 mA* AC at 230 V 50 Hz (1 phase, line to line supply, star point wiring is extended.
ground)
Section 4.8.4, Requirements for meeting the EMC standard for
30 mA* AC at 230 V 50 Hz (1 phase, line to neutral supply, star point
power drive systems, IEC61800-3 (EN 61800-3:2004).
ground)
50 mA* AC at 400 V 50 Hz (3 phase, star point ground) Section 4.8.5, Requirements for meeting the generic emission
standards for the industrial environment, IEC61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-
* Proportional to the supply voltage and frequency.
4:2007.
The recommendations of section 4.8.3 will usually be sufficient to avoid
causing disturbance to adjacent equipment of industrial quality. If
particularly sensitive equipment is to be used nearby, or in a non-
industrial environment, then the recommendations of section

Issue Number: 7
4.8.4 Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004 (standard for Power Drive Figure 4-17 Installation of grounding bracket (size 1 to 4)
Systems) on page 68 or section 4.8.5 Compliance with generic emission
standards on page 68 should be followed to give reduced radio-
frequency emission.
In order to ensure the installation meets the various emission standards
described in:
• The EMC data sheet available from the supplier of the drive
• The Declaration of Conformity at the front of this manual
• Chapter 11 Technical data on page 165
The correct external EMC filter must be used and all of the guidelines in
section 4.8.3 General requirements for EMC on page 67 and section
4.8.5 Compliance with generic emission standards on page 68 must be
followed.
Table 4-23 Drive and EMC filter cross reference
200 V
05200250 4200-0312
06200330 to 06200440 4200-2300 Loosen the ground connection screws and slide the grounding bracket in
400 V the direction shown. Once in place, the ground connection screws
05400270 to 05400300 4200-0402 should be tightened to a maximum torque of 1.5 N m (1.1 lb ft).
06400350 to 06400470 4200-4800 Figure 4-18 Installation of grounding bracket (size 5 to 6 - size 5
575 V shown)
05500030 to 05500069 4200-0122
06500100 to 06500350 4200-3690
High ground leakage current

When an EMC filter is used, a permanent fixed ground
connection must be provided which does not pass through a
connector or flexible power cord. This includes the internal
WARNING EMC filter.
NOTE N
The installer of the drive is responsible for ensuring compliance with the
EMC regulations that apply in the country in which the drive is to be
used.
4.8.1 Grounding hardware

The drive is supplied with a grounding bracket / clamp to facilitate EMC
compliance. This provides a convenient method for direct grounding of
cable shields without the use of "pig-tails”. Cable shields can be bared
and clamped to the grounding bracket using metal clips or clamps1 (not
supplied) or cable ties. Note that the shield must in all cases be
continued through the clamp to the intended terminal on the drive, in
accordance with the connection details for the specific signal.
1 A suitable clamp is the Phoenix DIN rail mounted SK14 cable clamp
(for cables with a maximum outer diameter of 14 mm).
See Figure 4-17 for details regarding the installation of the grounding
bracket.
Loosen the ground connection nuts and slide the grounding bracket in
the direction shown. Once in place, the ground connection nuts should
be tightened to a maximum torque of 2.0 N m (1.47 lb ft).

Issue Number: 7
Figure 4-19 Installation of grounding clamp size 5 Figure 4-20 Installation of grounding clamp size 6
Loosen the ground connection nuts and slide the grounding clamp down The grounding clamp is secured using the provided 2 x M4 x 10 mm
onto the pillars in the direction shown. Once in place, the ground fasteners. The fasteners should be tightened with the maximum torque
connection nuts should be tightened with a maximum torque of 2 N m of 2 N m (1.47 Ib ft).
(1.47 lb ft).
4.8.2 Internal EMC filter

It is recommended that the internal EMC filter be kept in place unless
there is a specific reason for removing it.
If the drive is used as a motoring drive as part of a regen system, then

the internal EMC filter must be removed.
The internal EMC filter reduces radio-frequency emission into the line
power supply. Where the motor cable is short, it permits the
requirements of EN 61800-3:2004 to be met for the second environment
- see section 4.8.4 Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004 (standard for
Power Drive Systems) on page 68 and section 11.1.26 Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) on page 182. For longer motor cables the filter
continues to provide a useful reduction in emission levels, and when
used with any length of shielded motor cable up to the limit for the drive,
it is unlikely that nearby industrial equipment will be disturbed. It is
recommended that the filter be used in all applications unless the
instructions given above require it to be removed, or where the ground
leakage current of 9.2 mA for size 1 is unacceptable. As shown in Figure
4-21 the size 1 internal EMC filter is removed by removing the screw (1).
The supply must be disconnected before removing the

internal EMC filter.
WARNING

Issue Number: 7
Figure 4-21 Removal of the size 1 internal EMC filter Figure 4-24 Removal of the size 4 internal EMC filter
1
1
To electrically disconnect the internal EMC filter, remove the screw as

shown above (1).
To electrically disconnect the internal EMC filter, remove the screw as Figure 4-25 Removal of the size 5 internal EMC filter
shown above (1).
Figure 4-22 Removal of the size 2 internal EMC filter
1
2
1
To electrically disconnect the internal EMC filter, remove the screw as

shown above (1). Remove the three M4 terminal nuts (1). Lift away the cover (2) to expose
the M4 Torx internal EMC filter removal screw. Finally remove the M4
Figure 4-23 Removal of the size 3 internal EMC filter Torx internal EMC filter removal screw (3) to electrically disconnect the
internal EMC filter.
Figure 4-26 Removal of the size 6 internal EMC filter
To electrically disconnect the internal EMC filter, remove the screw as To electrically disconnect the internal EMC filter, remove the screw as
shown above (1). shown above (1).

Issue Number: 7
4.8.3 General requirements for EMC

Ground (earth) connections
The grounding arrangements should be in accordance with Figure 4-27, which shows a single drive on a back-plate with or without an additional
enclosure.
Figure 4-27 shows how to configure and minimise EMC when using unshielded motor cable. However shielded cable is a better option, in which case
it should be installed as shown in section 4.8.5 Compliance with generic emission standards on page 68.
Figure 4-27 General EMC enclosure layout showing ground connections
If ground connections are

made using a separate
cable, they should run
parallel to the appropriate
power cable to minimise
emissions
Metal backplate
Optional EMC
filter
If the control circuit 0V

is to be grounded, this External
should be done at the controller
system controller only to 0V PE
avoid injecting noise
currents into the 0V circuit
3 phase AC supply ~
PE
Grounding bar
The incoming supply ground
should be connected to a
single power ground bus bar
or low impedance earth
terminal inside the cubicle. Use four core cable to
This should be used as a Metal backplate connect the motor to the drive.
common 'clean' ground for all safety bonded to The ground conductor in the
components inside the cubicle. power ground busbar motor cable must be connected
directly to the earth terminal of
the drive and motor.
It must not be connected directly
to the power earth busbar.
Optional
ground
connection

Issue Number: 7
Cable layout Operation in the second environment

Figure 4-28 indicates the clearances which should be observed around In all cases a shielded motor cable must be used, and an EMC filter is
the drive and related ‘noisy’ power cables by all sensitive control signals required for all drives with a rated input current of less than 100 A.
/ equipment. The drive contains an in-built filter for basic emission control. In some
Figure 4-28 Drive cable clearances cases feeding the motor cables (U, V and W) once through a ferrite ring
Optional braking resistor and overload can maintain compliance for longer cable lengths.
For longer motor cables, an external filter is required. Where a filter is
required, follow the guidelines in section 4.8.5 Compliance with generic
emission standards on page 68.
Where a filter is not required, follow the guidelines given in section
4.8.3 General requirements for EMC on page 67.
The second environment typically includes an industrial low-
voltage power supply network which does not supply
buildings used for residential purposes. Operating the drive in
this environment without an external EMC filter may cause
CAUTION interference to nearby electronic equipment whose sensitivity
has not been appreciated. The user must take remedial
measures if this situation arises. If the consequences of
unexpected disturbances are severe, it is recommended that
the guidelines in section 4.8.5 Compliance with generic
emission standards on page 68 be adhered to.
Refer to section 11.1.26 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) on

page 182 for further information on compliance with EMC standards and
definitions of environments.
Do not place sensitive
(unscreened) signal circuits Detailed instructions and EMC information are given in the EMC Data
within a zone extending Sheet which is available from the supplier of the drive.
300 mm (12 in) around the
Drive, motor cable, or input
cable from the EMC filter and
4.8.5 Compliance with generic emission standards
unshielded braking resistor The following information applies to frame sizes 1 to 6.
cable (if used)
Use the recommended filter and shielded motor cable. Observe the
layout rules given in Figure 4-29. Ensure the AC supply and ground
cables are at least 100 mm from the power module and motor cable.
Figure 4-29 Supply and ground cable clearance (sizes 1 to 6)
300 mm
(12 in)
≥100 mm
NOTE N (4 in)
Any signal cables which are carried inside the motor cable (i.e. motor
thermistor, motor brake) will pick up large pulse currents via the cable
capacitance. The shield of these signal cables must be connected to
ground close to the motor cable, to avoid this noise current spreading
through the control system.
4.8.4 Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004 (standard
for Power Drive Systems)
Meeting the requirements of this standard depends on the environment
that the drive is intended to operate in, as follows:
Operation in the first environment
Observe the guidelines given in section 4.8.5 Compliance with generic ≥100 mm
(4 in)
emission standards on page 68. An external EMC filter will always be
required.
Do not modify
This is a product of the restricted distribution class according the filter wires
to IEC 61800-3
In a residential environment this product may cause radio
CAUTION
interference in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures.

Issue Number: 7
Avoid placing sensitive signal circuits in a zone 300 mm (12 in) in the The unbroken motor cable shield (unbroken) electrically connected to
area immediately surrounding the power module. and held in place by means of the grounding bracket.
Figure 4-30 Sensitive signal circuit clearance Connect the shield of the motor cable to the ground terminal of the motor
frame using a link that is as short as possible and not exceeding 50 mm
(2 in) long.
A complete 360° termination of the shield to the terminal housing of the
motor is beneficial.
From an EMC consideration it is irrelevant whether the motor cable
contains an internal (safety) ground core, or if there is a separate
external ground conductor, or where grounding is through the shield
alone. An internal ground core will carry a high noise current and
therefore it must be terminated as close as possible to the shield
termination.
≥300 mm Figure 4-32 Grounding the motor cable shield
(12 in)
Sensitive
signal
cable
Ensure good EMC grounding.

Figure 4-31 Grounding the drive, motor cable shield and filter
Unshielded wiring to the optional braking resistor(s) may be used

provided the wiring runs internally to the enclosure. Ensure a minimum
spacing of 300 mm (12 in) from the signal wiring and the AC supply
wiring to the external EMC filter. If this condition cannot be met then the
wiring must be shielded.
Figure 4-33 Shielding requirements of optional external braking
resistor
Optional external
braking resistor
Optional external
braking resistor
1 Enclosure Enclosure
BR +DC
OR
+DC BR +DC BR
NOTE
1: Ensure direct metal contact at the drive and filter mounting points. Any If the control wiring is to leave the enclosure, it must be shielded and the
paint must be removed beforehand. shield(s) clamped to the drive using the grounding bracket as shown in
Figure 4-34.

Issue Number: 7
Remove the outer insulating cover of the cable to ensure the shield(s) The coupling-bar may be grounded to a known low-impedance ground
make direct contact with the bracket, but keep the shield(s) intact until as nearby, for example a large metallic structure which is connected closely
close as possible to the terminals to the drive ground.
Alternatively, wiring may be passed through a ferrite ring, part number Figure 4-36 Connecting the motor cable to an isolator /
3225-1004. disconnect switch
Figure 4-34 Grounding of signal cable shields using the Isolator
grounding bracket
From the To the

Drive motor
Coupling bar
(If required)
Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and

connections outside a building
The input/output ports for the control circuits are designed for general
use within machines and small systems without any special precautions.
These circuits meet the requirements of EN 61000-6-2:2005 (1 kV
surge) provided the 0 V connection is not grounded.
In applications where they may be exposed to high-energy voltage
surges, some special measures may be required to prevent malfunction
or damage. Surges may be caused by lightning or severe power faults in
4.8.6 Variations in the EMC wiring
association with grounding arrangements which permit high transient
Interruptions to the motor cable voltages between nominally grounded points. This is a particular risk
The motor cable should ideally be a single length of shielded or armored
where the circuits extend outside the protection of a building.
cable having no interruptions. In some situations it may be necessary to
interrupt the cable, as in the following examples: As a general rule, if the circuits are to pass outside the building where
the drive is located, or if cable runs within a building exceed 30 m, some
• Connecting the motor cable to a terminal block in the drive enclosure
additional precautions are advisable. One of the following techniques
• Installing a motor isolator / disconnect switch for safety when work is
should be used:
done on the motor
In these cases the following guidelines should be followed. 1. Galvanic isolation, i.e. do not connect the control 0 V terminal to
ground. Avoid loops in the control wiring, i.e. ensure every control
Terminal block in the enclosure wire is accompanied by its return (0 V) wire.
The motor cable shields should be bonded to the back-plate using 2. Shielded cable with additional power ground bonding. The cable
uninsulated metal cable-clamps which should be positioned as close as shield may be connected to ground at both ends, but in addition the
possible to the terminal block. Keep the length of power conductors to a ground conductors at both ends of the cable must be bonded
minimum and ensure that all sensitive equipment and circuits are at together by a power ground cable (equipotential bonding cable) with
least 0.3 m (12 in) away from the terminal block.
cross-sectional area of at least 10 mm2, or 10 times the area of the
Figure 4-35 Connecting the motor cable to a terminal block in the signal cable shield, or to suit the electrical safety requirements of the
enclosure plant. This ensures that fault or surge current passes mainly through
From the Drive the ground cable and not in the signal cable shield. If the building or
plant has a well-designed common bonded network this precaution
is not necessary.
3. Additional over-voltage suppression - for the analog and digital
inputs and outputs, a zener diode network or a commercially
available surge suppressor may be connected in parallel with the
input circuit as shown in Figure 4-37 and Figure 4-38.
If a digital port experiences a severe surge its protective trip may operate
(O.Ld1 trip). For continued operation after such an event, the trip can be
reset automatically by setting Pr 10.034 to 5.
Figure 4-37 Surge suppression for digital and unipolar inputs and
outputs
Back-plate
Signal from plant Signal to drive
Enclosure
30V zener diode
To the motor e.g. 2xBZW50-15
Using a motor isolator / disconnect-switch 0V 0V

The motor cable shields should be connected by a very short conductor
having a low inductance. The use of a flat metal coupling-bar is
recommended; conventional wire is not suitable.
The shields should be bonded directly to the coupling-bar using
uninsulated metal cable-clamps. Keep the length of the exposed power
conductors to a minimum and ensure that all sensitive equipment and
circuits are at least 0.3 m (12 in) away.

Issue Number: 7
Figure 4-38 Surge suppression for analog and bipolar inputs and Table 4-25 Serial communication port pin-outs (screw terminal
outputs block)
Signal from plant Signal to drive Pin Function
1 0V
2 RX\ TX\
3 RX TX
2 x 15V zener diode
e.g. 2xBZW50-15 4 120 Ω Termination resistor
5 TX Enable
6 +24 V (100 mA)
0V 0V 4.9.2 Isolation of the 485 serial communications
Surge suppression devices are available as rail-mounting modules, e.g. port
from Phoenix Contact: The serial PC communications port is single insulated and meets the
requirements for ELV.
Unipolar TT-UKK5-D/24 DC
Bipolar TT-UKK5-D/24 AC When using the communications port with a personal
These devices are not suitable for encoder signals or fast digital data computer or centralised controller e.g. PLC, an isolation
networks because the capacitance of the diodes adversely affects the device must be included with a rated voltage at least equal
signal. Most encoders have galvanic isolation of the signal circuit from to the drive supply voltage. Ensure that the correct fuses are
WARNING
the motor frame, in which case no precautions are required. For data installed at the drive input, and that the drive is connected to
networks, follow the specific recommendations for the particular the correct supply voltage.
network. If a serial communications converter other than the CT
Comms cable is used to connect to other circuits classified
4.9 Communications connections as Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) (e.g. to a personal
computer), then a safety isolating barrier must be included to
Installing an AI-485 Adaptor provides the drive with a 2 wire 485 serial
maintain the SELV classification.
communications interface. This enables the drive set-up, operation and
monitoring to be carried out with a PC or controller as required. An isolated serial communications lead has been designed to connect
Figure 4-39 Location of the AI-485 Adaptor option the drive to IT equipment (such as laptop computers), and is available
from the supplier of the drive. See below for details:
Table 4-26 Isolated serial comms lead details
Part number Description
1 2 3 4 5 6
4500-0096 CT USB Comms cable
8 1
The “isolated serial communications” lead has reinforced insulation as
defined in IEC60950 for altitudes up to 3,000 m.
4.10 Control connections

4.10.1 General
Table 4-27 The control connections consist of:
Control parameters Terminal
Function Qty
available number
Single ended analog Mode, offset, invert, scaling,
2 2, 5
4.9.1 485 serial communications input destination
The drive only supports Modbus RTU protocol. See Table 4-24 for the Analog output 1 Source, mode, scaling, 7
connection details. 11, 12, 13,
Digital input 4 Destination, invert
14
NOTE
Input / output mode select,
Standard Ethernet cables are not recommended for use when Digital input / output 1 10
destination / source, invert
connecting drives on a 485 network as they do not have the correct
Relay 1 Source, invert 41
twisted pairs for the pinout of the serial comms port.
31, 34
Table 4-24 Serial communication port pin-outs (RJ45) Drive enable (SAFE (frame 1- 4)
2
Pin Function TORQUE OFF) 31, 35
(frame 5 - 6)
1 120 Ω Termination resistor
+10 V User output 1 4
2 RX TX
+24 V User output 1 9
3 0V
0V common 1 1
4 +24 V (100 mA)
32, 33
5 Not connected (frame 1- 4)
0V SAFE TORQUE OFF 2
6 TX enable 32, 36
7 RX\ TX\ (frame 5 - 6)
8 RX\ TX\ (if termination resistors are required, link to pin 1) NOTE
Minimum number of connections are 2, 3, 7 and shield. The 0 V terminals on the SAFE TORQUE OFF are isolated from each
other and the 0 V common (size 1 to 4). The 0V terminals of the SAFE
TORQUE OFF function on size 5 to 6 are common with the user 0 V
terminals.

Issue Number: 7
Key: Figure 4-40 Default terminal functions

Indicates the parameter which is being controlled
Destination parameter:
by the terminal / function
Indicates the parameter being output by the
Source parameter:
terminal
Analog - indicates the mode of operation of the
terminal, i.e. voltage 0-10 V, current 4-20 mA etc. 1 14 41 42
Mode parameter: Digital - indicates the mode of operation of the
terminal, (the Drive Enable terminal is fixed in
positive logic).
All analog terminal functions can be programmed in menu 7.
0V common
All digital terminal functions (including the relay) can be programmed in 1
Analog
menu 8. frequency 2
reference 1
The control circuits are isolated from the power circuits in the 4
drive by basic insulation (single insulation) only. The installer +10 V
Analog
must ensure that the external control circuits are insulated frequency 5
from human contact by at least one layer of insulation reference 2
WARNING (supplementary insulation) rated for use at the AC supply
voltage.
Frequency
If the control circuits are to be connected to other circuits 7

classified as Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) (e.g. to a
personal computer), an additional isolating barrier must be
+24 V
WARNING
included in order to maintain the SELV classification. 9
If any of the digital inputs (including the drive enable input) At zero frequency 10
are connected in parallel with an inductive load (i.e.
contactor or motor brake) then suitable suppression (i.e. 11
diode or varistor) should be used on the coil of the load. If no
CAUTION suppression is used then over voltage spikes can cause Run forward 12
damage to the digital inputs and outputs on the drive. Run reverse 13
NOTE N Analog input 1 select

Analog input 1/
Any signal cables which are carried inside the motor cable (i.e. motor input 2 select 14
thermistor, motor brake) will pick up large pulse currents via the cable
Analog input 2 select
capacitance. The shield of these signal cables must be connected to
ground close to the point of exit of the motor cable, to avoid this noise
current spreading through the control system. 41 Relay
Drive OK (over-voltage
NOTE N 42 category II)
The SAFE TORQUE OFF drive enable terminals are positive logic input
only (see Figure 4-41 on page 72). Figure 4-41 SAFE TORQUE OFF inputs (size 1 to 4)
STO Input 1
31
STO
Channel 1 0V
32
0V
STO 33
Channel 2 STO Input 2
34
Figure 4-42 SAFE TORQUE OFF inputs (size 5 and 6)
STO Input 1
31
STO
Channel 1 0V
32
STO Input 2
STO 35
Channel 2 0V
36

Issue Number: 7
4.10.2 Control terminal specification 7 Analog output 1

1 0V common Default function Frequency output
Common connection for all external Type of output Unipolar single-ended analog voltage
Function
devices Voltage range +10 V
Maximum offset 15 mV
2 Analog input 1 Load resistance ≥ 2k Ω
Protection Short circuit relative to 0 V
Default function Frequency reference
Resolution 0.1 %
Unipolar single-ended analog voltage or
Type of input Sample / update period 5 ms
unipolar current
Mode controlled by… Pr 07.007
Operating in voltage mode (default)
9 +24 V user output
Full scale voltage range 0 V to +10 V ±3 %
Maximum offset ±30 mV Default function Supply for external digital devices
Absolute maximum voltage range -18 V to +30 V relative to 0 V Voltage tolerance ±20 %
Input resistance 100k Ω Maximum output current 100 mA
Operating in current mode Protection Current limit and trip
0 to 20 mA ±5 %, 20 to 0 mA ±5 %,
Current ranges
4 to 20 mA ±5 %, 20 to 4 mA ±5 %
Maximum offset 250 µA 10 Digital I/O 1
Absolute maximum voltage Default function AT ZERO FREQUENCY output
-18 V to +30 V relative to 0 V
(reverse bias) Positive logic digital input, positive logic
Absolute maximum current 25 mA voltage source output.
Type
PWM or frequency output modes can be
Equivalent input resistance 165 Ω
selected.
Common to all modes
Input / output mode controlled by
Resolution 11 bits Pr 08.031
…
Sample / update 5 ms Operating as in input
Absolute maximum applied voltage
range
4 +10 V user output Impedance 6.8 kΩ
Default function Supply for external analog devices Input threshold 10 V ±0.8 V from IEC 61131-2
Nominal voltage 10.2 V Operating as an output
Voltage tolerance ±3 % Nominal maximum output current 50 mA
Maximum output current 5 mA Maximum output current 100 mA (total including +24 Vout)
Common to all modes
Voltage range 0 V to +24 V
5 Analog input 2 2 ms when routed to destinations Pr 06.035
Sample / update period
Default function Frequency reference or Pr 06.036, otherwise 6 ms
Unipolar single-ended analog voltage or
Type of input
positive logic only digital input
Mode controlled by.... Pr 07.011 11 Digital Input 2
Operating in voltage mode (default) 12 Digital Input 3
Full scale voltage range 0 V to +10 V ±3 % 13 Digital Input 4
Maximum offset ±30 mV Terminal 11 default function None
Absolute maximum voltage range -18 V to +30 V relative to 0 V Terminal 12 default function RUN FORWARD input
Input resistance 100 k Ω Terminal 13 default function RUN REVERSE input
Resolution 11 bits Type Positive logic only digital inputs
Sample / update period 5 ms Voltage range 0 V to +24 V
Operating in digital mode Absolute maximum applied voltage
Absolute maximum applied voltage range
-18 V to +30 V relative to 0V
range Impedance 6.8 kΩ
Impedance 6.8 k Ω Input threshold 10 V ±0.8 V from IEC 61131-2
Input threshold 10 V ±0.8 V from IEC 61131-2 2 ms when routed to destinations Pr 06.035
2 ms when routed to destinations Pr 06.035 or Pr 06.036, otherwise 6 ms.
or Pr 06.036, otherwise 6 ms.

Issue Number: 7
41
14 Digital Input 5 Relay contacts
42
Terminal 14 default function Analog INPUT 1 / INPUT 2 select
Default function Drive OK indicator
Positive logic only digital input. Frequency 240 Vac, Installation over-voltage
input or motor thermistor input (bias for Contact voltage rating
Type category II
DIN44081 ptc, KTY84, PT1000, PT2000
and other types) mode can be selected 2 A AC 240 V
4 A DC 30 V resistive load
Voltage range 0 V to +24 V Contact maximum current rating
0.5 A DC 30 V inductive load (L/R =
Absolute maximum applied voltage 40 ms)
range Contact minimum recommended rating 12 V 100 mA
Impedance 6.8 kΩ Contact type Normally open
Input threshold 10 V ±0.8 V from IEC 61131-2 Closed when power applied and drive
Default contact condition
2 ms when routed to destinations Pr 06.035 OK
or Pr 06.036, otherwise 6 ms. Update period 4 ms
31 SAFE TORQUE OFF function (drive enable) To prevent the risk of a fire hazard in the event of a fault, a
34 (Frame 1 to 4) fuse or other over-current protection must be installed in the
Type Positive logic only digital input relay circuit.
WARNING
Voltage range 0 to +24 V
Absolute maximum applied voltage 30 V 4.11 SAFE TORQUE OFF (STO)
Logic Threshold 10 V ±5 V
The SAFE TORQUE OFF function provides a means for preventing the
Low state maximum voltage for disable
to SIL3 and PL e
5V drive from generating torque in the motor with a very high level of
integrity. It is suitable for incorporation into a safety system for a
>4 mA @ 15 V, <15mA @30 V from
Impedance machine. It is also suitable for use as a conventional drive enable input.
IEC 61131-2, type 1
Low state maximum current for disable The safety function is active when either one or both STO inputs are in
0.5 mA
to SIL3 and PL e the logic-low state as specified in the control terminal specification. The
Response time
Nominal: 12 ms function is defined according to EN 61800-5-2 and IEC 61800-5-2 as
Maximum: 20 ms follows. (In these standards a drive offering safety-related functions is
The SAFE TORQUE OFF function may be used in a safety-related application in referred to as a PDS(SR)):
preventing the drive from generating torque in the motor to a high level of
integrity. The system designer is responsible for ensuring that the complete 'Power, that can cause rotation (or motion in the case of a linear motor),
system is safe and designed correctly according to the relevant safety standards. is not applied to the motor. The PDS(SR) will not provide energy to the
If the SAFE TORQUE OFF function is not required, these terminal are used for motor which can generate torque (or force in the case of a linear motor)'.
enabling the drive.
This safety function corresponds to an uncontrolled stop in accordance
with stop category 0 of IEC 60204-1. The SAFE TORQUE OFF function
makes use of the special property of an inverter drive with an induction
31 SAFE TORQUE OFF function (drive enable) motor, which is that torque cannot be generated without the continuous
35 (Frame 5 to 6) correct active behavior of the inverter circuit. All credible faults in the
Type Positive logic only digital input inverter power circuit cause a loss of torque generation.
Voltage range 0 to +24 V The SAFE TORQUE OFF function is fail-safe, so when the SAFE
Absolute maximum applied voltage 30 V
TORQUE OFF input is disconnected the drive will not operate the motor,
even if a combination of components within the drive has failed. Most
Logic Threshold 10 V ±5 V
component failures are revealed by the drive failing to operate. SAFE
Low state maximum voltage for disable
to SIL3 and PL e
5V TORQUE OFF is also independent of the drive firmware. This meets the
requirements of the following standards, for the prevention of operation
>4 mA @ 15 V, from IEC 61131-2,
Impedance of the motor.
type 1, 3.3 kΩ
Low state maximum current for disable
0.5 mA
According to EN ISO 13849-1:
to SIL3 and PL e
PL = e
Nominal: 8 ms
Response time Category = 4
Maximum: 20 ms
The SAFE TORQUE OFF function may be used in a safety-related application in MTTFD = High
preventing the drive from generating torque in the motor to a high level of
integrity. The system designer is responsible for ensuring that the complete DCav = High
system is safe and designed correctly according to the relevant safety standards.
If the SAFE TORQUE OFF function is not required, these terminal are used for Mission Time and Proof Test Interval = 20 years
enabling the drive. The calculated PFDAVG for the complete STO function is:
Frame 1 to 4: 8.4 x 10 -6
Frame 5 to 6: 3.64 x 10 -6
According to EN 61800-5-2:
SIL = 3
Frame 1 to 4: PFH = 9.61 x 10 -11 h-1
Frame 5 to 6: PFH = 4.16 x 10 -11 h-1

Issue Number: 7
SAFE TORQUE OFF can be used to eliminate electro-mechanical

The design of safety-related control systems must only be
contactors, including special safety contactors, which would otherwise
done by personnel with the required training and experience.
be required for safety applications. The SAFE TORQUE OFF function will only ensure the safety
The function can be used in safety-related machines or systems which of a machine if it is correctly incorporated into a complete
have been designed according to IEC 62061 or IEC 61508, or other WARNING safety system. The system must be subject to a risk
standards which are compatible with IEC 61508, since the analysis and assessment to confirm that the residual risk of an unsafe
the integrity metrics used in EN 61800-5-2 are the same. event is at an acceptable level for the application
Note on response time of SAFE TORQUE OFF, and use with safety
controllers with self-testing outputs. SAFE TORQUE OFF does not provide electrical isolation.
SAFE TORQUE OFF has been designed to have a response time of The supply to the drive must be disconnected by an
greater than 1 ms, so that it is compatible with safety controllers whose approved isolation device before gaining access to power
outputs are subject to a dynamic test with a pulse width not exceeding WARNING
connections.
1ms.
Two-channel SAFE TORQUE OFF It is essential to observe the maximum permitted voltage of 5
Two fully independent input channels are provided for the SAFE V for a safe low (disabled) state of SAFE TORQUE OFF. The
TORQUE OFF function.Each input separately meets the requirements of connections to the drive must be arranged so that voltage
the standards as defined above, regardless of the state of the other drops in the 0 V wiring cannot exceed this value under any
WARNING
input. If either or both inputs are set at a logic low state, there are no loading condition. It is strongly recommended that the SAFE
single faults in the drive which can permit the motor to be driven. TORQUE OFF circuits be provided with a dedicated 0 V
conductors which should be connected to terminals 32 and
It is not necessary to use both channels in order for the drive to meet the
33 at the drive.
requirements of the standards. The purpose of the two channels is to
allow connection to machine safety systems where two channels are For more information regarding the SAFE TORQUE OFF input, please
required, and to facilitate protection against wiring faults. For example, if see the Control Techniques Safe Torque Off Engineering Guide
each channel is connected to a safety-related digital output of a safety available for download from www.controltechniques.com
related controller, computer or PLC, then on detection of a fault in one
output the drive can still be disabled safely through the other output.
Then there are no single wiring faults which can cause a loss of the
safety function, i.e. inadvertent enabling of the drive.
In the event that the two-channel operation is not required, the two
inputs can be connected together to form a single SAFE TORQUE OFF
input. In this case it is important to note that a single short-circuit from
the SAFE TORQUE OFF input to a DC supply of approximately +24 V
would cause the drive to be enabled. This might occur through a fault in
the wiring. This can be excluded according to EN ISO 13849-2 by the
use of protected wiring. The wiring can be protected by either of the
following methods:
• By placing the wiring in a segregated cable duct or other enclosure.
or
• By providing the wiring with a grounded shield in a positive-logic
grounded control circuit. The shield is provided to avoid a hazard
from an electrical fault. It may be grounded by any convenient
method; no special EMC precautions are required.
SAFE TORQUE OFF over-ride
The drive does not provide any facility to over-ride the SAFE TORQUE
OFF function, for example for maintenance purposes. Because of the
risk of human error, the installation must not provide any facility to
override the function. The design of safety-related control systems must
only be done by personnel with the required training and experience.
The SAFE TORQUE OFF function will only ensure the safety of a
machine if it is correctly incorporated into a complete safety system. The
system must be subject to a risk assessment to confirm that the residual
risk of an unsafe event is at an acceptable level for the application.
SAFE TORQUE OFF does not provide electrical isolation. The supply to
the drive must be disconnected by an approved isolation device before
gaining access to power connections.
With SAFE TORQUE OFF there are no single faults in the drive which
can permit the motor to be driven. Therefore it is not necessary to have a
second channel to interrupt the power connection, nor a fault detection
circuit. It is essential to observe the maximum permitted voltage of 5 V
for a safe low (disabled) state of SAFE TORQUE OFF.
The connections to the drive must be arranged so that voltage drops in
the 0 V wiring cannot exceed this value under any loading condition. It is
strongly recommended that the SAFE TORQUE OFF circuits be
provided with a dedicated 0 V conductors which should be connected to
terminals 32 and 33 at the drive.

Issue Number: 7
5 Getting started 5.2 Keypad operation

5.2.1 Control buttons
This chapter introduces the user interfaces, menu structure and security
The keypad consists of:
levels of the drive.
• Up and down button - Used to navigate the parameter structure and
5.1 Understanding the display change parameter values.
• Enter button - Used to toggle between parameter edit and view
5.1.1 Keypad mode. This button can also be used to select between slot menu and
The keypad display consists of a 6 digit LED display. The display shows
parameter display.
the drive status or the menu and parameter number currently being
• Escape button - Used to exit from parameter edit or view mode. In
edited. parameter edit mode, if parameter values are edited and the escape
The option module menu (S.mm.ppp) is only displayed if the option button pressed, the parameter value will be restored to the value it
module is installed. Where S signifies the option module slot number had on entry to edit mode.
and the mm.ppp signifies the menu and parameter number of the option • Start button - Used to provide a 'Run' command if keypad mode is
module’s internal menus and parameter. selected.
The display also includes LED indicators showing units and status as • Stop / Reset button - Used to reset the drive. In keypad mode can be
shown in Figure 5-1. used for 'Stop'.
When the drive is powered up, the display will show the power up
parameter defined by Parameter Displayed At Power-Up (11.022).
Figure 5-1 Keypad detail
10
7
8
9
1 6
2 5
3 4
1. Escape button
2. Down button
3. Start button
4. Stop / Reset button (red)
5. Up button
6. Enter button
7. Run forward indicator
8. Run reverse indicator
9. Keypad reference indicator
10. Unit indicators
NOTE
The red stop button is also used to reset the drive.

The parameter value is correctly displayed on the keypad display as
shown in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 Keypad display formats
Display formats Value
Standard 100.99
Date 31.12.11 or 12.31.11
Time 12.34.56
Character ABCDEF
Binary 5
IP Address 192.168 88.1*
MAC Address 01.02.03 04.05.06*
Version number 01.23.45
*Alternate display

Issue Number: 7
Figure 5-2 Display modes
Status
If Drive Status (Pr 10.101) = 4 (Run)
Show value only
If Drive Status (Pr 10.101) <> 4
Show status only
or Press and release.

Show last slot / menu / param
Timeout
Press and release to selected
240 s or hold
go back to status or
Go to Status if no
option installed
Slot select
(Only if option installed)
or
Press or to select _ or 1
Edited digit flashes

Parameter format s.mm.ppp
s: _ or 0: for drive. If drive is
Press and release to Press and release to selected then hide first digit and
edit Slot edit Menu show only menu and parameter.
1: for option
Menu select mm: menu number (0 to 99)
ppp: parameter number (0 to 999)
Press or to select menu
Edited digits flash
Press and release to Press and release to

edit Menu edit Parameter
Parameter select
Press or to select parameter.
Edited digits flash
Press and release to Press and

edit Parameter release to view
Show previous or next
parameter
View
or
- Press and release to go to next or

Press and previous parameter. Parameter flashes
briefly then goes back to View.
release to
discard new - Holding or scrolls through each
value and return parameter within the menu.
- Press and release to accept Press and release
to original value - Holding and together sets value to
new value to be set. to edit
zero.
- Reset drive if required.
- Execute action if required.
Edit
Press or to select value
- Edited digit flashes

- Holding or increases or decreases value.
- Modified value has a direct effect on the drive

Holding except routing parameters and special parameters.
or timeout will discard - New value can be validated or discarded.
new value and return
to original value. - Holding + or edit the next or previous
digit.
NOTE
The up and down buttons can only be used to move between menus if Pr 00.010 has been set to show 'ALL'. Refer to section 5.9 Parameter access
level and security on page 80.

Issue Number: 7
Figure 5-3 Mode examples 5.3 Menu structure

The drive parameter structure consists of menus and parameters.
The drive initially powers up so that only Menu 0 can be viewed. The up
  and down arrow buttons are used to navigate between parameters and
once Pr 00.010 has been set to 'All' the up and down buttons are used to
navigate between menus.
For further information refer to section 5.9 Parameter access level and
security on page 80.
1 2
The menus and parameters rollover in both directions i.e. if the last
parameter is displayed, a further press will cause the display to rollover
and show the first parameter.
When changing between menus, the drive remembers which parameter
  was last viewed in a particular menu and thus displays that parameter.
5.4 Menu 0
Menu 0 is used to bring together various commonly used parameters for
basic easy set up of the drive. The parameters displayed in Menu 0 can
3 4 be configured in Menu 22.
Appropriate parameters are copied from the advanced menus into Menu
1 Parameter view mode: Read write or Read only 0 and thus exist in both locations.
2 Status mode: Drive OK status For further information, refer to Chapter 6 Basic parameters on page 82.
If the drive is ok and the parameters are not being edited or viewed, the Figure 5-4 Menu 0 copying
display will show one of the following:
inh', 'rdy' or status mode parameter value. Menu 2
3 Status mode: Trip status
When the drive is in trip condition, the display will indicate that the drive
has tripped and the display will show the trip code. For further 02.021 5
information regarding trip codes, refer to section 12.4 Trips, Sub-trip Menu 0
numbers on page 187.
Menu 1
4 Status mode: Alarm status 00.004 5
00.005 0
During an 'alarm' condition the display flashes between the drive status 00.006 150
parameter value and the alarm. 01.014 0
Do not change parameter values without careful Menu 4

consideration; incorrect values may cause damage or a
safety hazard.
WARNING 04.007 150
NOTE
When changing the values of parameters, make a note of the new
values in case they need to be entered again.
NOTE
For new parameter values to apply after the line power supply to the
drive is interrupted, new values must be saved. Refer to section
5.7 Saving parameters on page 80.

Issue Number: 7
5.5 Advanced menus 5.5.1 Display messages

The advanced menus consist of groups or parameters appropriate to a The following tables indicate the various possible mnemonics which can
specific function or feature of the drive. Menus 0 to 22 can be viewed on be displayed by the drive and their meaning.
the Keypad. Table 5-3 Status indications
The option module menu (S.mm.ppp) is only displayed if the option
module is installed. Where S signifies the option module slot number Drive
and the mm.ppp signifies the menu and parameter number of the option String Description output
module’s internal menus and parameter. stage
Table 5-2 Advanced menu descriptions The drive is inhibited and cannot be run.
The SAFE TORQUE OFF signal is not
Menu Description applied to SAFE TORQUE OFF terminals
Commonly used basic set up parameters for quick / easy inh or Pr 06.015 is set to 0. The other Disabled
0
programming conditions that can prevent the drive from
1 Frequency reference enabling are shown as bits in Enable
2 Ramps Conditions (06.010)
3 Frequency control The drive is ready to run. The drive enable
rdy is active, but the drive inverter is not active Disabled
4 Torque and current control
because the final drive run is not active
5 Motor control
Stop The drive is stopped / holding zero speed. Enabled
6 Sequencer and clock
S.Loss Supply loss condition has been detected Enabled
7 Analog I/O
dc inj The drive is applying dc injection braking Enabled
8 Digital I/O
The drive has tripped and no longer
9 Programmable logic, motorized pot, binary sum, timers
Er controlling the motor. The trip code Disabled
10 Status and trips appears on the display.
11 Drive set-up and identification, serial communications The drive is in the under voltage state
12 Threshold detectors and variable selectors UV Disabled
either in low voltage or high voltage mode.
14 User PID controller
15 Option module slot 1 set-up menu 5.5.2 Alarm indications
18 General option module application menu 1 An alarm is an indication given on the display by alternating the alarm
20 General option module application menu 2 string with the drive status string on the display. Alarms strings are not
displayed when a parameter is being edited.
21 Second motor parameters
22 Menu 0 set-up Table 5-4 Alarm indications
Slot 1 Slot 1 option menus*
Alarm string Description
* Only displayed when the option module is installed.
Brake resistor overload. Braking Resistor Thermal
br.res Accumulator (10.039) in the drive has reached 75.0
% of the value at which the drive will trip.
Motor Protection Accumulator (04.019) in the drive
OV.Ld has reached 75.0 % of the value at which the drive
will trip and the load on the drive is >100 %.
Drive over temperature. Percentage Of Drive
d.OV.Ld Thermal Trip Level (07.036) in the drive is greater
than 90 %.
The autotune procedure has been initialized and an
tuning
autotune in progress.
Limit switch active. Indicates that a limit switch is
LS
active and that is causing the motor to be stopped.
Opt.AI Option slot alarm.
Lo.AC Low voltage mode. See Low AC Alarm (10.107).
Current limit active. See Current Limit Active
I.AC.Lt
(10.009).

Issue Number: 7
5.6 Changing the operating mode 5.9 Parameter access level and security
Procedure The parameter access level determines whether the user has access to
Use the following procedure only if a different operating mode is Menu 0 only or to all the advanced menus (Menus 1 to 22) in addition to
required: Menu 0.
1. Ensure the drive is not enabled, i.e. terminal 31 & 34 is open or The User Security determines whether the access to the user is read
Pr 06.015 is OFF (0) only or read write.
2. Change the setting of Pr 00.079 as follows: Both the User Security and Parameter Access Level can operate
Pr 00.079 setting Operating mode independently of each other as shown in table Table 5-5.
 1 Open-loop
Table 5-5 Parameter access level and security
User
 2 RFC-A
security User Menu 0 Advanced
Access level
The figures in the second column apply when serial communications are status security status menu status
used. (11.044)
Open RW Not visible
NOTE 0 Menu 0
Closed RO Not visible
When the operating mode is changed, a parameter save is carried out.
Open RW RW
1 All Menus
Closed RO RO
5.7 Saving parameters Read-only Open RO Not visible
2
When changing a parameter in Menu 0, the new value is saved when Menu 0 Closed RO Not visible
pressing the Enter button to return to parameter view mode Open RO RO
3 Read-only
from parameter edit mode. Closed RO RO
If parameters have been changed in the advanced menus, then the Open Not visible Not visible
4 Status only
change will not be saved automatically. A save function must be carried Closed Not visible Not visible
out. Open Not visible Not visible
5 No access
Procedure Closed Not visible Not visible
1. Select ‘Save'* in Pr mm.000 (alternatively enter a value of 1000* in
Pr mm.000) The default settings of the drive are Parameter Access Level Menu 0
2. Either: and user Security Open i.e. read / write access to Menu 0 with the
advanced menus not visible.
• Press the red reset button
• Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting 5.9.1 User Security Level / Access Level
Pr 10.038 to 100 The drive provides a number of different levels of security that can be set
* If the drive is in the under voltage state (i.e. when the AI-Backup by the user via User Security Status (11.044); these are shown in the
adaptor terminals are being supplied from a +24 Vdc supply) a value of table below.
1001 must be entered into Pr mm.000 to perform a save function.
User Security
5.8 Restoring parameter defaults Status Description
Restoring parameter defaults by this method saves the default values in (Pr 11.044)
the drives memory. User security status (00.010) and User security code All writable parameters are available to be edited but
LEVEL.0 (0)
(00.025) are not affected by this procedure). only parameters in Menu 0 are visible
Procedure All parameters are visible and all writable parameters
ALL (1)
1. Ensure the drive is not enabled, i.e. terminal 31 & 34 is open or are available to be edited
Pr 06.015 is OFF (0) Access is limited to Menu 0 parameters only. All
r.only.0 (2)
2. Select 'Def.50’ or 'Def.60' in Pr mm.000. (alternatively, enter 1233 parameters are read-only
(50 Hz settings) or 1244 (60 Hz settings) in Pr mm.000). All parameters are read-only however all menus and
3. Either: r.only.A (3)
parameters are visible
• Press the red reset button The keypad remains in status mode and no
Status (4)
• Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting parameters can be viewed or edited
Pr 10.038 to 100 The keypad remains in status mode and no
parameters can be viewed or edited. Drive
no.acc (5)
parameters cannot be accessed via a comms/fieldbus
interface in the drive or any option module

Issue Number: 7
5.9.2 Changing the User Security Level /Access 5.12 Communications

Level
Installing an AI-485 Adaptor provides the drive with a 2 wire 485 serial
The security level is determined by the setting of Pr 00.010 or Pr 11.044.
communications interface. This enables the drive set-up, operation and
The Security Level can be changed through the keypad even if the User
monitoring to be carried out with a PC or controller as required.
Security Code has been set.
5.9.3 User Security Code 5.12.1 485 Serial communications
The User Security Code, when set, prevents write access to any of the Communication is via the RJ45 connector or screw terminals (parallel
parameters in any menu. connection). The drive only supports Modbus RTU protocol.
Setting User Security Code The communications port applies a 1/4 unit load to the communications
Enter a value between 1 and 9999 in Pr 00.025 and press the network.
button; the security code has now been set to this value. In order to USB to EIA485 Communications
activate the security, the Security level must be set to desired level in Pr An external USB hardware interface such as a PC cannot be used
00.010. When the drive is reset, the security code will have been directly with the 2-wire EIA485 interface of the drive. Therefore a
activated and the drive returns to Menu 0. The value of Pr 00.025 will suitable converter is required.
return to 0 in order to hide the security code. A suitable USB to EIA485 isolated converter is available from Control
Unlocking User Security Code Techniques as follows:
Select a parameter that need to be edited and press the button, • CT USB Comms cable (CT Part No. 4500-0096)
the display will now show ‘Co’. Use the arrow buttons to set the security When using one of the above converters or any other suitable converter
with the drive, it is recommended that no terminating resistors be
code and press the button. With the correct security code
connected on the network. It may be necessary to 'link out' the
entered, the display will revert to the parameter selected in edit mode. terminating resistor within the converter depending on which type is
If an incorrect security code is entered, the following message ‘Co.Err’ is used. The information on how to link out the terminating resistor will
displayed, and the display will revert to parameter view mode. normally be contained in the user information supplied with the
converter.
Disabling User Security
Unlock the previously set security code as detailed above. Set Pr 00.025 Serial communications set-up parameters
to 0 and press the button. The User Security has now been The following parameters need to be set according to the system
disabled, and will not have to be unlocked each time the drive is requirements.
powered up to allow read / write access to the parameters.
Serial communications set-up parameters
8 2 NP (0),
5.10 Displaying parameters with non- 8 1 NP (1), The drive only supports the
8 1 EP (2), Modbus RTU protocol and is
default values only 8 1 OP (3), always a slave. This parameter
By selecting 'diff.d' in Pr mm.000 (Alternatively, enter 12000 in 8 2 NP M (4), defines the supported data
Pr mm.000), the only parameters that will be visible to the user will be Serial Mode 8 1 NP M (5), formats used by the 485
those containing a non-default value. This function does not require a (11.024) 8 1 EP M (6), comms port (if installed) on the
drive reset to become active. In order to deactivate this function, return 8 1 OP M (7), drive. This parameter can be
to Pr mm.000 and select 'none' (alternatively enter a value of 0). Please 7 1 EP (8), changed via the drive keypad,
note that this function can be affected by the access level enabled, refer 7 1 OP (9), via a option module or via the
to section 5.9 Parameter access level and security on page 80 for 7 1 EP M (10), comms interface itself.
further information regarding access level. 7 1 OP M (11)
300 (0), This parameter can be
600 (1), changed via the drive keypad,
5.11 Displaying destination parameters only 1200 (2), via a option module or via the
2400 (3), comms interface itself. If it is
By selecting 'dest' in Pr mm.000 (Alternatively enter 12001 in
4800 (4), changed via the comms
Pr mm.000), the only parameters that will be visible to the user will be Serial Baud Rate
9600 (5), interface, the response to the
destination parameters. This function does not require a drive reset to (11.025)
19200 (6), command uses the original
become active. In order to deactivate this function, return to Pr mm.000
38400 (7), baud rate. The master should
and select 'none' (alternatively enter a value of 0).
57600(8), wait at least 20 ms before
Please note that this function can be affected by the access level 76800(9), sending a new message using
enabled, refer to section 5.9 Parameter access level and security on 115200 (10) the new baud rate.
page 80 for further information regarding access level. This parameter defines the
Serial Address serial address and an
1 to 247
(11.023) addresses between 1 and 247
are permitted.

Issue Number: 7
6 Basic parameters
Menu 0 is used to bring together various commonly used parameters for basic easy set up of the drive. All the parameters in Menu 0 appear in other
menus in the drive (denoted by {…}). Menus 22 can be used to configure the parameters in Menu 0.
6.1 Menu 0: Basic parameters

Range(Ú) Default(Ö)
Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
00.001 Minimum Reference Clamp ±VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP1 Hz 0.00 Hz RW Num US
50Hz default: 50.00 Hz

00.002 Maximum Reference Clamp ±VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP Hz RW Num US
60Hz default: 60.00 Hz
00.003 Acceleration Rate 1 ±VM_ACCEL_RATE s 5.0 s RW Num US

00.004 Deceleration Rate 1 ±VM_ACCEL_RATE s 10.0 s RW Num US
AV (0), AI (1), AV.Pr (2), AI.Pr (3),
00.005 Drive Configuration Preset (4), Pad (5), Pad.Ref (6), AV (0) RW Txt PT US
E.Pot (7), torque (8), Pid (9)
Maximum Heavy Duty Rating
00.006 Motor Rated Current ±VM_RATED_CURRENT A RW Num RA US
(11.032) A
50Hz default: 50Hz default:
1500.0 rpm 1450.0 rpm
00.007 Motor Rated Speed 0.0 to 80000.0 rpm RW Num US
60Hz default: 60Hz default:
1800.0 rpm 1750.0 rpm
110V drive: 230 V

200V drive: 230 V
400V drive 50 Hz: 400 V
00.008 Motor Rated Voltage ±VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET V RW Num RA US
400V drive 60 Hz: 460 V
575V drive: 575 V
690V drive: 690 V
00.009 Motor Rated Power Factor 0.00 to 1.00 0.85 RW Num RA US
LEVEL.0 (0), ALL (1), r.only.0 (2),

00.010 User Security Status LEVEL.0 (0) RW Num ND NC PT
r.only.A (3), Status (4), no.acc(5)
00.015 Jog Reference 0.00 to 300.00 Hz 1.50 Hz RW Num US

4-20.S (-6), 20-4.S (-5), 4-20.L (-4), 20-
4.L (-3), 4-20.H (-2), 20-4.H (-1), 0-20 (0),
00.016 Analog Input 1 Mode Volt (6) RW Txt US
20-0 (1), 4-20.tr (2), 20-4.tr (3), 4-20 (4),
20-4 (5), Volt (6)
00.017 Bipolar Reference Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
00.018 Preset Reference 1 ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz 0.00 Hz RW Num US
00.025 User Security Code 0 to 9999 0 RW Num ND NC PT US
Power-up Keypad Control
00.027 Reset (0), Last (1), Preset (2) Reset (0) RW Txt US
Mode Reference
00.028 Ramp Mode Select Fast (0), Std (1), Std.bst (2), Fst.bst (3) Std (1) RW Txt US
00.029 Ramp Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
None (0), rEAd (1), Prog (2),
00.030 Parameter Cloning None (0) RW Txt NC US
Auto (3), boot (4)
Coast (0), rp (1), rp.dc I (2), dc I (3),
00.031 Stop Mode rp (1) RW Txt US
td.dc I (4), dis (5), No.rp (6)
Dynamic V to F Select / Flux
00.032 0 to 1 0 RW Num US
Optimization Select
dis (0), Enable (1), Fr.Only (2),
00.033 Catch A Spinning Motor dis (0) RW Txt US
Rv.Only (3)
Input (0), th.Sct (1), th (2),
00.034 Digital Input 5 Select Input (0) RW Txt US
th.Notr (3), Fr (4)
00.035 Digital Output 1 Control 0 to 21 0 RW US
00.036 Analog Output 1 Control 0 to 15 0 RW US

Issue Number: 7
Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
0.667 (0), 1(1), 2 (2),
2 (2), 3 (3), 4 (4), 6
Maximum Switching 3 (3), 4 (4), 6 (5), 8
00.037 (5), 8 (6), 3 (3) kHz RW Txt US
Frequency (6), 12 (7),
12 (7), 16 (8) kHz
16 (8) kHz
00.038 Auto-tune 0 to 2 0 to 3 0 RW Num NC US
0.00 to 50Hz: 50.00 Hz

00.039 Motor Rated Frequency RW Num RA US
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Hz 60Hz: 60.00 Hz
00.040 Number of Motor Poles* Auto (0) to 32 (16) Auto 0 RW Num US

Ur.S (0), Ur (1), Fd
00.041 Control Mode (2), Ur.Auto (3), Ur.I (4) RW Txt US
Ur.I (4), SrE (5)
Low Frequency Voltage
00.042 0.0 to 25.0 % 3.0 % RW Num US
Boost
300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2), 2400 (3), 4800

00.043 Serial Baud Rate (4), 9600 (5), 19200 (6), 38400 (7), 57600 19200 (6) RW Txt US
(8), 76800 (9), 115200 (10)
00.044 Serial Address 1 to 247 1 RW Num US

00.045 Reset Serial Communications Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW ND NC
Brake Release Current
00.046 0 to 200 % 50 % RW Num US
Threshold
Brake Apply Current
00.047 0 to 200 % 10 % RW US
Threshold
00.048 BC Brake Release Frequency 0.00 to 20.00 Hz 1.00 Hz RW Num US
00.049 BC Brake Apply Frequency 0.00 to 20.00 Hz 2.00 Hz RW Num US
00.050 BC Brake Delay 0.0 to 25.0 s 1.00 s RW Num US
BC Post-brake Release
00.051 0.0 to 25.0 s 1.00 s RW Num US
Delay
00.053 BC Initial Direction Ref (0), For (1), Rev (2) Ref (0) RW Txt US
BC Brake Apply Through
00.054 0.00 to 25.00 Hz 0.00 Hz RW Num US
Zero Threshold
00.055 BC Enable dis (0), Relay (1), dig IO (2), User (3) dis (0) RW Txt US
Frequency Controller 0.000 to 200.000
00.065 0.100 s/rad RW Num US
Proportional Gain Kp1 s/rad
Frequency Controller Integral 0.00 to 655.35
00.066 0.10 s2/rad RW Num US
Gain Ki1 s2/rad
4 (0), 5 (1), 6 (2),
00.067 Sensorless Mode Filter 8 (3), 12 (4), 4 (0) ms RW Txt US
20 (5) ms
00.069 Spin Start Boost 0.0 to 10.0 1.0 RW US
00.076 Action on Trip Detection 0 to 31 0 RW US
Maximum Heavy Duty
00.077 0.00 to 9999.99 A RO Num ND NC PT
Current Rating
00.078 Software Version 0 to 999999 RO ND NC PT
00.079 User Drive Mode OPEn.LP (1), RFC-A (2) OPEn.LP (1) RW Txt ND NC PT US
LEVEL.0 (0), ALL (1), r.only.0 (2),

00.080 User Security Status LEVEL.O. (0) RW Txt ND PT
r.only.A (3), Status (4), no.acc(5)
* If this parameter is read via serial communications, it will show pole pairs.
RW Read / Write RO Read only Num Number parameter Bit Bit parameter Txt Text string Bin Binary parameter FI Filtered
ND No default value NC Not copied PT Protected parameter RA Rating dependent US User save PS Power-down save DE Destination
IP IP address Mac Mac address Date Date parameter Time Time parameter

Issue Number: 7
Figure 6-1 Menu 0 logic diagram
14 Analog input 1/
input 2 select
Analog reference
2 00.016
Analog input 1 Analog input
1 mode
Analog input 2
5
01.015 01.050 Pr 01.050

set >1 Bipolar
Reference
Drive Enable
Configuration 00.017
Preset frequency 00.005
reference
Preset
00.018 Reference 1 AV 0
AI
1
AV.Pr 2
AI.Pr
3
Pr
4
Pad
5
Pad.Ref
6
Keypad reference E. Pot 7
tor 8
Pid 9
Key
X X Input Read-write (RW)

terminals 00.XXX parameter
X X Output 00.XXX Read-only (RO)

terminals parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings

Issue Number: 7
RUN RUN
FORWARD REVERSE OL, RFC-A> FREQUENCY AT ZERO FREQUENCY
12 13 7 10
Analog output Digital output
Maximum
Reference
Clamp
00.002 Ramp
Enable
Minimum 00.029
Reference
Clamp Torque Mode
04.011
Selector
00.001
00.033
RFC-A mode only
Motor parameters
00.006 ~ 00.009
Ramps
Power Factor
Rated Voltage
RFC-A Frequency-loop
Rated Speed
PIDgains Frequency
Rated Current
00.065 Controller
Proportional
Gain Kp 1
00.003
Frequency
Acceleration 00.066 Controller
Rate 1 Integral
RFC-A>
Gain Ki 1 OL>Motor-voltage control
00.004
Deceleration 00.041 L1 L2 L3 Drive
Rate 1 Frequency Control mode
Controller 05.004
00.028 03.012 Differential 00.042
Ramp Mode Feedback
Select Estimated Low Frequency
Gain Kd 1 Motor Voltage Boost
Speed _ +
00.032
Dynamic V/f
Motor Rpm Select
05.004
Power stage _ +
00.037 Maximum Switching
Frequency
05.001 Output Frequency
RFC-A Current
Torque Magnitude
Producing 04.002 04.001
_
Current U V W + BR
Magnetising
Current
Resistor
optional

Issue Number: 7
6.2 Parameter descriptions

6.2.1 Pr mm.000
Pr mm.000 is available in all menus, commonly used functions are provided as text strings in Pr mm.000 shown in Table 6-1. The functions in Table
6-1 can also be selected by entering the appropriate numeric values (as shown in Table 6-2) in Pr mm.000. For example, enter 4001 in Pr mm.000 to
store drive parameters on an NV media card.
Table 6-1 Commonly used functions in xx.000
Value Equivalent value String Action

0 0 None No action
1000 1 SAVE Save drive parameters to non-volatile memory
6001 2 read1 Load the data from file 1 on a non-volatile media card into the drive provided it is a
parameter file
4001 3 SAVE1 Store the drive parameters in file 1 on a non-volatile media card
parameter file
parameter file
12000 8 diff.d Only display parameters that are different from their default value
12001 9 dest Only display parameters that are used to set-up destinations
1233 10 def.50 Load 50 Hz defaults
1244 11 def.60 Load 60 Hz defaults
1070 12 rst.opt Reset all option modules
Table 6-2 Functions in Pr mm.000

Value Action
1000 Save parameters when Under Voltage Active (Pr 10.016) is not active.
1001 Save parameter under all conditions
1070 Reset option module
1233 Load standard (50 Hz) defaults
1234 Load standard (50 Hz) defaults to all menus except option module menu 15
1244 Load US (60 Hz) defaults
1245 Load US (60 Hz) defaults to all menus except option module menu 15
1299 Reset {St.HF} trip.
2001* Create a boot file on a non-volatile media card based on the present drive parameters including all Menu 20 parameters
4yyy* NV media card: Transfer the drive parameters to parameter file yyy
6yyy* NV media card: Load the drive parameters from parameter file yyy
7yyy* NV media card: Erase file yyy
8yyy* NV Media card: Compare the data in the drive with file yyy
9555* NV media card: Clear the warning suppression flag
9666* NV media card: Set the warning suppression flag
9777* NV media card: Clear the read-only flag
9888* NV media card: Set the read-only flag
12000** Only display parameters that are different from their default value. This action does not require a drive reset.
12001** Only display parameters that are used to set-up destinations (i.e. DE format bit is 1). This action does not require a drive reset.
Backup all drive data (parameter differences from defaults, and miscellaneous option data), including the drive name; the store will
40yyy occur to the </fs/MCDF/driveyyy/> folder; if it does not exist, it will be created. Since the name is stored, this is a backup, rather than
a clone. The command code will be cleared when all drive and option data have been saved.
Load all drive data (parameter differences from defaults, and miscellaneous option data); the load will come from the </fs/MCDF/
60yyy
driveyyy/> folder. The command code will not be cleared until the drive and all option data have been loaded.
* See Chapter 9 NV Media Card on page 101 for more information on these functions.
** These functions do not require a drive reset to become active.
All other functions require a drive reset to initiate the function. Equivalent values and strings are also provided in the table above.

Issue Number: 7
7 Running the motor 7.2 Changing the operating mode

Procedure
This chapter takes the new user through all the essential steps to Use the following procedure only if a different operating mode is
running a motor for the first time, in each of the possible operating required:
modes.
1. Ensure that the drive is not enabled, i.e. terminal 31 & 34 is open
For information on tuning the drive for the best performance, see open or Pr 06.015 is OFF(0).
Chapter 8 Optimization on page 93.
2. Change the setting of Pr 00.079 as follows:
Pr 00.079 setting Operating mode
Ensure that no damage or safety hazard could arise from the
motor starting unexpectedly.  1 Open-loop
WARNING  2 RFC-A
The values of the motor parameters affect the protection of The figures in the second column apply when serial communications are
the motor. used.
The default values in the drive should not be relied upon.
3. Either:
It is essential that the correct value is entered in Pr 00.006
CAUTION
Motor Rated Current. This affects the thermal protection of • Press the red reset button
the motor. • Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting
Pr 10.038 to 100 (ensure that Pr. mm.000 returns to 0).
If the drive is started using the keypad it will run to the speed
NOTE
defined by the keypad reference (Pr 01.017). This may not
be acceptable depending on the application. The user must When the operating mode is changed, a parameter save is carried out.
check in Pr 01.017 and ensure that the keypad reference
CAUTION has been set to 0.
If the intended maximum speed affects the safety of the

machinery, additional independent over-speed protection
must be used.
WARNING
7.1 Quick start connections

7.1.1 Basic requirements
This section shows the basic connections which must be made for the
drive to run in the required mode. For minimal parameter settings to run
in each mode please see the relevant part of section 7.3 Quick start
commissioning / start-up on page 91.
Table 7-1 Minimum control connection requirements for each
control mode
Drive control method Requirements
Drive enable
Terminal mode Speed / Torque reference
Run forward / Run reverse
Keypad mode Drive enable
Drive enable
Serial communications
Serial communications link
Table 7-2 Minimum control connection requirements for each

mode of operation
Operating mode Requirements

Open loop mode Induction motor
RFC – A mode Induction motor without speed
(without speed feedback) feedback

Issue Number: 7
Figure 7-1 Minimum connections to get the motor running in any operating mode (size 1 to 4)
0V
1 Frequency
2 Reference
4 input
5 +10 V T
7
e
9
24 V r
10 m
11 i
12 Run FWD n
13 Run REV a
14 l
M
31 STO1 K o
32 e d
0V y
33 e
34 STO2 p
L1 L2 L3 U V W a
+ BR d
M
1 Braking resistor o
(optional)
d
e
1 Thermal overload for braking resistor to protect

U V W against fire risk. This must be wired to interrupt the
Fuses AC supply in the event of a fault.
Induction motor
L1 L2 L3

Issue Number: 7
Figure 7-2 Minimum connections to get the motor running in any operating mode (size 5)
Braking resistor
! (optional)
+ _ BR
0V
1 Frequency
2 Reference
4 input
5 +10 V T
7
e
9 24 V r
10 m
11 i
12 Run FWD n
13 Run REV a
14 l
M
31 STO1 K o
32 e d
0V y
33 e
34 STO2 p
a
d
M
o
L1 L2 L3 d
e
U V W

against fire risk. This must be wired to interrupt the
AC supply in the event of a fault.
U V W
Fuses
Open loop
RFC-A L1 L2 L3
Sensorless

Issue Number: 7
Figure 7-3 Minimum connections to get the motor running in any operating mode (size 6)
Braking resistor
! (optional)
_
+ BR
0V
1 Frequency
2 Reference
4 input
5 +10 V T
7
e
9 24 V r
10 m
11 i
12 Run FWD n
13 Run REV a
14 l
M
31 STO1 K o
32 e d
0V y
33 e
34 STO2 p
a
d
M
L1 L2 L3 U V W o
d
e

against fire risk. This must be wired to interrupt the
U V W AC supply in the event of a fault.
Fuses
Open loop
L1 L2 L3
RFC-A
Sensorless

Issue Number: 7
7.3 Quick start commissioning / start-up

7.3.1 Open loop
Action Detail
Ensure:
• The drive enable signal is not given (terminals 31 & 34)
Before power-up
• Run signal is not given
• Motor is connected
Verify that open loop mode is displayed as the drive powers up.
If the mode is incorrect see section 5.6 Changing the operating mode on page 80.
Power-up the drive Ensure:
• Drive displays ‘inh’
If the drive trips, see section 12 Diagnostics on page 185.
Enter:
• Motor rated frequency in Pr 00.039 (Hz) Mot X XXXXXXXXX
Enter motor • Motor rated current in Pr 00.006 (A)
No XXXXXXXXXX kg
IP55 I.cl F °C 40 s S1
nameplate details • Motor rated speed in Pr 00.007 (rpm) V
-1
Hz min kW cosφ A
230 50 1445 2.20 0.80 8.50
• Motor rated voltage in Pr 00.008 (V) - check if or connection 400
CN = 14.5Nm
4.90
I.E.C 34 1(87)
240 50 1445 2.20 0.76 8.50
415 4.90
CN = 14.4Nm
CTP- VEN 1PHASE 1=0,46A P=110W R.F 32MN
0.02
Set maximum Enter:
frequency • Maximum frequency in Pr 00.002 (Hz)
Enter:
100Hz
• Acceleration rate in Pr 00.003 (s/100 Hz)
Set acceleration /
• Deceleration rate in Pr 00.004 (s/100 Hz) (If braking resistor installed, set Pr 00.028 = FAST. Also
deceleration rates
ensure Pr 10.030 and Pr 10.031 and Pr 10.061 are set correctly, otherwise premature ‘It.br’ trips
may be seen).
t
0.03 0.04
The drive is able to perform either a stationary or a rotating autotune. The motor must be at a standstill
before an autotune is enabled. A rotating autotune should be used whenever possible so the measured
value of power factor of the motor is used by the drive.
A rotating autotune will cause the motor to accelerate up to 2/3 base speed in the direction
selected regardless of the reference provided. Once complete the motor will coast to a
stop. The enable signal must be removed before the drive can be made to run at the
required reference.
WARNING The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the run signal or removing the drive
cos ∅
enable.
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to uncouple the
load from the motor shaft. A stationary autotune measures the stator resistance of the motor and
Autotune the dead time compensation for the drive. These are required for good performance in vector
control modes. A stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the motor so the value
on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr 00.009. RS
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is uncoupled. A rotating autotune first performs σLS
a stationary autotune before rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the direction selected. The
rotating autotune measures the power factor of the motor.
To perform an autotune:
• Set Pr 00.038 = 1 for a stationary autotune or set Pr 00.038 = 2 for a rotating autotune
• Close the Drive Enable signal (apply +24 V to terminal 31 & 34). The drive will display ’rdy’.
• Close the run signal (apply +24 V to terminal 12 or 13). The display will flash ’tuning’ while the drive
is performing the autotune.
• Wait for the drive to display ‘inh’ and for the motor to come to a standstill.
If the drive trips, see Chapter 12 Diagnostics on page 185.
• Remove the drive enable and run signal from the drive.
Save parameters Select 'Save' in Pr mm.000 (alternatively enter a value of 1000 in Pr mm.000) and press the red
reset button.
Run Drive is now ready to run

Issue Number: 7
7.3.2 RFC - A mode (without position feedback)

Induction motor without position feedback
Action Detail
Ensure:
Before power-up • The drive enable signal is not given (terminal 31 & 34)
• Run signal is not given
Verify that RFC-A mode is displayed as the drive powers up.
If the mode is incorrect see section 5.6 Changing the operating mode on page 80.
Power-up the
Ensure:
drive
• Drive displays ‘inh’
Enter:
Enter motor • Motor rated frequency in Pr 00.039 (Hz)
nameplate • Motor rated current in Pr 00.006 (A) Mot X XXXXXXXXX
No XXXXXXXXXX kg
• Motor rated speed in Pr 00.007 (rpm)

IP55 I.cl F °C 40 s S1
details V Hz min-1 kW cosφ

230 50 1445 2.20 0.80
400
A
8.50
4.90
CN = 14.5Nm
• Motor rated voltage in Pr 00.008 (V) - check if or connection
I.E.C 34 1(87)
240 50 1445 2.20 0.76 8.50
415 4.90
CN = 14.4Nm
CTP- VEN 1PHASE 1=0,46A P=110W R.F 32MN
0.02
Set maximum Enter:
frequency • Maximum frequency in Pr 00.002 (Hz)
t
Enter:
Set acceleration / 1000rpm
• Acceleration rate in Pr 00.003 (s/100 Hz)
deceleration
• Deceleration rate in Pr 00.004 (s/100 Hz) (If braking resistor installed, set Pr 00.028 = FAST. Also ensure
rates
Pr 10.030, Pr 10.031 and Pr 10.061 are set correctly, otherwise premature ‘It.br’ trips may be seen). 0.03 0.04
t
The drive is able to perform either a stationary or a rotating autotune. The motor must be at a standstill before
an autotune is enabled. A stationary autotune will give moderate performance whereas a rotating autotune will
give improved performance as it measures the actual values of the motor parameters required by the drive.
A rotating autotune will cause the motor to accelerate up to 2/3 base speed in the direction selected
regardless of the reference provided. Once complete the motor will coast to a stop. The enable signal
must be removed before the drive can be made to run at the required reference.
WARNING The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the run signal or removing the drive enable.
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to uncouple the load
cos ∅
from the motor shaft. The stationary autotune measures the stator resistance and transient inductance of
the motor. These are used to calculate the current loop gains, and at the end of the test the values in
Autotune Pr 04.013 and Pr 04.014 are updated. A stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the
motor so the value on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr 00.009.
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is uncoupled. A rotating autotune first performs a
RS
stationary autotune before rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the direction selected. The rotating σLS
LS
autotune measures the stator inductance of the motor and calculates the power factor.
To perform an autotune: T saturation
Nm break-
• Set Pr 00.038 = 1 for a stationary autotune or set Pr 00.038 = 2 for a rotating autotune points
• Close the drive enable signal (apply +24 V terminal 31 & 34). The drive will display ’rdy’.
N rpm
• Close the run signal (apply +24 V terminal 12 or 13). The display will flash ‘tuning’ while the drive is
performing the autotune.
• Wait for the drive to display ’inh’ and for the motor to come to a standstill
• Remove the drive enable and run signal from the drive.
Save parameters Select 'Save' in Pr mm.000 (alternatively enter a value of 1000 in Pr mm.000) and press red reset button.
Run The drive is now ready to run

Issue Number: 7
8 Optimization
This chapter takes the user through methods of optimizing the drive set-up and maximize the performance. The auto-tuning features of the drive
simplify the optimization tasks.
8.1 Motor map parameters

8.1.1 Open loop motor control
Pr 00.006 {05.007} Motor Rated Current Defines the maximum continuous motor current
• The rated current parameter must be set to the maximum continuous current of the motor. The motor rated current is used in the following:
• Current limits (see section section 8.3 Current limits on page 99, for more information)
• Motor thermal overload protection (see section section 8.4 Motor thermal protection on page 99, for more information)
• Vector mode voltage control (see Control Mode later in this table)
• Slip compensation (see Enable Slip Compensation (05.027), later in this table)
• Dynamic V/F control
Pr 00.008 {05.009} Motor Rated Voltage Defines the voltage applied to the motor at rated frequency
Pr 00.039 {05.006} Motor Rated Frequency Defines the frequency at which rated voltage is applied
The Motor Rated Voltage (00.008) and the Motor Rated Frequency (00.039) are used to define the voltage to frequency characteristic applied to the
motor (see Control Mode, later in this table). The Motor Rated Frequency is also used in conjunction with the motor rated speed to calculate the
rated slip for slip compensation (see Motor Rated Speed, later in this table).
Output voltage characteristic

Output
voltage
Pr 00.008
Pr 00.008 / 2
Pr 00.039 / 2 Pr 00.039 Output

frequency
Pr 00.007 {05.008} Motor Rated Speed Defines the full load rated speed of the motor
Pr 00.040 {05.011} Number of Motor Poles Defines the number of motor poles
The motor rated speed and the number of poles are used with the motor rated frequency to calculate the rated slip of induction machines in Hz.
00.040 00.007
Rated slip (Hz) = Motor rated frequency - (Number of pole pairs x [Motor rated speed / 60]) = 00.039 = ⎛ ------------------ × ------------------⎞
⎝ 2 60 ⎠
If Pr 00.007 is set to 0 or to synchronous speed, slip compensation is disabled. If slip compensation is required this parameter should be set to the
nameplate value, which should give the correct rpm for a hot machine. Sometimes it will be necessary to adjust this when the drive is commissioned
because the nameplate value may be inaccurate. Slip compensation will operate correctly both below base speed and within the field-weakening
region. Slip compensation is normally used to correct for the motor speed to prevent speed variation with load. The rated load rpm can be set higher
than synchronous speed to deliberately introduce speed droop. This can be useful to aid load sharing with mechanically coupled motors.
Pr 00.040 is also used in the calculation of the motor speed display by the drive for a given output frequency. When Pr 00.040 is set to ‘Auto’, the
number of motor poles is automatically calculated from the rated frequency Pr 00.039, and the motor rated speed Pr 00.007.
Number of poles = 120 x (Rated Frequency (00.039) / Rated Speed (00.007)) rounded to the nearest even number.
Pr 00.043 {05.010} Motor Rated Power Factor Defines the angle between the motor voltage and current
The power factor is the true power factor of the motor, i.e. the angle between the motor voltage and current. The power factor is used in conjunction
with the Motor Rated Current (00.006), to calculate the rated active current and magnetising current of the motor. The rated active current is used
extensively to control the drive, and the magnetising current is used in vector mode stator resistance compensation. It is important that this
parameter is set up correctly. The drive can measure the motor rated power factor by performing a rotating autotune (see Autotune (Pr 00.038),
below).

Issue Number: 7
Pr 00.038 {05.012} Auto-tune

There are two autotune tests available in open loop mode, a stationary and a rotating test. A rotating autotune should be used whenever possible so
the measured value of power factor of the motor is used by the drive.
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to remove the load from the motor shaft. The stationary test
measures the Stator Resistance (05.017), Transient Inductance (05.024), Maximum Deadtime Compensation (05.059) and Current At
Maximum Deadtime Compensation (05.060) which are required for good performance in vector control modes (see Control Mode later in this
table). The stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the motor so the value on the motor nameplate must be entered into
Pr 00.009. To perform a Stationary autotune, set Pr 00.038 to 1, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminals 31 & 34) and a
run signal (on terminals 12 or 13).
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is unloaded. A rotating autotune first performs a stationary autotune, as above, then a
rotating test is performed in which the motor is accelerated with currently selected ramps up to a frequency of Motor Rated Frequency (05.006)
x 2/3, and the frequency is maintained at that level for 4 seconds. Stator Inductance (05.025) is measured and this value is used in conjunction
with other motor parameters to calculate Motor Rated Power Factor (05.010). To perform a Rotating autotune, set Pr 00.038 to 2, and provide
the drive with both an enable signal (on terminals 31 & 34) and a run signal (on terminals 12 or 13).
Following the completion of an autotune test the drive will go into the inhibit state. The drive must be placed into a controlled disable condition
before the drive can be made to run at the required reference. The drive can be put in to a controlled disable condition by removing the SAFE
TORQUE OFF signal from terminals 31 & 34, setting the Drive Enable (06.015) to OFF (0) or disabling the drive via the Control Word (06.042) and
Control Word Enable (06.043).
Pr 00.041 {05.014} Control Mode

There are several voltage modes available which fall into two categories, vector control and fixed boost.
Vector control
Vector control mode provides the motor with a linear voltage characteristic from 0 Hz to Motor Rated Frequency, and then a constant voltage above
motor rated frequency. When the drive operates between motor rated frequency/50 and motor rated frequency/4, full vector based stator resistance
compensation is applied. When the drive operates between motor rated frequency/4 and motor rated frequency/2 the stator resistance
compensation is gradually reduced to zero as the frequency increases. For the vector modes to operate correctly the Motor Rated Power Factor,
Stator Resistance (05.017), Maximum Deadtime Compensation (05.059) and current at Maximum Deadtime Compensation (05.060) are all required
to be set up accurately. The drive can be made to measure these by performing an autotune (see Pr 00.038 Autotune). The drive can also be made
to measure the stator resistance automatically every time the drive is enabled or the first time the drive is enabled after it is powered up, by selecting
one of the vector control voltage modes.
(0) Ur S = The stator resistance is measured and the parameters for the selected motor map are over-written each time the drive is made to
run. This test can only be done with a stationary motor where the flux has decayed to zero. Therefore this mode should only be used if the motor
is guaranteed to be stationary each time the drive is made to run. To prevent the test from being done before the flux has decayed there is a
period of 1 second after the drive has been in the ready state during which the test is not done if the drive is made to run again. In this case,
previously measured values are used. Ur S mode ensures that the drive compensates for any change in motor parameters due to changes in
temperature. The new value of stator resistance is not automatically saved to the drive's EEPROM.
(4) Ur I = The stator resistance is measured when the drive is first made to run after each power-up. This test can only be done with a stationary
motor. Therefore this mode should only be used if the motor is guaranteed to be stationary the first time the drive is made to run after each
power-up. The new value of stator resistance is not automatically saved to the drive's EEPROM.
(1) Ur = The stator resistance and voltage offset are not measured. The user can enter the motor and cabling resistance into the Stator
Resistance (05.017). However this will not include resistance effects within the drive inverter. Therefore if this mode is to be used, it is best to
use an autotune test initially to measure the stator resistance.
(3) Ur_Auto= The stator resistance is measured once, the first time the drive is made to run. After the test has been completed successfully the
Control Mode (00.041) is changed to Ur mode. The Stator Resistance (05.017) parameter is written to, and along with the Control Mode
(00.041), are saved in the drive's EEPROM. If the test fails, the voltage mode will stay set to Ur Auto and the test will be repeated next time the
drive is made to run.
Fixed boost
The stator resistance is not used in the control of the motor, instead a fixed characteristic with low frequency voltage boost as defined by Pr 00.042,
is used. Fixed boost mode should be used when the drive is controlling multiple motors. There are two settings of fixed boost available:
(2) Fixed = This mode provides the motor with a linear voltage characteristic from 0 Hz to Motor Rated Frequency (00.039), and then a constant
voltage above rated frequency.
(5) Square = This mode provides the motor with a square law voltage characteristic from 0 Hz to Motor Rated Frequency (00.039), and then a
constant voltage above rated frequency. This mode is suitable for variable torque applications like fans and pumps where the load is
proportional to the square of the speed of the motor shaft. This mode should not be used if a high starting torque is required.

Issue Number: 7
Pr 00.041 {05.014} Control Mode (cont)
For both these modes, at low frequencies (from 0 Hz to ½ x Pr 00.039) a voltage boost is applied as defined by Pr 00.042 as shown below:

Output
voltage
(Fd)
Pr 00.008
Pr 00.008
Pr 00.008 / 2
Voltage boost
Pr 00.042
Output Pr 00.042
Pr 00.039 / 2 Pr 00.039
frequency
Pr 00.039
Pr 05.027 Enable Slip Compensation

When a motor, being controlled in open loop mode, has load applied a characteristic of the motor is that the output speed droops in proportion to the
load applied as shown:
Demanded speed
Shaft speed
Load
In order to prevent the speed droop shown above slip compensation should be enabled. To enable slip compensation Pr 05.027 must be set to a 1
(this is the default setting), and the motor rated speed must be entered in Pr 00.007 (Pr 05.008).
The motor rated speed parameter should be set to the synchronous speed of the motor minus the slip speed. This is normally displayed on the
motor nameplate, i.e. for a typical 18.5 kW, 50 Hz, 4 pole motor, the motor rated speed would be approximately 1465 rpm. The synchronous speed
for a 50 Hz, 4 pole motor is 1500 rpm, so therefore the slip speed would be 35 rpm. If the synchronous speed is entered in Pr 00.007, slip
compensation will be disabled. If too small a value is entered in Pr 00.007, the motor will run faster than the demanded frequency. The synchronous
speeds for 50 Hz motors with different numbers of poles are as follows:
2 pole = 3000 rpm, 4 pole = 1500 rpm, 6pole =1000 rpm, 8 pole = 750 rpm

Issue Number: 7
8.1.2 RFC-A mode

Induction motor without Position feedback
Pr 00.006 {05.007} Motor Rated Current Defines the maximum motor continuous current
The motor rated current parameter must be set to the maximum continuous current of the motor. The motor rated current is used in the following:
• Current limits (see section 8.3 Current limits on page 99, for more information).
• Motor thermal overload protection (see section 8.4 Motor thermal protection on page 99, for more information)
• Vector control algorithm
Pr 00.008 {05.009} Motor Rated Voltage Defines the voltage applied to the motor at rated frequency
Pr 00.039 {05.006} Motor Rated Frequency Defines the frequency at which rated voltage is applied
The Motor Rated Voltage (00.008) and the Motor Rated Frequency
(Pr 00.039) are used to define the voltage to frequency characteristic Output
voltage
applied to the motor (see Control Mode (00.041), later in this table). The
motor rated frequency is also used in conjunction with the motor rated Pr 00.008
speed to calculate the rated slip for slip compensation (see Motor Rated
Speed (00.007), later in this table).
Pr 00.008 / 2
Pr 00.039 / 2 Pr 00.039 Output

frequency
Pr 00.007 {05.008} Motor Rated Speed Defines the full load rated speed of the motor
Pr 00.040 {05.011} Number of Motor Poles Defines the number of motor poles
The motor rated speed and motor rated frequency are used to determine the full load slip of the motor which is used by the vector control algorithm.
Incorrect setting of this parameter has the following effects:
• Reduced efficiency of motor operation
• Reduction of maximum torque available from the motor
• Reduced transient performance
• Inaccurate control of absolute torque in torque control modes
The nameplate value is normally the value for a hot motor; however, some adjustment may be required when the drive is commissioned if the
nameplate value is inaccurate. A fixed value can be entered in this parameter.
When Pr 00.040 is set to 'Auto', the number of motor poles is automatically calculated from the Motor Rated Frequency (00.039), and the Motor
Rated Speed (00.007).
Number of poles = 120 x (Motor Rated Frequency (00.039 / Motor Rated Speed (00.007) rounded to the nearest even number.
Pr 00.009 {5.10} Motor Rated Power Factor Defines the angle between the motor voltage and current
The power factor is the true power factor of the motor, i.e. the angle between the motor voltage and current. If the Stator Inductance (05.025) is set
to zero then the power factor is used in conjunction with the Motor Rated Current (00.006) and other motor parameters to calculate the rated active
and magnetising currents of the motor, which are used in the vector control algorithm. If the stator inductance has a non-zero value this parameter
is not used by the drive, but is continuously written with a calculated value of power factor. The stator inductance can be measured by the drive by
performing a rotating autotune (see Autotune (Pr 00.038), later in this table).

Issue Number: 7
Pr 00.038 {05.012} Autotune

There are three autotune tests available in RFC-A mode, a stationary test, a rotating test and an inertia measurement test. A stationary autotune will
give moderate performance whereas a rotating autotune will give improved performance as it measures the actual values of the motor parameters
required by the drive. An inertia measurement test should be performed separately to a stationary or rotating autotune.
NOTE
It is highly recommended that a rotating autotune is performed (Pr 00.038 set to 2).
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to remove the load from the motor shaft. The stationary
autotune measures the Stator Resistance (05.017) and Transient Inductance (05.024) of the motor. These are used to calculate the current loop
gains, and at the end of the test the values in Pr 04.013 and Pr 04.014 are updated. A stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of
the motor so the value on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr 00.009. To perform a Stationary autotune, set Pr 00.038 to 1, and
provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31 & 34) and a run signal (on terminal 12 or 13).
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is unloaded. A rotating autotune first performs a stationary autotune, a rotating test is then
performed which the motor is accelerated with currently selected ramps up to a frequency of Motor Rated Frequency (05.006) x 2/3, and the
frequency is maintained at the level for up to 40 s. During the rotating autotune the Stator Inductance (05.025), and the motor saturation
breakpoints (Pr 05.029, Pr 05.030, Pr 05.062 and Pr 05.063) are modified by the drive. The power factor is also modified for user information
only, but is not used after this point as the stator inductance is used in the vector control algorithm instead. To perform a Rotating autotune, set
Pr 00.038 to 2, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31 & 32) and a run signal (on terminal 12 or 13).
• The inertia measurement test can measure the total inertia of the load and the motor. This is used to set the speed loop gains (see Frequency
loop gains) and to provide torque feed-forwards when required during acceleration. During the inertia measurement test motor is accelerated
with the currently selected ramps up to a speed of Motor Rated Speed (05.008) / 4, and this speed is maintained at this level for 60 seconds.
The Motor And Load Inertia (03.018) is measured. If the required speed is not achieved on the final attempt the test is aborted and an Autotune
trip is initiated. To perform an Inertia measurement autotune, set Pr 00.038 to 3, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31
& 34) and a run signal (on terminal 12 or 13). Following the completion of an autotune test the drive will go into the inhibit state. The drive must
be placed into a controlled disable condition before the drive can be made to run at the required reference. The drive can be put in to a
controlled disable condition by removing the SAFE TORQUE OFF signal from terminal 31 & 34, setting the Drive Enable (06.015) to OFF (0) or
disabling the drive via the control word (Pr 06.042 & Pr 06.043).
{04.013} / {04.014} Current Loop Gains
The current loop gains proportional (Kp) and integral (Ki) gains control the response of the current loop to a change in current (torque) demand. The
default values give satisfactory operation with most motors. However, for optimal performance in dynamic applications it may be necessary to
change the gains to improve the performance. The Current Controller Kp Gain (04.013) is the most critical value in controlling the performance. The
values for the current loop gains can be calculated by performing a stationary or rotating autotune (see Autotune Pr 00.038, earlier in this table) the
drive measures the Stator Resistance (05.017) and Transient Inductance (05.024) of the motor and calculates the current loop gains.
This will give a step response with minimum overshoot after a step change of current reference. The proportional gain can be increased by a factor
of 1.5 giving a similar increase in bandwidth; however, this gives a step response with approximately 12.5 % overshoot. The equation for the integral
gain gives a conservative value. In some applications where it is necessary for the reference frame used by the drive to dynamically follow the flux
very closely (i.e. high speed Sensorless RFC-A induction motor applications) the integral gain may need to have a significantly higher value.

Issue Number: 7
Frequency Loop Gains

(00.065 {03.010}, Pr 00.066 {03.011}
The frequency loop gains control the response of the frequency controller to a change in frequency demand. The frequency controller includes
proportional (Kp) and integral (Ki) feed forward terms, and a differential (Kd) feedback term. The drive holds two sets of these gains and either set
may be selected for use by the frequency controller with Pr 03.016. If Pr 03.016 = 0, gains Kp1, Ki1 and Kd1 (Pr 03.010 to Pr 03.012) are used, and
if Pr 03.016 = 1, gains Kp2, Ki2 and Kd2 (Pr 03.013 to Pr 03.015) are used. Pr 03.016 may be changed when the drive is enabled or disabled.
Frequency Controller Proportional Gain (Kp), Pr 00.007 {03.010} and Pr 03.013
If the proportional gain has a value and the integral gain is set to zero the controller will only have a proportional term, and there must be a
frequency error to produce a torque reference. Therefore as the motor load increases there will be a difference between the reference and actual
frequencies. This effect, called regulation, depends on the level of the proportional gain, the higher the gain the smaller the frequency error for a
given load. If the proportional gain is too high either the acoustic noise produced by numerical quantization becomes unacceptable, or the stability
limit is reached.
Frequency Controller Integral Gain (Ki), Pr 00.008 {03.011} and Pr 03.014
The integral gain is provided to prevent frequency regulation. The error is accumulated over a period of time and used to produce the necessary
torque demand without any frequency error. Increasing the integral gain reduces the time taken for the frequency to reach the correct level and
increases the stiffness of the system, i.e. it reduces the positional displacement produced by applying a load torque to the motor. Unfortunately
increasing the integral gain also reduces the system damping giving overshoot after a transient. For a given integral gain, the damping can be
improved by increasing the proportional gain. A compromise must be reached where the system response, stiffness and damping are all adequate
for the application. For RFC-A Sensorless mode, it is unlikely that the integral gain can be increased much above 0.50.
Differential Gain (Kd), Pr 03.012 and Pr 03.015
The differential gain is provided in the feedback of the frequency controller to give additional damping. The differential term is implemented in a way
that does not introduce excessive noise normally associated with this type of function. Increasing the differential term reduces the overshoot
produced by under-damping, however, for most applications the proportional and integral gains alone are sufficient.
Gain Change Threshold, Pr 03.017
If the Frequency Controller Gain Select (03.016) = 2, gains Kp1, Ki1 and Kd1 (Pr 03.010 to Pr 03.012) are used while the modulus of the frequency
demand is less than the value held by Gain Change Threshold (03.017), else gains Kp2, Ki2 and Kd2 (Pr 03.013 to Pr 03.015) will be used.
Tuning the frequency loop gains:
This involves the connecting of an oscilloscope to analog output 1 to Frequency demand

monitor the frequency feedback.
Give the drive a step change in frequency reference and monitor the
response of the drive on the oscilloscope.
The proportional gain (Kp) should be set up initially. The value
should be increased up to the point where the frequency overshoots Insufficient proportional
and then reduced slightly. gain [00.065]
The integral gain (Ki) should then be increased up to the point where
the frequency becomes unstable and then reduced slightly.
It may now be possible to increase the proportional gain to a higher
value and the process should be repeated until the system response
approaches the ideal response as shown. Excessive proportional
gain [00.065]
The diagram shows the effect of incorrect P and I gain settings as
well as the ideal response.
Excessive integral gain

[00.066]
Ideal response

Issue Number: 7
8.2 Maximum motor rated current Figure 8-1 Motor thermal protection (Heavy Duty)
Size 1 to 4:
1.05
The maximum motor rated current is the Maximum Heavy Duty Current 1.00
Rating (11.032).
0.70 Pr 04.025 = 0
The values for the Heavy Duty rating can be found in section Pr 04.025 = 1
2.2 Ratings on page 12. K
Size 5 onwards:
The maximum motor rated current allowed by the drive is greater than
the Maximum Heavy Duty Current Rating (11.032). The ratio between
the Normal Duty rating and the Maximum Heavy Duty Current Rating 0.00
(11.032) varies between drive sizes. The values for the Normal and
Heavy Duty rating can be found in section 2.2 Ratings on page 12. If the 50% of base Base speed/
Motor Rated Current (00.006) is set above the Maximum Heavy Duty speed/frequency frequency
Current Rating (11.032), the current limits and the motor thermal
If Pr 04.025 is 0 the characteristic is for a motor which can operate at
protection scheme are modified (see section 8.3 Current limits and
rated current over the whole speed range. Induction motors with this
section 8.4 Motor thermal protection below for further information).
type of characteristic normally have forced cooling. If Pr 04.025 is 1 the
characteristic is intended for motors where the cooling effect of motor
8.3 Current limits fan reduces with reduced motor speed below 50 % of base speed/
The default setting for the current limit parameters is: frequency. The maximum value for K1 is 1.05, so that above the knee of
• 165 % x motor rated current for open loop mode. the characteristics the motor can operate continuously up to 105 %
• 175 % x motor rated current for RFC-A mode. current.
Figure 8-2 Motor thermal protection (Normal Duty)

There are three parameters which control the current limits:
• Motoring current limit: power flowing from the drive to the motor
1.00 1.01
• Regen current limit: power flowing from the motor to the drive
• Symmetrical current limit: current limit for both motoring and regen
operation 0.70 Pr 04.025 = 0
Pr 04.025 = 1
K
The lowest of either the motoring and regen current limit, or the
symmetrical current limit applies.
The maximum setting of these parameters depends on the values of
motor rated current, drive rated current and the power factor. 0.00
With size 5 upwards, increasing the motor rated current (Pr 00.006 /
Pr 05.007) above the Heavy Duty rating (default value), will 15% of 50% of Base speed/
automatically reduce the current limits in Pr 04.005 to Pr 04.007. If the base speed/ base speed/ frequency
frequency frequency
motor rated current is then set to or below the Heavy Duty rating, the
current limits will be left at their reduced values.
Both settings of Pr 04.025 are intended for motors where the cooling
The drive can be oversized to permit a higher current limit setting to effect of the motor fan reduces with reduced motor speed, but with
provide higher accelerating torque as required up to a maximum of different speeds below which the cooling effect is reduced. If Pr 04.025
1000 %. is 0 the characteristic is intended for motors where the cooling effect
reduces with motor speed below 15 % of base speed/frequency. If
Pr 04.025 is 1 the characteristic is intended for motors where the cooling
8.4 Motor thermal protection effect reduces with motor speed below 50 % of base speed/frequency.
The maximum value for K1 is 1.01, so that above the knee of the
A time constant thermal model is provided to estimate the motor
characteristics the motor can operate continuously up to 101 % current.
temperature as a percentage of its maximum allowed temperature.
When the estimated temperature in Pr 04.019 reaches 100 % the drive
The motor thermal protection is modelled using losses in the motor. The
takes some action depending on the setting of Pr 04.016. If Pr 04.016 is
losses in the motor are calculated as a percentage value, so that under
0, the drive trips when Pr 04.019 reaches 100 %. If Pr 04.016 is 1, the
these conditions the Motor Protection Accumulator (04.019) would
current limit is reduced to (K - 0.05) x 100 % when Pr 04.019 reaches
eventually reach 100 %.
100 %.
Percentage losses = 100 % x [Load related losses]
The current limit is set back to the user defined level when Pr 04.019
Where: falls below 95 %. The thermal model temperature accumulator is reset
Load related losses = I / (K1 x IRated)2 to zero at power-up and accumulates the temperature of the motor while
the drive remains powered-up. If the rated current defined by Pr 05.007
Where: is altered, the accumulator is reset to zero.
I = Current Magnitude (04.001) The default setting of the thermal time constant (Pr 04.015) is 179 s
IRated = Motor Rated Current (05.007) which is equivalent to an overload of 150 % for 120 s from cold.
If Motor Rated Current (05.007) ≤ Maximum Heavy Duty Current

(11.032)

Issue Number: 7
8.5 Switching frequency motor. (In open loop mode the magnetizing current is not actively
controlled).
The default switching frequency is 3 kHz, however this can be increased
up to a maximum of 16 kHz by Pr 05.018 (dependent on drive size). The 8.5.2 Maximum frequency
available switching frequencies are shown below. In all operating modes the maximum output frequency is limited to 550
Hz.
Table 8-1 Available switching frequencies
Drive 0.667 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
8.5.3 Over-modulation (open-loop only)
Model The maximum output voltage level of the drive is normally limited to an
size kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz
1 to 6 All 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 equivalent of the drive input voltage minus voltage drops within the drive
(the drive will also retain a few percent of the voltage in order to maintain
If switching frequency is increased from 3 kHz the following apply: current control). If the motor rated voltage is set at the same level as the
1. Increased heat loss in the drive, which means that derating to the supply voltage, some pulse deletion will occur as the drive output voltage
output current must be applied. approaches the rated voltage level. If Pr 05.020 (Over-modulation
See the derating tables for switching frequency and ambient enable) is set to 1 the modulator will allow over modulation, so that as
temperature in section 11.1.1 Power and current ratings (Derating the output frequency increases beyond the rated frequency the voltage
for switching frequency and temperature) on page 165. continues to increase above the rated voltage. The modulation depth will
2. Reduced heating of the motor - due to improved output waveform increase beyond unity; first producing trapezoidal and then quasi-square
quality. waveforms.
3. Reduced acoustic noise generated by the motor. This can be used for example:
4. Increased sample rate on the speed and current controllers. A trade
• To obtain high output frequencies with a low switching frequency
off must be made between motor heating, drive heating and the
which would not be possible with space vector modulation limited to
demands of the application with respect to the sample time required. unity modulation depth,
Table 8-2 Sample rates for various control tasks at each or
switching frequency • In order to maintain a higher output voltage with a low supply
0.667 3, 6, 12 2, 4, 8, 16 voltage.
Open loop RFC-A
1 kHz kHz kHz The disadvantage is that the machine current will be distorted as the
2 kHz = 250 μs modulation depth increases above unity, and will contain a significant
4 kHz = 125 μs Current amount of low order odd harmonics of the fundamental output frequency.
Level 1 250 μs 167 μs Peak limit
8 kHz = 125 μs controllers The additional low order harmonics cause increased losses and heating
16 kHz = 125 μs
in the motor.
Speed
Current limit
Level 2 250 μs controller and
and ramps
ramps
Level 3 1 ms Voltage controller
Level 4 4 ms Time critical user interface
Non-time critical user
Background
interface
8.5.1 Field weakening (constant power) operation

The drive can be used to run an induction machine above synchronous
speed into the constant power region. The speed continues to increase
and the available shaft torque reduces. The characteristics below show
the torque and output voltage characteristics as the speed is increased
above the rated value.
Figure 8-3 Torque and rated voltage against speed
Torque
Speed
Rated
voltage
Rated speed Speed
Care must be taken to ensure the torque available above base speed is
sufficient for the application to run satisfactorily.
The saturation breakpoint parameters (Pr 05.029, Pr 05. 030, Pr 05.062
and Pr 05.063) found during the autotune in RFC-A mode ensure the
magnetizing current is reduced in the correct proportion for the specific

Issue Number: 7
9 NV Media Card 9.2.1 Changing the drive mode

If the source drive mode is different from the target drive mode then the
mode will be changed to the source drive mode before the parameters
9.1 Introduction are transferred. If the required drive mode is outside the allowed range
The Non-Volatile Media Card feature enables simple configuration of for the target then a {C.typ} trip is initiated and no data is transferred.
parameters, parameter back-up and drive cloning using an SD card.
9.2.2 Different voltage ratings
The SD card can be used for: If the voltage rating of the source and target drives is different then all
• Parameter copying between drives parameters except those that are rating dependent (i.e. attribute RA=1)
• Saving drive parameter sets are transferred to the target drive. The rating dependent parameters are
left at their default values. After the parameters have been transferred
The NV Media Card (SD card) is located in the AI-Backup adaptor. and saved to non-volatile memory a {C.rtg} trip is given as a warning.
The drive only communicates with the NV Media Card when The table below gives a list of the rating dependent parameters.
commanded to read or write, meaning the card may be "hot swapped".
Parameters
Figure 9-1 Installation of the SD card Standard Ramp Voltage (02.008)
Motoring Current Limit (04.005)
M2 Motoring Current Limit (21.027)
Regenerating Current Limit (04.006)
M2 Regenerating Current Limit (21.028)
Symmetrical Current Limit (04.007)
M2 Symmetrical Current Limit (21.029)
1 User Current Maximum Scaling (04.024)
Motor Rated Current (05.007)
M2 Motor Rated Current (21.007)
Motor Rated Voltage (05.009)
M2 Motor Rated Voltage (21.009)
1. Installing the SD card
Motor Rated Power Factor (05.010)
NOTE
M2 Motor Rated Power Factor (21.010)
A flat bladed screwdriver or similar tool is required in order to insert /
Stator Resistance (05.017)
remove the SD card fully into the AI-Backup adaptor.
M2 Stator Resistance (21.012)
Before inserting / removing the SD card into / from the AI-Backup
adaptor, the AI-Backup adaptor must be removed from the drive. Maximum Switching Frequency (05.018)
Transient Inductance /Ld (05.024)
M2 Transient Inductance /Ld (21.014)
9.2 SD card support Stator Inductance (05.025)
An SD memory card can be inserted in the AI-Backup adaptor in order to M2 Stator Inductance (21.024)
transfer data to the drive, however the following limitations should be Injection Braking Level (06.006)
noted: Supply Loss Detection Level (06.048)
If a parameter from the source drive does not exist in the target drive
then no data is transferred for that parameter. 9.2.3 Different option modules installed
If the data for the parameter in the target drive is out of range then the If the option module ID code (15.001) is different for any option module
data is limited to the range of the target parameter. installed to the source drive compared to the destination drive, then the
parameters for the set-up for that option module are not transferred, but
If the target drive has a different rating to the source drive then the
and are instead set to their default values. After the parameters have
normal rules for this type of transfer apply as described later.
been transferred and saved to non-volatile memory, a {C.OPt} trip is
No checking is possible to determine if the source and target product given as a warning.
types are the same, and so no warning is given if they are different.
If an SD card is used then the drive will recognise the following file types
through the drive parameter interface.
File Type Description
A file that contains all copied user save
Parameter file parameters from the drive menus (1 to 30) in
difference from default format
The same as a parameter file, but defaults are not
Macro file loaded before the data is transferred from the
card
These files can be created on a card by the drive and then transferred to
any other drive including derivatives. If the Drive Derivative (11.028) is
different between the source and target drives then the data is
transferred but a {C.Pr} trip is initiated.
It is possible for other data to be stored on the card, but this should not
be stored in the <MCDF> folder and it will not be visible via the drive
parameter interface.

Issue Number: 7
9.2.4 Different current ratings The table below gives a summary of the values used in Pr mm.000 for
If any of the current rating parameters (Maximum Heavy Duty Rating NV media card operations. The yyy represents the file identification
(11.032), Maximum Rated Current (11.060) or Full Scale Current Kc number.
(11.061)) are different between the source and target then all parameters Table 9-1 Functions in Pr mm.000
are still written to the target drive, but some may be limited by their
Value Action
allowed range. To give similar performance in the target compared to the
source drive the frequency and current controller gains are modified as Transfer the drive parameters to parameter file 001 and sets
shown below. Note that this does not apply if the file identification the block as bootable.
2001
number is larger than 500. This will include the parameters from the attached option
module.
Gains Multiplier
Transfer the drive parameters to parameter file yyy. This will
Frequency Controller Proportional [Source Full Scale Current Kc 4yyy
include the parameters from attached option module.
Gain Kp1 (03.010) (11.061)] /
Transfer the onboard user program to onboard user program
Frequency Controller Integral Gain Ki1 [Target Full Scale Current Kc 5yyy
file yyy.
(03.011) (11.061)]
Load the drive parameters from parameter file yyy or the
6yyy
Frequency Controller Proportional onboard user program from onboard user program file yyy.
Gain Kp2 (03.013) 7yyy Erase file yyy.
Frequency Controller Integral Gain Ki2 Compare the data in the drive with the file yyy. The data in
(03.014) the drive is compared to the data in the file yyy. If the files are
M2 Frequency Controller Proportional the same then Pr mm.000 is simply reset to 0 when the
8yyy
Gain Kp (21.017) compare is complete. If the files are different a {Card
Compare} trip is initiated. All other NV media card trips also
M2 Frequency Controller Integral Gain
Ki (21.018) apply.
Current Controller Kp Gain (04.013) [Source Full Scale Current Kc 9555 Clear the warning suppression flag.
(11.061)] / 9666 Set the warning suppression flag.
Current Controller Ki Gain (04.014)
[Target Full Scale Current Kc 9777 Clear the read-only flag.
M2 Current Controller Kp Gain
(21.022) (11.061)] 9888 Set the read-only flag.
Backup all drive data (parameter differences from defaults,
M2 Current Controller Ki Gain (21.023)
an onboard user program and miscellaneous option data),
including the drive name; the store will occur to the </fs/
9.2.5 Different variable maximums
40yyy MCDF/driveyyy/> folder; if it does not exist, it will be created.
It should be noted that if ratings of the source and target drives are
Since the name is stored, this is a backup, rather than a
different, it is possible that some parameters with variable maximums
clone. The command value will be cleared when all drive and
may be limited and not have the same values as in the source drive.
option data has been saved.
9.2.6 Macro files Load all drive data (parameter differences from defaults, an
Macro files are created in the same way as parameter files except that onboard user program and miscellaneous option data); the
NV Media Card Create Special File (11.072) must be set to 1 before the 60yyy load will come from the <fs/MCDF/driveyyy/> folder. The
file is created on the NV media card. NV Media Card Create Special File command value will not be cleared until the drive and all
(11.072) is set to zero after the file has been created or the transfer fails. option data have been loaded.
When a macro file is transferred to a drive the drive mode is not changed
even if the actual mode is different to that in the file and defaults are not
loaded before the parameters are copied from the file to the drive.

Issue Number: 7
9.3 NV Media Card parameters

Table 9-2 Key to parameter table coding
RW Read / Write ND No default value
RO Read only NC Not copied
Num Number parameter PT Protected parameter
Bit Bit parameter RA Rating dependant
Txt Text string US User save
Bin Binary parameter PS Power-down save
FI Filtered DE Destination
11.036 NV Media Card File Previously Loaded

RO Num NC PT
Ú 0 to 999 Ö 0
This parameter shows the number of the data block last transferred from
an SD card to the drive. If defaults are subsequently reloaded this
parameter is set to 0.
11.037 NV Media Card File Number

RW Num
Ú 0 to 999 Ö 0
This parameter should have the data block number which the user would
like the information displayed in Pr 11.038, Pr 11.039.
11.038 NV Media Card File Type

RO Txt ND NC PT
Ú 0 to 2 Ö 0
Displays the type of data block selected with Pr 11.037.
Pr 11.038 String Type / mode

0 None No file selected
1 Open-loop Open loop mode parameter file
2 RFC-A RFC-A mode parameter file
11.039 NV Media Card File Version

RO Num ND NC PT
Ú 0 to 9999 Ö 0
Displays the version number of the file selected in Pr 11.037.
11.042 Parameter Cloning

RW Txt NC US*
None (0), Read (1), Prog
Ú (2), Auto (3), Ö 0
Boot (4)
9.4 NV Media Card trips

After an attempt to read, write or erase data from a NV Media Card a trip
is initiated if there has been a problem with the command.
See Chapter 12 Diagnostics on page 185 for more information on NV
Media Card trips.

Issue Number: 7
10 Advanced parameters Operation mode abbreviations:

Open-loop: Sensorless control for induction motors
This is a quick reference to all parameters in the drive showing units, RFC-A: Asynchronous Rotor Flux Control for induction motors
ranges limits etc, with block diagrams to illustrate their function. Full Default abbreviations:
descriptions of the parameters can be found in the Parameter Reference
Guide. Standard default value (50 Hz AC supply frequency)
USA default value (60 Hz AC supply frequency)
These advanced parameters are listed for reference
purposes only. The lists in this chapter do not include NOTE
sufficient information for adjusting these parameters. Parameter numbers shown in brackets {...} are the equivalent Menu 0
Incorrect adjustment can affect the safety of the system, parameters. Some Menu 0 parameters appear twice since their function
WARNING
and damage the drive and or external equipment. Before depends on the operating mode.
attempting to adjust any of these parameters, refer to In some cases, the function or range of a parameter is affected by the
the Parameter reference guide. setting of another parameter. The information in the lists relates to the
default condition of any parameters affected in this way.
Table 10-1 Menu descriptions Table 10-2 Key to parameter table coding
Menu Description
Coding Attribute
Commonly used basic set up parameters for quick / easy
0 RW Read/Write: can be written by the user
programming
RO Read only: can only be read by the user
1 Frequency reference
Bit 1 bit parameter. ‘On’ or ‘Off’ on the display
2 Ramps
Num Number: can be uni-polar or bi-polar
3 Frequency control
4 Torque and current control Txt Text: the parameter uses text strings instead of numbers.
5 Motor control Bin Binary parameter
6 Sequencer and clock IP IP Address parameter
7 Analog I/O Mac Mac Address parameter
8 Digital I/O Date Date parameter
9 Programmable logic, motorized pot, binary sum, timers Time Time parameter
10 Status and trips Chr Character parameter
11 Drive set-up and identification, serial communications Filtered: some parameters which can have rapidly changing
12 Threshold detectors and variable selectors FI values are filtered when displayed on the drive keypad for
easy viewing.
14 User PID controller
15 Option module slot 1 set-up menu Destination: This parameter selects the destination of an
DE
input or logic function.
18 General option module application menu 1
Rating dependent: this parameter is likely to have different
20 General option module application menu 2
values and ranges with drives of different voltage and
21 Second motor parameters current ratings. Parameters with this attribute will be
22 Menu 0 set-up transferred to the destination drive by non-volatile storage
Slot 1 Slot 1 option menus** RA media when the rating of the destination drive is different
from the source drive and the file is a parameter file.
** Only displayed when the option module is installed. However, the values will be transferred if only the current
rating is different and the file is a difference from default
type file.
No default: The parameter is not modified when defaults are
ND
loaded
Not copied: not transferred to or from non-volatile media
NC
during copying.
PT Protected: cannot be used as a destination.
User save: parameter saved in drive EEPROM when the
US
user initiates a parameter save.
Power-down save: parameter automatically saved in drive
PS
EEPROM when the under volts (UV) state occurs.

Issue Number: 7
Table 10-3 Feature look-up table
Features Related parameters (Pr)

Acceleration rates 02.010 02.011 to 02.019 02.032 02.033 02.034 02.002
Analog I/O Menu 7
Analog input 1 07.001 07.007 07.008 07.009 07.010 07.028 07.051 07.030 07.061 07.062 07.063 07.064
Analog input 2 07.002 07.011 07.012 07.013 07.014 07.031 07.052 07.065 07.066 07.067 07.068
Analog output 1 07.019 07.020 07.055 07.099
Analog reference 1 01.036 07.010 07.001 07.007 07.008 07.009 07.028 07.051 07.030 07.061 07.062 07.063 07.064
Analog reference 2 01.037 07.014 01.041 07.002 07.011 07.012 07.013 07.032 07.031 07.065 07.066 07.067 07.068
Application menu Menu 18 Menu 20
At frequency indicator bit 03.006 03.007 03.009 10.006 10.005 10.007
Auto reset 10.034 10.035 10.036 10.001
Autotune 05.012 05.017 05.024 05.025 05.010 05.029 05.030 05.062 05.063 05.059 05.060
Binary sum 09.029 09.030 09.031 09.032 09.033 09.034
Bipolar reference 01.010
Brake control 12.040 to 12.047 12.050 12.051
Braking 10.011 10.010 10.030 10.031 06.001 02.004 02.002 10.012 10.039 10.040
Catch a spinning motor 06.009 05.040
Coast to stop 06.001
Comms 11.023 to 11.027
Copying 11.042 11.036 to 11.039
Cost - per kWh electricity 06.016 06.017 06.024 06.025 06.026 06.027
Current controller 04.013 04.014
Current feedback 04.001 04.002 04.017 04.004 04.020 04.024 04.026 10.008 10.009 10.017
Current limits 04.005 04.006 04.007 04.018 04.015 04.019 04.016 05.007 05.010 10.008 10.009 10.017
DC bus voltage 05.005 02.008
DC injection braking 06.006 06.007 06.001
Deceleration rates 02.020 02.021 to 02.029 02.004 02.035 to 02.037 02.002 02.008 06.001 10.030 10.031 10.039 02.009
Defaults 11.043 11.046
Digital I/O Menu 8
Digital I/O read word 08.020
Digital I/O T10 08.001 08.011 08.021 08.031 08.081 08.091 08.121
Digital Input T11 08.002 08.012 08.022 08.082 08.122
Digital Input T12 08.003 08.013 08.023 08.083 08.123
Digital input T13 08.004 08.014 08.024 08.084 08.124
Digital input T14 08.005 08.015 08.025 08.035 08.085 08.125
Direction 10.013 06.030 06.031 01.003 10.014 02.001 03.002 08.003 08.004 10.040
Drive active 10.002 10.040
Drive derivative 11.028
Drive OK 10.001 08.028 08.008 08.018 10.036 10.040
Dynamic performance 05.026
Dynamic V/F 05.013
Enable 06.015 06.038
Estimated frequency 03.002 03.003 03.004
External trip 10.032
Fan speed 06.045
Field weakening - induction
05.029 05.030 01.006 05.028 05.062 05.063
motor
Filter change 06.019 06.018 06.021 06.022 06.023

Issue Number: 7

Firmware version 11.029 11.035
Frequency controller 03.010 to 03.017
Frequency reference
01.014 01.015
selection
Frequency slaving 03.001 03.013 03.014 03.015 03.016 03.017 03.018
Hard frequency reference 03.022 03.023
Heavy duty rating 05.007 11.032
High stability space vector
05.019
modulation
I/O sequencer 06.004 06.030 06.031 06.032 06.033 06.034 06.042 06.043 06.041
Inertia compensation 02.038 05.012 04.022 03.018
Jog reference 01.005 02.019 02.029
Keypad reference 01.017 01.014 01.043 01.051 06.012 06.013
Limit switches 06.035 06.036
Line power supply loss 06.003 10.015 10.016 05.005
Logic function 1 09.001 09.004 09.005 09.006 09.007 09.008 09.009 09.010
Logic function 2 09.002 09.014 09.015 09.016 09.017 09.018 09.019 09.020
Maximum frequency 01.006
Menu 0 set-up Menu 22
Minimum frequency 01.007 10.004
Motor map 05.006 05.007 05.008 05.009 05.010 05.011
Motor map 2 Menu 21 11.45
Motorized potentiometer 09.021 09.022 09.023 09.024 09.025 09.026 09.027 09.028 09.003
NV media card 11.036 to 11.039 11.042
Offset reference 01.004 01.038 01.009
Open loop vector mode 05.014 05.017
Operating mode 11.031 05.014
Output 05.001 05.002 05.003 05.004
Over frequency threshold 03.008
Over modulation enable 05.020
PID controller Menu 14
Power up parameter 11.022
Preset speeds 01.015 01.021 to 01.028 01.014 01.042 01.045 to 01.047 01.050
Programmable logic Menu 9
Ramp (accel / decel) mode 02.004 02.008 06.001 02.002 02.003 10.030 10.031 10.039
Reference selection 01.014 01.015 01.049 01.050 01.001
Regenerating 10.010 10.011 10.030 10.031 06.001 02.004 02.002 10.012 10.039 10.040
Relay output 08.008 08.018 08.028
Reset 10.033 10.034 10.035 10.036 10.001
RFC mode 05.040
S ramp 02.006 02.007
Sample rates 05.018
Security code 11.030 11.044
Serial comms 11.023 to 11.027
Skip references 01.029 01.030 01.031 01.032 01.033 01.034 01.035
Slip compensation 05.027 05.008
Status word 10.040
Supply 05.005 06.046

Issue Number: 7

Switching frequency 05.018 05.035 07.034 07.035
Thermal protection - drive 05.018 05.035 07.004 07.005 07.035 10.018
Thermal protection - motor 04.015 05.007 04.019 04.016 04.025 08.035
Thermistor input 08.035 07.047 07.050
Threshold detector 1 12.001 12.003 to 12.007
Threshold detector 2 12.002 12.023 to 12.027
Time - filter change 06.019 06.018 06.021 06.022 06.023
Time - powered up log 06.020 06.019 06.017 06.018
Time - run log 06.019 06.017 06.018
Torque 04.003 04.026 05.032
Torque mode 04.008 04.011
Trip detection 10.037 10.038 10.020 to 10.029
Trip log 10.020 to 10.029 10.041 to 10.060 10.070 to 10.079
Under voltage 05.005 10.016 10.015
V/F mode 05.015 05.014
Variable selector 1 12.008 to 12.016
Variable selector 2 12.028 to 12.036
Voltage controller 05.031
Voltage mode 05.014 05.017 05.015
Voltage rating 11.033 05.009 05.005
Voltage supply 06.046 05.005
Warning 10.019 10.012 10.017 10.018 10.040
Zero frequency indicator bit 03.005 10.003
Parameter ranges and Variable minimum/maximums:

Some parameters in the drive have a variable range with a variable minimum and a variable maximum values which is dependent on one of the
following:
• The settings of other parameters
• The drive rating
• The drive mode
• Combination of any of the above
The tables below give the definition of variable minimum/maximum and the maximum range of these.
VM_AC_VOLTAGE Range applied to parameters showing AC voltage

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0
Range of [MAX] 0 to the value listed below
VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MAX] is drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 10-4
Definition
VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MIN] = 0
VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET Range applied to the AC voltage set-up parameters

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0
VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX] is drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 10-4
Definition
VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET[MIN] = 0

Issue Number: 7
VM_ACCEL_RATE Maximum applied to the ramp rate parameters

Units s / 100 Hz
Range of [MIN] 0.0 to 3200.0
Range of [MAX] 0.0 to 3200.0
If Ramp Rate Units (02.039) = 0:
VM_ACCEL_RATE[MAX] = 3200.0
If Ramp Rate Units (02.039) = 1:
VM_ACCEL_RATE[MAX] = 3200.0 x Pr 01.006 / 100.00
Definition
VM_ACCEL_RATE[MIN] = 0.0
If the second motor map is selected (Pr 11.045 = 1) Pr 21.001 is used instead of Pr 01.006.
VM_DC_VOLTAGE Range applied to parameters showing DC voltage

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0
VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX] is the full scale d.c. link voltage feedback (over voltage trip level) for the drive. This level is
drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 10-4
Definition
VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MIN] = 0
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET Range applied to DC voltage reference parameters

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX] is drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 10-4
Definition
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MIN] = 0
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT Range applied to parameters showing current in A

Units A
Range of [MIN] -9999.99 to 0.00
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX] is equivalent to the full scale (over current trip level) for the drive and is given by Full
Scale Current Kc (11.061).
Definition
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MIN] = - VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX]
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR Unipolar version of VM_DRIVE_CURRENT

Units A
Range of [MIN] 0.00
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR[MAX] = VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX]
Definition
VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR[MIN] = 0.00
VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE Range applied to parameters showing high DC voltage

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0
Range of [MAX] 0 to 1500
VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX] is the full scale d.c. link voltage feedback for the high d.c. link voltage measurement
which can measure the voltage if it goes above the normal full scale value. This level is drive voltage rating dependent.
Definition See Table 10-4
VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE[MIN] = 0

Issue Number: 7
VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT
Range applied to current limit parameters
VM_MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT
Units %
Range of [MIN] 0.0
VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT[MIN] = 0.0
Open-loop
VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX] = (ITlimit / ITrated) x 100 %
Where:
ITlimit = IMaxRef x cos(sin-1(IMrated / IMaxRef))
IMrated = Pr 05.007 sin φ
ITrated = Pr 05.007 x cos φ
cos φ = Pr 05.010
IMaxRef is 0.7 x Pr 11.061 when the motor rated current set in Pr 05.007 is less than or equal to Pr 11.032 (i.e.
Heavy duty), otherwise it is the lower of 0.7 x Pr 11.061 or 1.1 x Pr 11.060 (i.e. Normal Duty).
Definition RFC-A
VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX] = (ITlimit / ITrated) x 100 %
Where:
ITlimit = IMaxRef x cos(sin-1(IMrated / IMaxRef))
IMrated = Pr 05.007 x cos φ1
ITrated = Pr 05.007 x sin φ1
φ1 = cos-1 (Pr 05.010) + φ2. φ1 is calculated during an autotune. See the variable minimum / maximum calculations
in the Parameter Reference Guide for more information regarding φ2.
IMaxRef is 0.9 x Pr 11.061 when the motor rated current set in Pr 05.007 is less than or equal to Pr 11.032 (i.e.
Heavy duty), otherwise it is the lower of 0.9 x Pr 11.061 or 1.1 x Pr 11.060 (i.e. Normal Duty).
For VM_MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX] use Pr 21.007 instead of Pr 05.007 and Pr 21.010 instead of Pr 05.010.
VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP1
Limits applied to the negative frequency or speed clamp
VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP2
Units Hz
Range of [MIN] -550.00 to 0.00
Negative Bipolar
Reference Reference
VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP1[MIN] VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP1[MAX]
Clamp Enable Enable
Definition (01.008) (01.010)
0 0 0.00 Pr 01.006
0 1 0.00 0.00
1 X -VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP[MAX] 0.00
VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP2 is defined in the same way except that Pr 21.001 is used instead of Pr 01.006.
VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP Limits applied to the positive frequency or speed reference clamp

Units Hz
Range of [MIN] 0.00
Range of [MAX] 550.00
In all modes VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP[MAX] is fixed at 550.00
Definition
In all modes VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP[MIN] is fixed at 0.0

Issue Number: 7
VM_FREQ_UNIPOLAR Unipolar version of VM_FREQ

Units Hz
Range of [MIN] Open-loop, RFC-A: 0.00
Range of [MAX] Open-loop, RFC-A: 0.00 to 550.00
Definition VM_FREQ_UNIPOLAR[MAX] = VM_FREQ[MAX]
VM_FREQ_UNIPOLAR[MIN] = 0.00
VM_POWER Range applied to parameters that either set or display power

Units kW
VM_POWER[MAX] is rating dependent and is chosen to allow for the maximum power that can be output by the drive
with maximum a.c. output voltage, at maximum controlled current and unity power factor.
Definition
VM_POWER[MAX] = √3 x VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MAX] x VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX] / 1000
VM_POWER[MIN] = -VM_POWER[MAX]
VM_RATED_CURRENT Range applied to rated current parameters

Units A
Range of [MIN] 0.00
VM_RATED_CURRENT [MAX] = Maximum Rated Current (11.060) and is dependent on the drive rating.
Definition
VM_RATED_CURRENT [MIN] = 0.00
VM_FREQ Range applied to parameters showing frequency

Units Hz
This variable minimum/maximum defines the range of frequency monitoring parameters. To allow headroom for over-
shoot the range is set to twice the range of the frequency references.
Definition
VM_FREQ[MAX] = 2 x VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
VM_FREQ[MIN] = 2 x VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MIN]
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Range applied to the frequency or speed reference parameters

Units Hz
If Pr 01.008 = 0: VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX] = Pr 01.006
If Pr 01.008 = 1: VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX] = Pr 01.006 or |Pr 01.007|, whichever is larger.
If the second motor map is selected (Pr 11.045 = 1) Pr 21.001 is used instead of Pr 01.006 and Pr 21.002 instead of
Definition
Pr 01.007.
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MIN] = -VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX].
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Unipolar version of VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF

Units Hz
Range of [MIN] 0.00
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR[MAX] = VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
Definition
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR[MIN] = 0.00

Issue Number: 7
VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS Range applied to some Menu 1 reference parameters

Units Hz
VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS[MAX] = VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
Negative Reference Bipolar Reference

VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS [MIN]
Clamp Enable (01.008) Enable (01.010)
Definition 0 0 Pr 01.007
0 1 -VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
1 0 0.00
1 1 -VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]
If the second motor map is selected (Pr 11.045 = 1) Pr 21.002 is used instead of Pr 01.007.
VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS Range applied the standard under-voltage threshold

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0 to 1150
VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS[MAX] = VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET
Definition
VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS[MIN] is voltage rating dependent. See Table 10-4
VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL Range applied to the supply loss threshold

Units V
Range of [MIN] 0 to 1150
VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL[MAX] = VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX]
Definition
VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL[MIN] is drive voltage rating dependent. See Table 10-4
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT Range applied to torque and torque producing current parameters

Units %
Select Motor 2 Parameters (11.045) VM_TORQUE_CURRENT [MAX]

Definition 0 VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX]
1 VM_MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT[MAX]
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT[MIN] = -VM_TORQUE_CURRENT[MAX]
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR Unipolar version of VM_TORQUE_CURRENT

Units %
Range of [MIN] 0.0
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR[MAX] = VM_TORQUE_CURRENT[MAX]
Definition
VM_TORQUE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR[MIN] =0.0
VM_USER_CURRENT Range applied to torque reference and percentage load parameters with one decimal place
Units %
VM_USER_CURRENT[MAX] = User Current Maximum Scaling (04.024)
Definition
VM_USER_CURRENT[MIN] = -VM_USER_CURRENT[MAX]

Issue Number: 7
Table 10-4 Voltage ratings dependant values

Voltage level
Variable min/max
100 V 200 V 400 V 575 V 690 V
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET(MAX] 410 800 955 1150
VM_DC_VOLTAGE(MAX] 415 830 990 1190
VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET(MAX] 240 480 575 690
VM_AC_VOLTAGE[MAX] 325 650 780 930
VM_STD_UNDER_VOLTS[MIN] 175 330 435 435
VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL{MIN] 205 410 540 540
VM_HIGH_DC_VOLTAGE 1500 1500

Issue Number: 7

Issue Number: 7
10.1 Menu 1: Frequency reference

LOCAL/REMOTE
Analog Reference
Analog Menu 8
Reference 1
Analog Input 1
01.036
01.041 Reference Select

Menu 7 Flag 1
01.037
Analog
Analog Input 2
Reference 2
Reference Select
01.042
Flag 2
Preset Reference
Reference Select
Preset Selector 01.015 01.043 Flag 3
Preset Reference Select Bits 1 ~ 3

01.047
01.046 01.045
Reference
Selector**
1
01.014 Reference
Selected
Indicator
8
01.049
01.021 ~01.028
0
Preset +
References
1~8
+
9
Scan Timer
Percentage 01.038 01.001
1.20 Trim
Preset
Selected 01.050 Pr 01.050 set Reference
Indicator to greater than 1 01.004 Selected
01.016
Reference
Preset Selector Offset
Timer
Max O/P
frequency
01.048 Pr 01.049 Pr 01.050 Reference being used x (% trim / 100)
1 1 Analog Reference 1
Preset Selector >1 Preset Reference defined by Pr 01.050
1
Timer Reset 1 Analog Reference 2 Reference
2
2 >1 Preset Reference defined by Pr 01.050 Offset Select
3 x Preset Reference defined by Pr 01.050
4 x Keypad Control Mode Reference (01.017)
Power-Up Keypad 5 x Reserved
Control Mode 6 x Keypad Control Mode Reference (01.017)
Reference
01.051 ** Contolled by drive configuration (Pr 11.034)
01.017
Keypad Control
Mode Reference
Key
Input Read-write (RW)

terminals mm.ppp
parameter
Output mm.ppp Read-only (RO)

terminals parameter

Issue Number: 7
RUN FORWARD RUN REVERSE
Menu 8
Menu 6
Sequencer
Sequencer (Menu 6)
Jog select 01.013
Bipolar Maximum
reference 01.010 Reference
enable Clamp
01.006
Negative
Reverse Minimum
select Reference
Clamp 01.007 Reference
Enable Clamp
Clamped Alternative
01.008 [01.006] reference
reference
[01.007] enable
01.070
[01.007]
[01.006] 01.072
x(-1)
Alternative
reference
[01.006] 01.071
01.005
[01.006]
Jog
reference
[01.006]
01.035 Reference In
Rejection Zone
Pre-skip
Filter Reference
[01.007]
01.002 01.003 Pre-ramp

reference
Menu 2
Reference
On
01.011
01.029 01.031 01.033

Skip Skip Skip
Reference Reference Reference
1 2 3
01.030 01.032 01.034
Skip Skip Skip
Reference Reference Reference
Band Band Band
1 2 3

Issue Number: 7
Range (Ú) Default (Ö)

Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
01.001 Reference Selected ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz RO Num ND NC PT
01.002 Pre-skip Filter Reference ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz RO Num ND NC PT
01.003 Pre-ramp Reference ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz RO Num ND NC PT
01.004 Reference Offset ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz 0.00 Hz RW Num US
01.005 Jog Reference 0.00 to 300.00 Hz 1.50 Hz RW Num US
50Hz: 50.00 Hz
01.006 Maximum Reference Clamp ±VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP Hz RW Num US
60Hz: 60.00 Hz
01.007 Minimum Reference Clamp ±VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP1 Hz 0.00 Hz RW Num US
01.008 Negative Reference Clamp Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
01.009 Reference Offset Select 0 to 2 0 RW Num US
01.010 Bipolar Reference Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
01.011 Reference On Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
01.012 Reverse Select Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
01.013 Jog Select Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
A1.A2 (0), A1.Pr (1), A2.Pr (2), PrESEt (3),
01.014 Reference Selector A1.A2 (0) RW Txt US
PAd (4), rES (5), PAd.rEF (6)
01.015 Preset Selector 0 to 9 0 RW Num US
01.016 Preset Selector Timer 0 to 400.0 s 10.0s RW Num US
01.017 Keypad Control Mode Reference ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS Hz 0.00 Hz RO Num NC PT PS
01.029 Skip Reference 1 0.00 to VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Hz 0.00 Hz RW Num US
01.030 Skip Reference Band 1 0.00 to 25.00 Hz 0.50 Hz RW Num US
01.035 Reference In Rejection Zone Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
01.036 Analog Reference 1 ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS Hz 0.00 Hz RO Num NC
01.037 Analog Reference 2 ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_USER_REFS Hz 0.00 Hz RO Num NC
01.038 Percentage Trim ±100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num NC
01.041 Reference Select Flag 1 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
01.045 Preset Select Flag 1 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
01.048 Preset Selector Timer Reset Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
01.049 Reference Selected Indicator 1 to 6 RO Num ND NC PT
01.050 Preset Selected Indicator 1 to 8 RO Num ND NC PT
01.051 Power-up Keypad Control Mode Reference rESEt (0), LASt (1), PrESEt (2) rESEt (0) RW Txt US
01.057 Force Reference Direction None (0), For (1), rEv (2) None (0) RW Txt
01.069 Reference in rpm ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF rpm RO Num ND NC PT
01.070 Clamped Reference ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz RO Num ND NC PT
01.071 Alternative Reference ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz 0.00 Hz RW Num NC PT
01.072 Alternative Reference Enable Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT

Issue Number: 7

Issue Number: 7
10.2 Menu 2: Ramps

Key
Acceleration Rate Select Bits
2.32 Input Read-write (RW)
02.034 02.033 02.032 mm.ppp
terminals parameter

0 0 0 parameter
terminals
0 0 1
0 1 0 The parameters are all shown in their default settings
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
Acceleration
1 1 0 Rate Selector
1 1 1 02.010
Acceleration rates 1 ~ 8
02.011 Acceleration Rate 1
02.012 Acceleration Rate 2 Acceleration

02.030
Rate Selected
Preset Selected 01.050

Indicator
Jog Acceleration
1 02.019
Rate
2
3
4 Jog Select 01.013
5
6
7 Reverse Forward
8 Accel. Rate Accel. Rate
N N
t t
Acceleration
Ramp Control
02.003 Ramp Hold
Pre-Ramp 02.004 Ramp Mode Select

01.003
Reference
02.008 Standard Ramp Voltage
Deceleration Fail
02.009
Detection Disable
02.039 Ramp Rate Units

Issue Number: 7
Deceleration Rate Select Bits
02.037 02.036 02.035
Deceleration
Rate Selector
02.020
Deceleration Rates 1 ~ 8
02.021 Deceleration Rate 1

Deceleration
Rate Selected 02.031 02.022 Deceleration Rate 2
Preset
01.050 Selected
Indicator
02.029 Jog Deceleration 1

Rate
2
3
4
01.013 Jog Select
5
6
Forward Reverse 7
Decel. rate Decel. rate 8
N N
Current control
t t Menu 4
(Open-loop only) Ramp Enable
02.002 (RFC-A mode only)
Deceleration
_ Ramps always enabled
Ramp Control Post-Ramp
in Open-loop Reference
+
02.006 S-Ramp Enable
02.001
02.007 Maximum Rate Of Change
Of Acceleration
02.040 S-Ramp Percentage

Motor And Load 03.018
02.041 S-Ramp Set-up Mode Inertia
d/dt 02.038
Torque Per Amp 05.032
Inertia
Compensation
Torque

Issue Number: 7

Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
02.001 Post Ramp Reference ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz RO Num ND NC PT
02.002 Ramp Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
02.003 Ramp Hold Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
02.004 Ramp Mode Select FASt (0), Std (1), Std.bSt (2), FSt.bSt (3) Std (1) RW Txt US
02.005 Disable Ramp Output Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
02.006 S Ramp Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
02.007 Max Rate Of Change Of Acceleration 0.0 to 300.0 s²/100Hz 3.1 s²/100 Hz RW Num US
110 V drive: 375 V
200 V drive: 375 V
400 V drive 50 Hz: 750 V
02.008 Standard Ramp Voltage ±VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET V RW Num RA US
400 V drive 60 Hz: 775 V
575 V drive: 895 V
690 V drive: 1075 V
02.009 Deceleration Fail Detection Disable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
02.010 Acceleration Rate Selector 0 to 9 0 RW Num US
02.019 Jog Acceleration Rate ±VM_ACCEL_RATE s 0.2 s RW Num US
02.020 Deceleration Rate Selector 0 to 9 0 RW Num US
02.029 Jog Deceleration Rate ±VM_ACCEL_RATE s 0.2 s RW Num US
02.030 Acceleration Rate Selected 0 to 8 RO Num ND NC PT
02.031 Deceleration Rate Selected 0 to 8 RO Num ND NC PT
02.032 Acceleration Rate Select Bit 0 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
02.035 Deceleration Rate Select Bit 0 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
02.038 Inertia Compensation Torque ±1000.0 % RO Num ND NC PT
02.039 Ramp Rate Units 0 to 1 0 RW Num US
02.040 S Ramp Percentage 0.0 to 50.0 % 0.0 % RW Num US
02.041 S Ramp Set-up Mode 0 to 2 0 RW Num US
02.042 Maximum Rate Of Change Of Acceleration 1 0.0 to 300.0 s²/100 Hz 0.0 s²/100 Hz RW Num US

Issue Number: 7
10.3 Menu 3: Frequency control

Figure 10-3 Menu 3 Open-loop logic diagram
Hard Frequency
Reference 03.022
Hard Frequency
Reference Select 1 0
03.023
Slip
compensation
1 0
Menu 5
Reference
01.011
Post Ramp On Output
Reference Frequency
+ +
+ +
Menu 2 02.001 05.001
Zero Frequency Zero Bipolar Reference

Threshold Frequency Enable
03.005 + 01.010
10.003
_
Running At Or Below
Minimum Minimum Frequency
Reference Clamp 1
01.007 +0.5Hz + 10.004
0
_
Maximum + Over Speed

Reference 01.006 +20% 0 Trip
Clamp
_
Over 03.008 1
Frequency
Threshold
03.008>0
At Frequency
Lower Limit Below Set-Frequency
03.006 +
Pre Ramp 10.005
Reference _
_ At Frequency
1
01.003 +
0 NOR 10.006
03.009
+
10.007 Key
Absolute 03.007
_
At-Frequency Input Read-write (RW)
At Frequency mm.ppp
Select Above Set-Frequency terminals
Upper Limit parameter

terminals parameter

Issue Number: 7
Figure 10-4 Menu 3 RFC-A logic diagram
Hard Frequency
Reference 03.022
Hard Frequency
Reference Select 03.023
Reference
On
01.011
Post-Ramp VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX] Final Demand
Reference + Reference
02.001 + 03.001
VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MIN]
02.005
Disable Ramp
Output
03.080 d/dt 03.079

Sensorless
Mode Filter
Sensorless
Position

Issue Number: 7
Frequency Controller
Gain Select
03.016
Frequency Controller Gains

Frequency
Frequency 03.010 (Kp1) Controller
Error 0 Output
03.011 (Ki1)
+ 03.003
+ 03.004 Menu 4
_ _ 03.013 (Kp2)
1
03.014 (Ki2)
Frequency (Kd1) (Kd2)

Controller
Differential 03.012 03.015
Feedback
0 1
Gains
Zero Frequency Zero Bipolar Reference

Threshold Frequency Enable
03.005 + 01.010
10.003
_ Running At Or
Below Minimum
Frequency
Min Reference Clamp 1
01.007 +0.5 Hz + 10.004
0
_
Estimated Frequency +
Max Reference Clamp Over Speed Trip
01.006 0 _
03.002 +20%
Over Frequency
Threshold 1
03.008
03.008 >0
Below Set Frequency
At Frequency
Pre Ramp Lower Limit 03.006 +
10.005
Reference _
_ At Frequency
1
01.003
+
0 NOR 10.006
+
03.009 10.007
Absolute At Frequency 03.007
_
Select
At Frequency Above Set Frequency
Upper Limit Key
X Input Read-write (RW)

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter
X Output mm.ppp Read-only (RO)

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 7
Figure 10-5 Menu 3 Logic diagram
T14 DI5 control

08.085
T14 DI 05
Destination B
T14 Digital
Input 5 Select Position Position 08.125
08.035 Scaling
T14 Digital input
32 Bit Position 03.035 ≥1 5 destination A
Counter 03.029
03.036
08.025
T14 Digital Input 5
0 to 3 Position Counter
03.032 Any unprotected
Reset
bit parameter
14
??.???
4 03.043 03.045 03.044 01.041 Reference
Maximum Select Flag 1
Frequency
Reference Frequency Frequency ??.???
Reference
Frequency Input Reference Scaling
Limit
T10 DO1
Control
08.091
T10 Digital I/O 01
T10 DI/O 01 Source Output Select
/ Destination B 08.121 ≥1 08.031
T10 Digital IO1 Source T10 Digital
08.021 I/O 1
/ Destination A 0 to 1
At Zero 10
Frequency ??.???
10.003 03.037 03.038 2 or 3
??.??? Frequency Output or Maximum Output

PWM Output Scaling Frequency
Any valid
parameter
Key

terminals mm.ppp
parameter

terminals parameter

Issue Number: 7

Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
03.001 Final Demand Reference ±VM_FREQ Hz RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.002 Estimated Frequency ±VM_FREQ Hz RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.003 Frequency Error ±VM_FREQ Hz RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.004 Frequency Controller Output ±VM_TORQUE_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.005 Zero Frequency Threshold 0.00 to 20.00 Hz 2.00 Hz RW Num US
03.006 At Frequency Lower Limit 0.00 to VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Hz 1.00 Hz RW Num US
03.007 At Frequency Upper Limit 0.00 to VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Hz 1.00 Hz RW Num US
03.008 Over Frequency Threshold 0.00 to VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Hz 0.00 Hz RW Num US
03.009 Absolute At Frequency Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.010 Frequency Controller Proportional Gain Kp1 0.000 to 200.000 s/rad 0.100 s/rad RW Num US
03.011 Frequency Controller Integral GainKi1 0.00 to 655.35 s²/rad 0.10 s²/rad RW Num US
03.012 Frequency Controller Differential Feedback Gain Kd1 0.00000 to 0.65535 1/rad 0.00000 1/rad RW Num US
Frequency Controller Proportional
03.013 0.000 to 200.000 s/rad 0.100 s/rad RW Num US
Gain Kp2
03.014 Frequency Controller Integral Gain Ki2 0.00 to 655.35 s²/rad 0.10 s²/rad RW Num US
03.015 Frequency Controller Differential Feedback Gain Kd2 0.00000 to 0.65535 1/rad 0.00000 1/rad RW Num US
03.016 Frequency Controller Gain Select 0 to 2 0 RW Num US
0.00 to VM_FREQ_
03.017 Gain Change Threshold 0.00 Hz RW Num FI
UNIPOLAR Hz
0.00 to 1000.00
03.018 Motor and Load Inertia 0.00 kgm² RW Num US
kgm²
03.022 Hard Frequency Reference ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz 0.00 Hz RW Num US
03.023 Hard Frequency Reference Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
03.029 Position (T14) 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.032 Position Counter Reset (T14) Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
03.035 Position Scaling Numerator (T14) 0.000 to 1.000 1.000 RW Num US
03.036 Position Scaling Denominator (T14) 0.000 to 100.000 1.000 RW Num US
03.037 Frequency Output or PWM Output Scaling (T10) 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
03.038 Maximum Output Frequency (T10) 1 (0), 2 (1), 5 (2), 10 (3) kHz 5 (2) kHz RW Txt US
03.043 Maximum Reference Frequency (T14) 0.00 to 100.00 kHz 10.00 kHz RW Num US
03.044 Frequency Reference Scaling (T14) 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
03.045 Frequency Reference (T14) 0.00 to 100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT FI
03.047 Two Point Minimum Frequency (T14) 0.00 to 100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
03.048 Drive Reference at Minimum Frequency (T14) 0.00 to 100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
03.049 Two Point Maximum Frequency (T14) 0.00 to 100.00 % 100.00 % RW Num US
03.050 Drive Reference at Maximum Frequency (T14) 0.00 to 100.00 % 100.00 % RW Num US
03.072 Motor Speed Percent ±150.0 % RO ND NC PT FI
4 (0), 5 (1), 6 (2), 8 (3),
03.079 Sensorless Mode Filter 4 (0) ms RW Txt US
12 (4), 20 (5) ms
03.080 Sensorless Position 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT

Issue Number: 7
10.4 Menu 4: Torque and current control

Figure 10-6 Menu 4 Open loop logic diagram
Menu 2 ramp Torque Mode

Pre Ramp controller Selector
Reference
04.011 Post Ramp Output
+
01.003
2.01 Reference Frequency
+ 02.001
2.01 Motor map 05.001
10.009
Current
Limit
Active Current Controller
04.013 P Gain
04.014 I Gain Torque

Producing
Current Current
Magnitude
_
04.002
04.020 04.001
+
04.002 - Active
Output Motor Current
Frequency Rated (Amp)
Frequency
04.020 - Percentage 04.017 Magnetising
05.001 05.006
Load Current
Final Final
Torque Current
Reference Reference
Torque Torque to +
04.003 current 04.004
Reference* 04.008
conversion _
Current limits Final Thermal Low Frequency

Maximum Current Limit Motor Thermal Protection Thermal Protection
04.005 Motoring
Heavy Duty 11.032 Time Constant 1 Mode Mode
Rating 04.018
Regenerating 04.015 04.016 04.025
Motor 05.007
Rated Symmetrical
Current
Overload detection
10.008 10.009 10.039 04.019 10.017
Rated Current Limit Braking Resistor Motor Motor Overload

Load Reached Active Thermal Protection Alarm
Accumulator Accumulator
Key

terminals mm.ppp
parameter

terminals parameter

Issue Number: 7
Figure 10-7 Menu 4 RFC-A logic diagram
Inertia Compensation
Torque
02.038
Estimated Motor
frequency 0 1 Motor Rated
Inertia Power
Rated
03.002 04.022 Compensation Current Factor
Enable
Frequency 05.007 05.010
Controller Torque Mode
04.011
_ Output Selector
+
Final Final Current Controller
+ + Torque
Demand 03.001 03.004
Reference Current
Reference
+ 04.013 Controller
P Gain
04.003 04.004
+ _ Current
04.014 Controller
Final
I Gain
Current
Reference
Frequency +
Pre-
Ramp 01.003 Over-Ride
Reference Level
Coiler/Uncoiler
Frequency
Zero Over-Ride Torque Producing
Frequency 03.005 Level Current Current
Threshold (Amp) Magnitude
Torque
Reference 04.008
04.002 04.001
04.017 Magnetising
User Current Current
Maximum Scaling 04.024
Current limits Final Thermal Low Frequency

Motor Thermal Protection Thermal Protection
Maximum Current Limit Time Constant 1
04.005 Motoring Mode Mode
Heavy Duty 11.032
Rating 04.018 04.015 04.016 04.025
Regenerating
Motor
05.007
Rated Symmetrical
Current
Overload detection
Key
Input Read-write (RW) 10.008 10.009 10.039 04.019 10.017

terminals mm.ppp
parameter
Rated Load Current Limit Braking Resistor Motor Motor
Output mm.ppp Read-only (RO) Reached Active Thermal Protection Overload
terminals parameter Accumulator Accumulator Alarm

Issue Number: 7

Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
04.001 Current Magnitude ±VM_DRIVE_CURRENT A RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.002 Torque Producing Current ±VM_DRIVE_CURRENT A RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.003 Final Torque Reference ±VM_TORQUE_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.004 Final Current Reference ±VM_TORQUE_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.005 Motoring Current Limit ±VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT % 165.0 % 175.0 % RW Num RA US
04.006 Regenerating Current Limit ±VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT % 165.0 % 175.0 % RW Num RA US
04.007 Symmetrical Current Limit ±VM_MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT % 165.0 % 175.0 % RW Num RA US
04.008 Torque Reference ±VM_USER_CURRENT % 0.0 % RW Num US
04.011 Torque Mode Selector 0 to 1 0 to 5 0 RW Num US
04.013 Current Controller Kp Gain 0.00 to 4000.00 20.00 RW Num US
04.014 Current Controller Ki Gain 0.000 to 600.000 40.000 RW Num US
04.015 Motor Thermal Time Constant 1 1 to 3000 s 179 s RW Num US
04.016 Thermal Protection Mode 0 (0) to 3 (3) 0 (0) RW Bin US
04.017 Magnetising Current ±VM_DRIVE_CURRENT A RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.018 Final Current Limit ±VM_TORQUE_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT
04.019 Motor Protection Accumulator 0.0 to 100.0 % RO Num ND NC PT PS
04.020 Percentage Load ±VM_USER_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.022 Inertia Compensation Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
04.024 User Current Maximum Scaling ±VM_TORQUE_CURRENT_UNIPOLAR % 165.0 % 175.0 % RW Num RA US
04.025 Low Frequency Thermal Protection Mode 0 to 1 0 RW Num US
04.026 Percentage Torque ±VM_USER_CURRENT % RO Num ND NC PT FI
04.036 Motor Protection Accumulator Power-up Value Pr.dn (0), 0 (1), rEAL t (2) Pr.dn (0) RW Txt US
04.041 User Over Current Trip Level 0 to 100 % 100 % RW Num RA US

Issue Number: 7
10.5 Menu 5: Motor control

Figure 10-8 Menu 5 Open-loop logic diagram
05.014 Control Mode

Autotune
L1 L2 L3
05.012
DC Bus
Voltage
Motormap
Dynamic V To F
05.013 Select
Motor Rated 05.005
05.006 Frequency Low Frequency
05.015 Voltage Boost
Motor Rated
05.007 Stator
Current
Resistance Output
Motor Rated Transient Voltage
05.008 05.024
Speed Inductance
Motor Rated 05.002 Volt
05.009
Voltage
Post Ramp Motor Rated
05.010
Reference Power Factor
+ Number Of 05.001 Hertz
02.001 05.011 Motor Poles* Output
Frequency
Maximum
+ 05.018 Switching
Frequency
Enable
05.004 High Stability
Slip
Compensation 05.019 Space Vector
Output Motor Modulation
05.027 05.003 √3xVxI
Power (kW) RPM Over Modulation
05.020 Enable
Auto Switching
05.035 Frequency
Change Disable
Slip
compensation Voltage
05.031 Controller
Torque Current Gain
Producing Magnitude
Current
04.002
04.001
04.020
Percentage
Load
Key
Input Read-write (RW) 04.017

terminals mm.ppp
parameter Magnetising
Current
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 7
Figure 10-9 Menu 5 RFC-A, logic diagram
Output
Frequency
05.001
Flux Calculator
Motor Rated
Current
Number Of
05.011 Motor Poles*
05.017 Stator
Resistance
05.024 Transient
Inductance
RFC-A
Motor Rated
05.006
Frequency
Motor Rated
05.008
Speed Flux angle Reference
Position
∫
Estimated
03.002 Motor Rated frame
frequency 05.009
Voltage transformation
Motor Rated
05.010 Power Factor
05.025 Stator
Inductance
Saturation
05.029 Break-Point 1
Saturation
Saturation
Saturation
Current Flux
References Magnitude
Current control
Menu 4
Frequency
controller 03.004 Current limits
output Overload detection
Current loop gains
Torque reference
Current
feedback
05.012 Autotune
05.015 Low frequency Voltage Boost
05.026 High Dynamic Performance Enable
05.031 Voltage Controller Gain

Key

terminals mm.ppp
parameter

terminals parameter

Issue Number: 7
DC Bus
Voltage
05.005
Voltage reference
Modulator U
Maximum Switching
05.018 Frequency V
Auto Switching W
05.035 Frequency Change
Disable
Flux Controller
05.009 Motor Rated

Voltage Output
05.002
Voltage
RFC-A
Output
Flux Optimization Power
05.013 Select
Power Calculation (V x I) 05.003
Current
Magnitude
04.002 04.001
04.017
Magnetising
Current

Issue Number: 7

Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
05.001 Output Frequency ±VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF Hz RO Num ND NC PT FI
05.002 Output Voltage ±VM_AC_VOLTAGE V RO Num ND NC PT FI
05.003 Output Power ±VM_POWER kW RO Num ND NC PT FI
05.004 Motor Rpm ±80000 rpm RO Num ND NC PT FI
05.005 D.C. Bus Voltage ±VM_DC_VOLTAGE V RO Num ND NC PT FI
05.006 Motor Rated Frequency 0.00 to VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_UNIPOLAR Hz 50 Hz: 50.00 Hz, 60 Hz: 60.00 Hz RW Num RA US
05.007 Motor Rated Current ±VM_RATED_CURRENT A Maximum Heavy Duty Rating (11.032) RW Num RA US
50 Hz: 1500.0 rpm 50 Hz: 1450.0 rpm
05.008 Motor Rated Speed 0.0 to 80000.0 rpm RW Num US
60 Hz: 1800.0 rpm 60 Hz: 1750.0 rpm
110 V drive: 230 V, 200 V drive: 230 V
400 V drive 50Hz: 400 V
05.009 Motor Rated Voltage ±VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET V 400 V drive 60Hz: 460 V RW Num RA US
575 V drive: 575 V
690 V drive: 690 V
05.010 Motor Rated Power Factor 0.00 to 1.00 0.85 RW Num RA US
05.011 Number Of Motor Poles* Auto (0) to 32 (16) Auto (0) RW Num US
05.012 Autotune 0 to 2 0 to 3 0 RW Num NC
05.013 Dynamic V To F Select / Flux Optimization Select 0 to 1 0 RW Num US
Ur.S (0), Ur (1),
05.014 Control Mode Fd (2), Ur.Auto (3), Ur.I (4) RW Txt US
Ur.I (4), SrE (5)
05.015 Low Frequency Voltage Boost 0.0 to 50.0 % 3.0 % RW Num US
05.017 Stator Resistance 0.0000 to 99.9999 Ω 0.0000 Ω RW Num RA US
0.667 (0), 1 (1), 2 (2),
2 (2), 3 (3), 4 (4), 6 (5),
05.018 Maximum Switching Frequency 3 (3), 4 (4), 6 (5), 8 (6), 3 (3) kHz RW Txt RA US
8 (6), 12 (7), 16 (8) kHz
12 (7), 16 (8) kHz
05.019 High Stability Space Vector Modulation Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
05.020 Over Modulation Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
05.024 Transient Inductance 0.000 to 500.000 mH 0.000 mH RW Num RA US
05.025 Stator Inductance 0.00 to 5000.00 mH 0.00 mH RW Num RA US
05.026 High Dynamic Performance Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
05.027 Enable Slip Compensation ±150.0 % 100.0 % RW Num US
05.028 Flux Control Compensation Disable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
05.029 Saturation Breakpoint 1 0.0 to 100.0 % 50.0 % RW Num US
05.031 Voltage Controller Gain 1 to 30 1 RW Num US
05.032 Torque Per Amp 0.00 to 500.00 Nm/A RO Num ND NC PT
05.033 Slip Compensation Limit 0.00 to 10.00 Hz 5.00 Hz RW Num US
05.034 Percentage Flux 0.0 to 150.0 % RO Num ND NC PT
05.035 Auto-switching Frequency Change Disable 0 to 2 0 RW Num US
64 (0), 128 (1), 256 (2),
05.036 Slip Compensation Filter 128 (1) ms RW Txt US
512 (3) ms
0.667 (0), 1 (1), 2 (2),
2 (2), 3 (3), 4 (4), 6 (5),
05.037 Switching Frequency 3 (3), 4 (4), 6 (5), 8 (6), RO Txt ND NC PT
8 (6), 12 (7), 16 (8) kHz
12 (7), 16 (8) kHz
05.040 Spin Start Boost 0.0 to 10.0 1.0 RW Num US
05.042 Reverse Output Phase Sequence Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
05.059 Maximum Deadtime Compensation 0.000 to 10.000 µs 0.000 µs RO Num NC PT US
05.060 Current At Maximum Deadtime Compensation 0.00 to 100.00 % 0.00 % RO Num NC PT US
05.061 Disable Deadtime Compensation Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
05.074 Boost End Voltage 0.0 to 100.0 % 50.0 % RW Num US
05.075 Boost End Frequency 0.0 to 100.0 % 50.0 % RW Num US
05.076 Second Point Voltage 0.0 to 100.0 % 55.0 % RW Num US
05.077 Second Point Frequency 0.0 to 100.0 % 55.0 % RW Num US
05.078 Third point voltage 0.0 to 100.0 % 75.0 % RW Num US
05.079 Third point frequency 0.0 to 100.0 % 75.0 % RW Num US
05.080 Low acoustic noise enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
Change to maximum drive switching frequency
05.081 Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
at low output current
05.082 Motor Rated Power ±VM_POWER kW 0.00 kW RW Num RA
05.083 Voltage Shelving Disable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
05.084 Low Frequency Slip Boost 0.0 to 100.0 % 0.0 % RW Num US
* If this parameter is read via serial communications, it will show pole pairs.

Issue Number: 7
10.6 Menu 6: Sequencer and clock

Control word
Enable
06.043
0
Control Word
06.042
Sequencer
Drive Enable 0
06.015 06.001 Stop Mode
Run Forward 1
T11 digital 2 06.030 06.003 Supply Loss Mode
Jog Forward 1
06.008 Hold Zero Frequency
06.031
0 Catch A
Run Reverse 06.009
T12 digital 3 Spinning Motor
06.032
Enable Sequencer
Forward / Reverse 0 06.040
Latching
Menu 8 06.033
01.011 Reference On
Run 0
T13 digital input 4
06.034
Jog Reverse 0
06.037
Not Stop 0 01.012 Reverse Select
06.039
0
Hardware
Enable 06.029
01.013 Jog Select
Forward Limit Switch 06.035
0
Reverse Limit Switch 06.036
0
RUN
Inverter enable
STOP/ RESET
RESET
Auxiliary RFC only

Menu 2
Logic 1 Ramp enable
Open loop only Menu 3
0 1 Hard Frequency
01.049 Pr 01.049 = 4 reference enable
06.006 Injection
Braking Level
Reference 06.007 Injection
Selected Braking Time
Indicator 06.012
Enable Stop
Key
Clock control
06.024 Reset Energy Meter 06.023 Time Before Filter

Change Due
06.019 Date/Time
06.016 Date Selector 06.021 Time Between Filter
Changes
0 Set
06.017 Time 1 Po.up Filter Change
2 Run 06.022 Required / Change 06.028 Running Cost
Day Of 3 Acc.po Done
06.018 Week 4 AI
5 Re.PAD Energy Cost
06.027
6 Slot.1 Per kWh
06.020 Date Format 06.025
Output Energy Meter
06.026
Output
Power 05.003
Key

terminals mm.ppp
parameter

terminals parameter

Issue Number: 7
Range (Ú) Default(Ö)

Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
CoASt (0), rP (1), rP.dc I (2), dc I (3), td.dc I (4),
06.001 Stop Mode rP (1) RW Txt US
diS (5), No.rP (6)
06.002 Limit Switch Stop Mode StoP (0), rP (1) rP (1) RW Txt US
06.003 Supply Loss Mode diS (0), rP.StoP (1), ridE.th (2), Lt.StoP (3) diS (0) RW Txt US
06.004 Start/Stop Logic Select 0 to 6 50 Hz: 5, 60 Hz: 5 RW Num US
06.006 Injection Braking Level 0.0 to 150.0 % 100.0 % RW Num RA US
06.007 Injection Braking Time 0.0 to 25.0 s 1.0 s RW Num US
06.008 Hold Zero Frequency Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.009 Catch A Spinning Motor diS (0), EnAbLE (1), Fr.OnLy (2), rv.OnLy (3) diS (0) RW Txt US
06.010 Enable Conditions 0 to 4087 RO Bin ND NC PT
06.011 Sequencer State Machine Inputs 0 to 127 RO Bin ND NC PT
06.012 Enable Stop Key Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.013 Enable Auxiliary Key diS (0), Fd.rv (1), rEv (2) diS (0) RW Txt US
06.014 Disable Auto Reset On Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.015 Drive Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
06.016 Date 00-00-00 to 31-12-99 RW Date ND NC PT
06.017 Time 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 RW Time ND NC PT
Sun (0), Non (1), tuE (2), UEd (3),thu (4),
06.018 Day Of Week RO Txt ND NC PT
Fri (5), SAt (6)
SEt (0), Po.uP (1), run (2), Acc.Po (3), AI (4),
06.019 Date/Time Selector Po.uP (1) RW Txt US
rE.PAd (5), SLot.1 (6)
06.020 Date Format Std (0), US (1) Std (0) RW Txt US
06.021 Time Between Filter Changes 0 to 30000 Hours 0 Hours RW Num US
06.022 Filter Change Required /Change Done Off (0) or On (1) RW Bit ND NC
06.023 Time Before Filter Change Due 0 to 30000 Hours RO Num ND NC PT PS
06.024 Reset Energy Meter Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit
06.025 Energy Meter: MWh ±999.9 MWh RO Num ND NC PT PS
06.026 Energy Meter: kWh ±99.99 kWh RO Num ND NC PT PS
06.027 Energy Cost Per kWh 0.0 to 600.0 0.0 RW Num US
06.028 Running Cost ±32000 RO Num ND NC PT
06.029 Hardware Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RO Bit NC
06.030 Run Forward Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.031 Jog Forward Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.032 Run Reverse Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.033 Forward/Reverse Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.034 Run Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.035 Forward Limit Switch Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.036 Reverse Limit Switch Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.037 Jog Reverse Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.038 User Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit NC
06.039 Not Stop Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.040 Enable Sequencer Latching Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.041 Drive Event Flags 0 to 3 0 RW Bin NC
06.042 Control Word 0 to 32767 0 RW Bin NC
06.043 Control Word Enable 0 to 1 0 RW Num NC US
06.045 Cooling Fan control 0 to 5 2 RW Num US
06.046 Supply Loss Hold Disable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.047 Input Phase Loss Detection Mode FuLL (0), rIPPLE (1), diS (2) FuLL (0) RW Txt US
110 V drive: 205 V, 200 V drive: 205 V
06.048 Supply Loss Detection Level 0 to VM_SUPPLY_LOSS_LEVEL V 400 V drive: 410 V, 575 V drive: 540 V RW Num RA US
690 V drive: 540 V
06.051 Allow Motoring Load Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
06.052 Motor Pre-heat Current Magnitude 0 to 100 % 0% RW Num US
06.059 Output Phase Loss Detection Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.060 Standby Mode Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.061 Standby Mode Mask 0 to 15 0 RW Bin US
06.071 Slow Rectifier Charge Rate Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
110 V drive: 390 V, 200 V drive: 390 V
06.073 Braking IGBT Lower Threshold 0 to VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET V 400 V drive: 780 V, 575 V drive: 930 V RW Num US
690 V drive: 1120 V
110 V drive: 390 V, 200 V drive: 390 V
06.074 Braking IGBT Upper Threshold 0 to VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET V 400 V drive: 780 V, 575 V drive: 930 V RW Num US
690 V drive: 1120 V
06.075 Low Voltage Braking IGBT Threshold 0 to VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET V 0V RW Num US
06.076 Low Voltage Braking IGBT Threshold Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit
06.077 Low DC Link Operation Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
06.089 DC Injection Active Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RO Bit NC PT US
IP IP address Mac Mac address Date Date parameter Time Time parameter SMP Slot,menu,parameter Chr Character parameter Ver Version number

Issue Number: 7
10.7 Menu 7: Analog I/O

Analog Input
1 Control
Analog Input 1
At Maximum 07.051
Analog Input 1 Analog Analog Input 1
Reference
Maximum Input 1 Current Analog Destination B
07.064 Input 1
Reference 07.063 Loop Loss
Analog Input 07.090 ≥1
1 Offset Any
07.028 07.001 unprotected
07.030 07.010
Analog Input 1 variable
Analog Input 1 parameter
+ Destination A Analog
??.??? Ref. 1
V/f 07.007 + 07.008
01.036
Analog Input Analog
Analog Input 1 Mode Input 1 x(-1) ??.???
1 Minimum 07.061 Scaling
Reference
07.009 Analog
07.062 Input 1 Invert
Analog Input 1
At Minimum Reference
Analog Input
2 Control
Analog Input 2
At Maximum 07.052
Analog Input 2 Analog Input 2
Reference Analog Destination B
Maximum
Reference 07.067 07.068 Input 2
Analog Input 07.094 ≥1
2 Offset Any
07.002 unprotected
07.031 07.014
Analog Input 2 variable
Analog Input 2 parameter
+ Destination A Analog
??.??? Ref. 2
V/f 07.011 + 07.012
01.037
Analog Input 2 Analog Input Analog
Minimum 07.065 2 Mode Input 2 x(-1) ??.???
Reference Scaling
07.013 Analog
07.066 Input 2 Invert
Analog Input 2
At Minimum Reference
Analog Output
07.055
1 Control
Analog Output 07.099 ≥1

1 Source B
Analog Output 07.019

1 Source A
Any variable Analog Output 1

parameter
??.??
OL>
RFC-A> 02.001 07.020
Post-ramp ??.?? Analog
reference Output 1
Scaling
Key

terminals mm.ppp
parameter

terminals parameter

Issue Number: 7

Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
07.001 Analog Input 1 (T2) ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT FI
07.002 Analog Input 2 (T5) 0.00 to 100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT FI
07.004 Stack Temperature ±250 °C RO Num ND NC PT
07.005 Auxiliary Temperature ±250 °C RO Num ND NC PT
4-20.S (-6), 20-4.S (-5), 4-20.L (-4),
20-4.L (-3), 4-20.H (-2), 20-4.H (-1),
07.007 Analog Input 1 Mode (T2) VoLt (6) RW Txt US
0-20 (0), 20-0 (1), 4-20.tr (2), 20-4.tr (3), 4-20
(4), 20-4 (5), VoLt (6)
07.008 Analog Input 1 Scaling (T2) 0.000 to 10.000 1.000 RW Num US
07.009 Analog Input 1 Invert (T2) Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
07.010 Analog Input 1 Destination A (T2) 0.000 to 30.999 1.036 RW Num DE PT US
07.011 Analog Input 2 Mode (T5) VoLt (6), dIg (7) VoLt (6) RW Txt US
07.012 Analog Input 2 Scaling (T5) 0.000 to 10.000 1.000 RW Num US
07.013 Analog Input 2 Invert (T5) Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
07.014 Analog Input 2 Destination A (T5) 0.000 to 30.999 1.037 RW Num DE PT US
07.019 Analog Output 1 Source A (T7) 0.000 to 30.999 2.001 RW Num PT US
07.020 Analog Output 1 Scaling (T7) 0.000 to 40.000 1.000 RW Num US
07.026 Analog Input 1 Preset on Current Loss (T2) 4.00 to 20.00 4.00 RW Num US
07.028 Analog Input 1 Current Loop Loss (T2) Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
07.030 Analog Input 1 Offset (T2) ±100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
07.031 Analog Input 2 Offset (T5) ±100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
07.034 Inverter Temperature ±250 °C RO Num ND NC PT
07.035 Percentage Of d.c. Link Thermal Trip Level 0 to 100 % RO Num ND NC PT
07.036 Percentage Of Drive Thermal Trip Level 0 to 100 % RO Num ND NC PT
07.037 Temperature Nearest To Trip Level 0 to 29999 RO Num ND NC PT
d44081 (0), 84 (1), Pt1000 (2),
07.046 Thermistor Type d44081 (0) RW Txt US
Pt2000 (3),othEr (4)
07.047 Thermistor Feedback 0 to 4000 Ω RO Num ND NC PT FI
07.048 Thermistor Trip Threshold 0 to 4000 Ω 3300 Ω RW Num US
07.049 Thermistor Reset Threshold 0 to 4000 Ω 1800 Ω RW Num US
07.050 Thermistor Temperature -50 to 300 °C RO Num ND NC PT FI
07.051 Analog Input 1 Control (T2) 0 to 5 0 RW Num US
07.052 Analog Input 2 Control (T5) 0 to 5 0 RW Num US
07.055 Analog Output 1 Control (T7) 0 to 15 0 RW Num US
07.061 Analog Input 1 Minimum Reference (T2) 0.00 to 100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
07.062 Analog Input 1 At Minimum Reference (T2) ±100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
07.063 Analog Input 1 Maximum Reference (T2) 0.00 to 100.00 % 100.00 % RW Num US
07.064 Analog Input 1 At Maximum Reference (T2) ±100.00 % 100.00 % RW Num US
07.065 Analog Input 2 Minimum Reference (T5) 0.00 to 100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
07.066 Analog Input 2 At Minimum Reference (T5) ±100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
07.067 Analog Input 2 Maximum Reference (T5) 0.00 to 100.00 % 100.00 % RW Num US
07.068 Analog Input 2 At Maximum Reference (T5) ±100.00 % 100.00 % RW Num US
07.090 Analog Input 1 Destination B (T2) 0.000 to 30.999 RO Num DE PT US
07.094 Analog Input 2 Destination B (T5) 0.000 to 30.999 RO Num DE PT US
07.099 Analog Output 1 Source B (T7) 0.000 to 30.999 RO Num PT US

Issue Number: 7

Issue Number: 7
10.8 Menu 8: Digital I/O

T10 DI1 Control T10 DO1 Control

08.081 08.091
T10 DI/O 01 Source
/ Destination B
08.121
T10 Digital I/O 1

≥1 source / destination A
08.021
T10 Digital I/O T10 Digital I/O At Zero

??.??? Frequency
1 State 01 Output Select
08.001 08.031 10.003
x(-1) ??.???
Any bit
parameter
T10 Digital I/O 1
0 or 1
08.011 T10 Digital
I/O 1 Invert Any
unprotected
2 or 3 bit parameter
??.???
Frequency or
PWM output
x(-1) ??.???
T11 DI 2 Control
08.082
T11 Digital T11 DI 02
08.122
input 2 invert Destination B
T11 Digital ≥1
input 2 state 08.002 08.012
T11 Digital Input 02
08.022
Destination A
Any unprotected
T11 Digital input 2 bit parameter
??.???
User
06.038
enable
x(-1)
??.???
Key

terminals mm.ppp
parameter

terminals parameter

Issue Number: 7
T12 DI3 Control

08.083
T12 DI 03
Destination B
08.123
T12 Digital input

≥1 3 destination A
T12 Digital 08.023
T12 Digital Input 3 Invert
Input 3 State
08.003 08.013 Any unprotected
T12 Digital Input 3 bit parameter
??.???
Run forward
06.030
x(-1)
??.???
T13 DI4 Control

08.084
T13 DI 04
Destination B
08.124
T13 Digital input

T13 Digital 08.024
T13 Digital Input 4 Invert
Input 4 State
??.???
Run reverse
06.032
x(-1)
??.???
T14 DI5 Control

08.085
T14 DI 05
Destination B
08.125
T14 Digital input

T14 Digital T14 Digital
T14 Digital 08.025
Input 5 Select Input 5 State
Input 5 Invert
08.035
??.??? Reference
Select Flag 1
0
01.041
1
x(-1)
??.???
1 to 3 Thermistor mode
Frequency
input

Issue Number: 7
Figure 10-13 Menu 8 logic (cont)
Relay 1
control
08.098
Relay 1
08.128
source B
Relay 1 Output
Relay 1 08.028
Source A
Invert
08.018 Any bit
parameter
Relay 1
??.??? Drive OK
Output State
10.001
08.008
x(-1)
??.???
0V
Figure 10-14 SAFE TORQUE OFF Logic diagram (frame 1 to 4)
STO Input 01 State
31
&
&
31
STO Input 02 State
Figure 10-15 SAFE TORQUE OFF Logic diagram (frame 5 to 6)
STO Input 01 State
31
&
&
35
STO Input 02 State

Issue Number: 7
Figure 10-16 Menu 8 logic (cont)

Keypad Run
Button State Keypad Run Button Keypad Run
Invert/Toggle Button Destination
08.041 08.051 08.061 Any
unprotected
bit parameter
Run button 0 ??.???
1 00.000
2 ??.???
x(-1)
Toggle
Keypad Auxiliary Keypad

Button State Keypad Auxiliary Auxiliary Button
Button Invert/Toggle Destination
08.042 08.052 08.062 Any
unprotected
bit parameter
Auxiliary Button* ??.???

0
1 00.000
2 ??.???
x(-1)
Key
Toggle
X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter
* The auxiliary button will be available with the future remote keypad.

Issue Number: 7

Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
08.001 Digital I/O 1 State (T10) Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.002 Digital Input 2 State (T11) Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.008 Relay 1 Output State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.011 Digital I/O 1 Invert (T10) Not.Inv (0), InvErt (1) Not.Inv (0) RW Txt US
08.012 Digital Input 2 Invert (T11) Not.Inv (0), InvErt (1) Not.Inv (0) RW Txt US
08.018 Relay 1 Invert Not.Inv (0), InvErt (1) Not.Inv (0) RW Txt US
08.020 Digital I/O Read Word 0 to 2048 RO Num ND NC PT
08.021 Digital IO1 Source / Destination A (T10) 0.000 to 30.999 10.003 RW Num DE PT US
08.022 Digital Input 02 Destination A (T11) 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
08.028 Relay 1 Output Source A 0.000 to 30.999 10.001 RW Num PT US
08.031 Digital I/O 01 Output Select (T10) InPut (0), OutPut (1), Fr (2), PuLSE (3) OutPut (1) RW Txt US
08.035 Digital Input 5 Select (T14) InPut (0), th.Sct (1), th (2), th.Notr (3), Fr (4) InPut (0) RW Txt US
08.039 STO Input 01 State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.040 STO Input 02 State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.041 Keypad Run Button State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.042 Keypad Auxiliary Button State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.043 24 V Supply Input State Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
08.051 Keypad Run Button Invert / Toggle Not.Inv (0), InvErt (1), toggLE (2) Not.Inv (0) RW Txt US
08.052 Keypad Auxiliary Button Invert / Toggle Not.Inv (0), InvErt (1), toggLE (2) Not.Inv (0) RW Txt US
08.053 24 V Supply Input Invert Not.Inv (0), InvErt (1), Not.Inv (0) RW Txt US
08.061 Keypad Run Button Destination 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
08.062 Keypad Auxiliary Button Destination 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
08.063 24 V Supply Input Destination 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
08.081 DI1 Control (T10) 0 to 26 0 RW Num US
08.091 DO1 Control (T10) 0 to 21 0 RW Num US
08.098 Relay 1 Control 0 to 21 0 RW Num US
08.121 DI/O 01 Source / Destination B (T10) 0.000 to 30.999 RO Num DE PT US
08.122 DI 02 Destination B (T11) 0.000 to 30.999 RO Num DE PT US
08.128 Relay 01 Source B 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num PT US

Issue Number: 7

Issue Number: 7
10.9 Menu 9: Programmable logic, motorized pot, binary sum and timers
Figure 10-17 Menu 9 logic diagram: Programmable logic
Any bit Logic Function 1

parameter 09.005
Source 1 Invert
??.???
Logic Function Logic Function
1 Output 1 Destination
Logic Function 1
??.??? Output Invert 09.001 09.010
x(-1) Any
09.008 unprotected
bit
parameter
09.004 Logic Function 1
Source 1 ??.???
09.009
parameter 09.007 x(-1) Logic Function
Source 2 Invert ??.???
1 Delay
??.???
??.??? x(-1)
Logic Function
09.006
1 Source 2

parameter Source 1 Invert 09.015
??.???
Logic Function Logic Function
2 Output 2 Destination
??.??? Logic Function 2 09.002 09.020

x(-1)
Output Invert 09.018 Any
unprotected
bit
parameter
Logic Function 2
09.014
Source 1 ??.???
09.019
parameter 09.017 x(-1) Logic Function
Source 2 Invert ??.???
2 Delay
??.???
??.??? x(-1)
Key
09.016 Logic Function 2
Source 2 X Input
X mm.ppp Read-write (RW)
terminals parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 7
Figure 10-18 Menu 9 logic diagram: Motorized pot and binary sum
Motorized
Pot. Bipolar Motorized Pot.
Motorized Output Motorized Pot.
Select
Pot. Rate Destination
09.022
09.023
09.003 09.025
Motorized Pot. Any
Up unprotected
variable
09.026 parameter
??.???
M 09.024
Motorized Pot.
??.???
Scaling
09.027 Function disabled if set
to a non valid destination
Motorized Pot.
Down
09.028 09.021 Motorized Pot.

Mode
Motorized Pot.
Reset
Binary Sum
Binary Sum Output Binary Sum
Offset Destination
09.034 09.032 09.033
09.029
Any
Binary Sum unprotected
Ones bit
parameter
+ ??.???
+
09.030 Σ
Binary Sum ??.???
Twos
Function disabled if set
to a non valid destination
09.031
Key
Binary Sum
Fours
X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 7
Figure 10-19 Menu 9 logic diagram: Timers

Timer 1
Output Timer 1
Timer 1 Destination
Invert 09.042 09.043
Any
09.035 Timer 1 Start Date 09.041 unprotected
bit
Timer 1 parameter
09.036 Timer 1 Start Time
Enable
??.???
09.040 09.037 Timer 1 Stop Date
09.038 Timer 1 Stop Time x(-1)

??.???
Timer 1 Repeat Timer disabled if set
09.039
Function to a non valid destination
Timer 2
Output Timer 2
Timer 2 Destination
Invert 09.052 09.053
Any
09.045 Timer 2 Start Date 09.051 unprotected
bit
Timer 2 parameter
09.046 Timer 2 Start Time
Enable
??.???
09.050 09.047 Timer 2 Stop Date
09.048 Timer 2 Stop Time x(-1)

??.???
Timer 2 Repeat Timer disabled if set
09.049
Function to a non valid destination
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 7
Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
09.001 Logic Function 1 Output Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
09.002 Logic Function 2 Output Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
09.003 Motorized Pot Output ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT PS
09.004 Logic Function 1 Source 1 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
09.005 Logic Function 1 Source 1 Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
09.008 Logic Function 1 Output Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
09.009 Logic Function 1 Delay ±25.0 s 0.0 s RW Num US
09.010 Logic Function 1 Destination 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
09.018 Logic Function 2 Output Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
09.019 Logic Function 2 Delay ±25.0 s 0.0 s RW Num US
09.020 Logic Function 2 Destination 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
09.021 Motorized Pot Mode 0 to 4 0 RW Num US
09.022 Motorized Pot Bipolar Select Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
09.023 Motorized Pot Rate 0 to 250 s 20 s RW Num US
09.024 Motorized Pot Scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
09.025 Motorized Pot Destination 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
09.026 Motorized Pot Up Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
09.027 Motorized Pot Down Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
09.028 Motorized Pot Reset Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
09.029 Binary Sum Ones Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit
09.030 Binary Sum Twos Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit
09.031 Binary Sum Fours Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit
09.032 Binary Sum Output 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC PT
09.033 Binary Sum Destination 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
US
09.034 Binary Sum Offset 0 to 248 0 RW Num
09.035 Timer 1 Start Date 00-00-00 to 31-12-99 00-00-00 RW Date US

09.036 Timer 1 Start Time 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 00:00:00 RW Time US
09.037 Timer 1 Stop Date 00-00-00 to 31-12-99 00-00-00 RW Date US
09.038 Timer 1 Stop Time 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 00:00:00 RW Time US
09.039 Timer 1 Repeat Function NonE (0), 1 (1), 2 (2), 3 (3), 4 (4), 5 (5), 6 (6), 7 (7) NonE (0) RW Txt US
09.040 Timer 1 Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
09.041 Timer 1 Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
09.042 Timer 1 Output Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
09.043 Timer 1 Destination 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
09.045 Timer 2 Start Date 00-00-00 to 31-12-99 00-00-00 RW Date US
09.046 Timer 2 Start Time 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 00:00:00 RW Time US
09.047 Timer 2 Stop Date 00-00-00 to 31-12-99 00-00-00 RW Date US
09.048 Timer 2 Stop Time 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 00:00:00 RW Time US
09.049 Timer 2 Repeat Function NonE (0), 1 (1), 2 (2), 3 (3), 4 (4), 5 (5), 6 (6), 7 (7) NonE (0) RW Txt US
09.050 Timer 2 Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
09.051 Timer 2 Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
09.052 Timer 2 Output Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
09.053 Timer 2 Destination 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US

Issue Number: 7
10.10 Menu 10: Status and trips

Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
10.001 Drive OK Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.002 Drive Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.003 Zero Frequency Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.004 Running At Or Below Minimum Frequency Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.005 Below Set Frequency Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.006 At Frequency Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.007 Above Set Frequency Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.008 Rated Load Reached Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.009 Current Limit Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.010 Regenerating Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.011 Braking IGBT Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.012 Braking Resistor Alarm Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.013 Reverse Direction Commanded Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.014 Reverse Direction Running Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.015 Supply Loss Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.016 Under Voltage Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.017 Motor Overload Alarm Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.018 Drive Over-temperature Alarm Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.019 Drive Warning Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.020 Trip 0 0 to 255 RO Txt ND NC PT PS
10.030 Braking Resistor Rated Power 0.0 to 99999.9 kW 0.0 kW RW Num US
10.031 Braking Resistor Thermal Time Constant 0.00 to 1500.00 s 0.00 s RW Num US
10.032 External Trip Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
10.033 Drive Reset Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit NC
10.034 Number Of Auto-reset Attempts NonE (0), 1 (1), 2 (2), 3 (3), 4 (4), 5 (5),inF (6) NonE (0) RW Txt US
10.035 Auto-reset Delay 0.0 to 600.0 s 1.0 s RW Num US
10.036 Auto-reset Hold Drive OK Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
10.037 Action On Trip Detection 0 to 31 0 RW Num US
10.038 User Trip 0 to 255 RW Num ND NC
10.039 Braking Resistor Thermal Accumulator 0.0 to 100.0 % RO Num ND NC PT
10.040 Status Word 0 to 32767 RO Num ND NC PT
10.041 Trip 0 Date 00-00-00 to 31-12-99 RO Date ND NC PT PS
10.042 Trip 0 Time 00:00:00 to 23:59:59 RO Time ND NC PT PS
10.061 Braking Resistor Resistance 0.00 to 10000.00 Ω 0.00 Ω RW Num US
10.064 Remote Keypad Battery Low Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.065 Autotune Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.066 Limit Switch Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.069 Additional Status Bits 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT

Issue Number: 7

Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
10.070 Trip 0 Sub-trip Number 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT PS
10.080 Stop Motor Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.081 Phase Loss Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.090 Drive Ready Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
Inh (0), rdy (1), StoP (2), rES (3), run (4), S.LoSS
(5), rES (6), dc.inJ (7), rES (8), Error (9),
10.101 Drive Status RO Txt ND NC PT
ActivE (10), rES (11), rES (12),
rES (13), HEAt (14), UU (15)
10.102 Trip Reset Source 0 to 1023 RO Num ND NC PT PS
10.103 Trip Time Identifier -2147483648 to 2147483647 ms RO Num ND NC PT
NonE (0), br.rES (1), OV.Ld (2), rES (3),
d.OV.Ld (4), tuning (5), LS (6), rES (7), rES (8),
10.104 Active Alarm RO Txt ND NC PT
OPt.AL (9), rES (10), rES (11),
rES(12), Lo.AC (13), I.AC.Lt (14)
10.106 Potential Drive Damage Conditions 0 to 3 RO Bin ND NC PT PS
10.107 Low AC Alarm Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
10.108 Reversed cooling fan detected Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND PT

Issue Number: 7
10.11 Menu 11: General drive set-up

Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
11.018 Status Mode Parameter 1 0.000 to 30.999 2.001 RW Num PT US
11.019 Status Mode Parameter 2 0.000 to 30.999 4.020 RW Num PT US
11.020 Reset Serial Communications Off (0) or On (1) RW Bit ND NC
11.021 Customer Defined Scaling 0.000 to 10.000 1.000 RW Num US
11.022 Parameter Displayed At Power-up 0.000 to 0.080 0.010 RW Num PT US
11.023 Serial Address 1 to 247 1 RW Num US
8.2NP (0), 8.1NP (1), 8.1EP (2), 8.1OP (3),
11.024 Serial Mode 8.2NP E (4), 8.1NP E (5), 8.1EP E (6), 8.1OP E (7), 8.2NP (0) RW Txt US
7.1EP (8), 7.1OP (9), 7.1EP E (10), 7.1OP E (11)
300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2), 2400 (3), 4800 (4),
11.025 Serial Baud Rate 9600 (5), 19200 (6), 38400 (7), 57600 (8), 76800 (9), 19200 (6) RW Txt US
115200 (10)
11.026 Minimum Comms Transmit Delay 0 to 250 ms 2 ms RW Num US
11.027 Silent Period 0 to 250 ms 0 ms RW Num US
11.028 Drive Derivative 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC PT
11.029 Software Version 00.00.00 to 99.99.99 RO Ver ND NC PT
11.030 User Security Code 0 to 9999 RW Num ND NC PT US
11.031 User Drive Mode OPEn.LP (1), rFC-A (2) RW Txt ND NC PT US
11.032 Maximum Heavy Duty Rating 0.00 to 9999.99 A RO Num ND NC PT
11.033 Drive Rated Voltage 110V (0), 200V (1), 400V (2), 575V (3), 690V (4) RO Txt ND NC PT
AV (0), AI (1), AV.Pr (2), AI.Pr (3),
11.034 Drive Configuration PrESEt (4), PAd (5), PAd.rEF (6), E.Pot (7), AV (0) RW Txt PT US
torque (8), Pid (9)
11.035 Power Software Version 00.00.00 to 99.99.99 RO Ver ND NC PT
11.036 NV Media Card File Previously Loaded 0 to 999 0 RO Num NC PT
11.037 NV Media Card File Number 0 to 999 0 RW Num
11.038 NV Media Card File Type NonE (0), OPEn.LP (1), rFC-A (2) RO Txt ND NC PT
11.039 NV Media Card File Version 0 to 9999 RO Num ND NC PT
11.042 Parameter Cloning NonE (0), rEAd (1), Prog (2), Auto (3), boot (4) NonE (0) RW Txt NC US
11.043 Load Defaults NonE (0), Std (1), US (2) NonE (0) RW Txt NC
LEVEL.0 (0), ALL (1), r.onLy.0 (2), r.onLy.A (3),
11.044 User Security Status LEVEL.0 (0) RW Txt ND PT
StAtUS (4), no.Acc (5)
11.045 Select Motor 2 Parameters 1 (0), 2 (1) 1 (0) RW Txt US
11.046 Defaults Previously Loaded 0 to 2000 RO Num ND NC PT US
11.052 Serial Number LS 0 to 999999 RO Num ND NC PT
11.053 Serial Number MS 0 to 999999 RO Num ND NC PT
11.054 Drive Date Code 0 to 9999 RO Num ND NC PT
11.060 Maximum Rated Current 0.000 to 999.999 A RO Num ND NC PT
11.061 Full Scale Current Kc 0.000 to 999.999 A RO Num ND NC PT
11.063 Product Type 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC PT
11.064 Product Identifier Characters 300 (1295134768) to (2147483647) RO Chr ND NC PT
11.065 Frame size and voltage code 0 to 999 RO Num ND NC PT
11.066 Power Stage Identifier 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC PT
11.067 Control Board Identifier 0 to 255 RO Num ND NC PT
11.068 Drive current rating 0 to 32767 RO Num ND NC PT
11.070 Core Parameter Database Version 0.00 to 99.99 RO Num ND NC PT
11.072 NV Media Card Create Special File 0 to 1 0 RW Num NC
11.073 NV Media Card Type NonE (0), rES (1), Sd.CArd (2) RO Num ND NC PT
11.075 NV Media Card Read-only Flag Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
11.076 NV Media Card Warning Suppression Flag Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
11.077 NV Media Card File Required Version 0 to 9999 RW Num ND NC PT
11.079 Drive Name Characters 1-4 (-2147483648) to (-2147483647) - - - - (757935405) RW Chr PT US
11.084 Drive Mode OPEn.LP (1), rFC-A (2) RO Txt ND NC PT
11.085 Security Status NonE (0), r.onLy.A (1), StAtUS (2), no.Acc (3) RO Txt ND NC PT PS
11.086 Menu Access Status LEVEL.0 (0), ALL (1) RO Txt ND NC PT PS
11.091 Additional Identifier Characters 1 (-2147483648) to (2147483647) RO Chr ND NC PT
11.094 Disable String Mode Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit PT US
11.097 AI ID Code NonE (0), Sd.CArd (1), rS-485 (2), boot (3), rS-485 (4) RO Txt ND NC PT

Issue Number: 7
10.12 Menu 12: Threshold detectors, variable selectors and brake control function
Threshold Threshold
Detector 1 Threshold Detector 1
Detector 1 Output Threshold
Level Detector 1
Destination Any
Any variable 12.004 12.001
Threshold 12.007 unprotected
parameter Detector 1 bit parameter
??.??? ??.???
??.??? x(-1) ??.???
12.003 12.005 12.006

Threshold Threshold Threshold
Detector 1 Detector 1 Detector 1
Source Hysteresis Output Invert
Threshold Threshold
Detector 2 Threshold Detector 2
Detector 2 Output Threshold
Level Detector 2
Destination Any
Any variable 12.024 12.002 unprotected
Threshold 12.027
parameter Detector 2 bit parameter
??.??? ??.???
??.??? x(-1) ??.???
12.023 12.025 12.026 All parameters are shown

Threshold Threshold Threshold at their default setting
Detector 2 Detector 2 Detector 2
Source Hysteresis Invert
Key

X mm.ppp Hysteresis
terminals parameter Threshold
level
X Output mm.ppp Read-only (RO) t
X
terminals parameter
Threshold
The parameters are all shown in their default settings output
t

Issue Number: 7
Figure 10-21 Menu 12 logic diagram (continued)
Variable Selector 1
Any variable
parameter Variable
Variable Selector 1 Selector 1 Variable
??.??? Source 1 Scaling Output Selector 1 Any
12.013 Destination unprotected
variable
12.012 12.011
??.??? parameter
Variable Selector 1 ??.???
12.010
12.008 Variable Selector 1 Mode
Source 1
Any variable 12.015 Variable Selector 1
parameter Control ??.???
Variable Selector 1
??.??? Source 2 Scaling
12.014
12.016
??.??? Variable
Selector 1
Variable Selector 1 Enable
12.009
Source 2
Variable Selector 2
Any variable Variable
parameter Selector 2 Variable
Variable Selector 2 Enable Selector 2 Variable
??.??? Source 1 Scaling Any
12.036 Output Selector 2
Destination unprotected
12.033
variable
12.032 12.031 parameter
??.???
12.030 Variable Selector 2 ??.???

12.028 Variable Selector 2 Mode
Source 1
Any variable 12.035 Variable Selector 2
parameter Control ??.???
Variable Selector 2
??.??? Source 2 Scaling
12.034
Key
??.???
12.029 Variable Selector 2 terminals mm.ppp
Source 2 parameter

terminals parameter

Issue Number: 7
The brake control functions are provided to allow well co-ordinated operation of an external brake with the drive. While both hardware and
software are designed to high standards of quality and robustness, they are not intended for use as safety functions, i.e. where a fault or
failure would result in a risk of injury. In any application where the incorrect operation of the brake release mechanism could result in injury,
WARNING independent protection devices of proven integrity must also be incorporated.
The control terminal relay can be selected as an output to release a brake. If a drive is set up in this manner and a drive replacement takes
place, prior to programming the drive on initial power up, the brake may be released.
When drive terminals are programmed to non default settings the result of incorrect or delayed programming must be considered. The use of
WARNING
an NV media card in boot mode can ensure drive parameters are immediately programmed to avoid this situation.
Figure 10-22 Brake function
Percentage
flux
05.034 +
90% _
OL mode RFC-A
Current Flux and
Mode
magnitude Current
Detection BC Brake Delay
04.001 (12.046)
+
Ramp Hold
_ (02.003)
BC Lower Current Latch
Threshold (12.043)
Hysteriesis 12.040
BC Upper Current Threshold (12.042) BC Post-brake
BC Lower Current Threshold (12.043) Release Delay BC Brake
(12.047) Release
Drive Active
Output Frequency
Frequency Detection
10.002
OL mode
05.001 or RFC-A
Hold Zero
mode
Frequency
Modulus (06.008)
Estimated +
Frequency _
Latch
03.002
BC Brake Release
Frequency (12.044)
BC Brake Apply
+
Frequency (12.045)
01.011
Reference On
+
BC Brake Apply
Through Zero _
Threshold (12.051)
Key

terminals mm.ppp
parameter

terminals parameter

Issue Number: 7
Figure 10-23 Brake sequence

Pr 12.044 Brake Control: Pr 12.045 Brake Control:
Brake Release Frequency Brake Apply Frequency
Pr 05.001 Output Frequency
Pr 12.042 Brake Control:
Upper Current Threshold
Pr 04.001 Current Magnitude
1. Wait for upper current threshold and brake release frequency

Pr 10.002 Drive Active 2. Pre-brake release delay
3. Post-brake release delay
4. Wait for brake apply frequency
5. Wait for zero frequency
Pr 01.011 Reference On 6. 1s delay as phase 2 of stopping sequence (Pr 06.001=1,2 or 3)
Pr 12.040 Brake Control:

Brake Release
Pr 02.003 Ramp Hold
1 2 3 4 5 6
Pr 12.046 Pr 12.047

Issue Number: 7
Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
12.001 Threshold Detector 1 Output Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
12.002 Threshold Detector 2 Output Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
12.003 Threshold Detector 1 Source 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
12.004 Threshold Detector 1 Level 0.00 to 100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
12.005 Threshold Detector 1 Hysteresis 0.00 to 25.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
12.006 Threshold Detector 1 Output Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
12.007 Threshold Detector 1 Destination 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
12.008 Variable Selector 1 Source 1 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
0 (0), 1 (1), 2 (2), 3 (3), 4 (4), 5 (5), 6 (6),
12.010 Variable Selector 1 Mode 0 (0) RW Txt US
7(7), 8 (8), 9 (9)
12.011 Variable Selector 1 Destination 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
12.012 Variable Selector 1 Output ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
12.013 Variable Selector 1 Source 1 Scaling ±4.000 1.000 RW Num US
12.015 Variable Selector 1 Control 0.00 to 100.00 0.00 RW Num US
12.016 Variable Selector 1 Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
12.023 Threshold Detector 2 Source 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
12.024 Threshold Detector 2 Level 0.00 to 100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
12.025 Threshold Detector 2 Hysteresis 0.00 to 25.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
12.026 Threshold Detector 2 Output Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
12.027 Threshold Detector 2 Destination 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
0 (0), 1 (1), 2 (2), 3 (3), 4 (4), 5 (5), 6 (6), 7 (7),
12.030 Variable Selector 2 Mode 0 (0) RW Txt US
8 (8), 9 (9)
12.031 Variable Selector 2 Destination 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
12.032 Variable Selector 2 Output ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
12.035 Variable Selector 2 Control 0.00 to 100.00 0.00 RW Num US
12.036 Variable Selector 2 Enable Off (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
12.040 BC Brake Release Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
12.041 BC Enable diS (0), rELAy (1), dig IO (2), USEr (3) diS (0) RW Txt US
12.042 BC Upper Current Threshold 0 to 200 % 50 % RW Num US
12.043 BC Lower Current Threshold 0 to 200 % 10 % RW Num US
12.044 BC Brake Release Frequency 0.00 to 20.00 Hz 1.00 Hz RW Num US
12.045 BC Brake Apply Frequency 0.00 to 20.00 Hz 2.00 Hz RW Num US
12.046 BC Brake Delay 0.0 to 25.0 s 1.0 s RW Num US
12.047 BC Post-brake Release Delay 0.0 to 25.0 s 1.0 s RW Num US
12.050 BC Initial Direction rEf (0), For (1), rEv (2) rEf (0) RW Txt US
12.051 BC Brake Apply Through Zero Threshold 0.00 to 25.00 Hz 0.00 Hz RW Num US

Issue Number: 7
10.13 Menu 14: User PID controller

Figure 10-24 Menu 14 Logic diagram
PID1 Feed-forwards
Reference Source
14.002
Any variable
parameter PID1 Feed-forwards
Reference
??.???
14.019
??.???
PID1 Reference
Source
14.003
Any variable
parameter
??.???
+ PID1 14.005 PID1 Reference
Invert
Reference
??.??? + PID1 Error
PID1 Reference Scaling
14.020 0 +
14.023
14.007 14.022
14.025
1 PID1 Reference _
PID1 Digital x(-1)
Reference Slew-Rate
PID1 Feedback
Source
PID1 Feedback
14.004 Invert
Any variable 14.006
parameter PID1
Feedback
??.???
+ PID1 Feedback Scaling
14.021 0
14.024
??.??? +
1
x(-1)
PID1 Digital
14.026
Feedback
PID1 Enable
14.008
Logic 1
Any bit
parameter 1
??.??? Logic 1
Any bit
0
parameter 1
??.??? ??.???
0
Source ??.???
14.009
not used
PID1 Enable
Source 1 Source
14.027
not used
PID1 Enable
Source 2

Issue Number: 7
PID1 Output
14.013
Upper Limit
PID1 Integral
Hold PID1 Output
14.014 PID1
Lower Limit
14.017 Destination
14.010
PID1 Symmetrical 14.016 Any
PID1 Proportional 14.018 unprotected
Gain Limit Enable
variable
14.011 parameter
PID1 Output PID1 Output
Scaling
+ ??.???
PID1 Integral
Gain +
14.001 14.015
14.012
??.???
PID1 Derivative
Gain
Key

X terminals mm.ppp
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Issue Number: 7

Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
14.001 PID1 Output ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
14.002 PID1 Feed-forwards Reference Source 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
14.003 PID1 Reference Source 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
14.004 PID1 Feedback Source 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
14.005 PID1 Reference Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
14.006 PID1 Feedback Invert Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
14.007 PID1 Reference Slew Rate 0.0 to 3200.0 s 0.0 s RW Num US
14.008 PID1 Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
14.009 PID1 Enable Source 1 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num PT US
14.010 PID1 Proportional Gain 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
14.011 PID1 Integral Gain 0.000 to 4.000 0.500 RW Num US
14.012 PID1 Differential Gain 0.000 to 4.000 0.000 RW Num US
14.013 PID1 Output Upper Limit 0.00 to 100.00 % 100.00 % RW Num US
14.014 PID1 Output Lower Limit ±100.00 % -100.00 % RW Num US
14.015 PID1 Output Scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
14.016 PID1 Destination 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num DE PT US
14.017 PID1 Integral Hold Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit
14.018 PID1 Symmetrical Limit Enable Off (0) or On (1) Off (0) RW Bit US
14.019 PID1 Feed-forwards Reference ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
14.020 PID1 Reference ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
14.021 PID1 Feedback ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
14.022 PID1 Error ±100.00 % RO Num ND NC PT
14.023 PID1 Reference Scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
14.024 PID1 Feedback Scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Num US
14.025 PID1 Digital Reference ±100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
14.026 PID1 Digital Feedback ±100.00 % 0.00 % RW Num US
14.027 PID1 Enable Source 2 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 RW Num PT US

Issue Number: 7
10.14 Menu 15: Option module set-up

Figure 10-25 Location of option module slot and its corresponding menu number
1. Option Module Slot 1 - Menu 15
10.14.1 Parameters common to all categories

Parameter Range(Ú) Default(Ö) Type
15.001 Module ID 0 to 65535 RO Num ND NC PT
15.002 Software Version 00.00 to 99.99 RO Num ND NC PT
15.003 Hardware Version 0.00 to 99.99 RO Num ND NC PT
15.004 Serial Number LS RO Num ND NC PT
0 to 999999
15.005 Serial Number MS RO Num ND NC PT
15.051 Software Sub-version 0 to 99 RO Num ND NC PT
The option module ID indicates the type of module that is installed in the corresponding slot. See the relevant option module user guide for more
information regarding the module.
Option module ID Module Category

0 No module installed
209 SI-I/O Automation (I/O Expansion)
443 SI-PROFIBUS Fieldbus
447 SI-DeviceNet Fieldbus
448 SI-CANopen Fieldbus

Issue Number: 7
10.15 Menu 18: Application menu 1

Range (Ú) Default(Ö)
Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
18.001 Application Menu 1 Power-down Save Integer 0 RW Num PS
18.002 Application Menu 1 Read-only Integer 2 RO Num ND NC
18.011 Application Menu 1 Read-write Integer 11 RW Num US
-32768 to 32767
0
18.031 Application Menu 1 Read-write bit 31 RW Bit US
Off (0) or On (1) Off (0)

Issue Number: 7
10.16 Menu 20: Application menu 2

Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
20.021 Application Menu 2 Read-write Long Integer 21 RW Num
20.024 Application Menu 2 Read write Long Integer 24 RW Num
-2147483648 to 2147483647 0

Issue Number: 7
10.17 Menu 21: Second motor parameters

Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
21.001 M2 Maximum Reference Clamp ±VM_POSITIVE_REF_CLAMP Hz 50Hz: 50.00 Hz, 60Hz: 60.00 Hz RW Num US
21.002 M2 Minimum Reference Clamp ±VM_NEGATIVE_REF_CLAMP2 0.00 RW Num US
A1.A2 (0), A1.Pr (1), A2.Pr (2), PrESEt (3),
21.003 M2 Reference Selector A1.A2 (0) RW Txt US
PAd (4), rES (5), PAd.rEF (6)
21.004 M2 Acceleration Rate 1 ±VM_ACCEL_RATE 5.0 RW Num US
21.005 M2 Deceleration Rate 1 ±VM_ACCEL_RATE 10.0 RW Num US
0.00 to VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF_ 50Hz: 50.00 Hz
21.006 M2 Motor Rated Frequency RW Num RA US
UNIPOLAR Hz 60Hz: 60.00 Hz
21.007 M2 Motor Rated Current ±VM_RATED_CURRENT A Maximum Heavy Duty Rating (11.032) RW Num RA US
50 Hz: 1500.0 rpm 50 Hz: 1450.0rpm
21.008 M2 Motor Rated Speed 0.0 to 80000.0 rpm RW Num US
60 Hz: 1800.0 rpm 60 Hz 1750.0 rpm
110 V drive: 230 V
200 V drive: 230 V
400 V drive 50Hz: 400 V
21.009 M2 Motor Rated Voltage ±VM_AC_VOLTAGE_SET V RW Num RA US
400 V drive 60Hz: 460 V
575 V drive: 575 V
690 V drive: 690 V
21.010 M2 Motor Rated Power Factor 0.00 to 1.00 0.85 RW Num RA US
21.011 M2 Number of Motor Poles* Auto (0) to 32 (16) Auto (0) RW Num US
21.012 M2 Stator Resistance 0.0000 to 99.9999 Ω 0.0000 Ω RW Num RA US
21.014 M2 Transient Inductance 0.000 to 500.000 mH 0.000 mH RW Num RA US
21.015 Motor 2 Active Off (0) or On (1) RO Bit ND NC PT
21.016 M2 Motor Thermal Time Constant 1 1 to 3000 s 179 s 179 s RW Num US
0.000 to
21.017 M2 Frequency Controller Proportional Gain Kp1 0.100 s/rad RW Num US
200.000 s/rad
0.00 to
21.018 M2 Frequency Controller Integral Gain Ki1 0.10 s²/rad RW Num US
655.35 s²/rad
M2 Frequency Controller Differential Feedback 0.00000 to
21.019 0.00000 1/rad RW Num US
Gain Kd1 0.65535 1/rad
21.022 M2 Current Controller Kp Gain 0.00 to 4000.00 20.00 RW Num US
21.023 M2 Current Controller Ki Gain 0.000 to 600.000 40.000 RW Num US
21.024 M2 Stator Inductance 0.00 to 5000.00 mH 0.00 mH RW Num RA US
21.025 M2 Saturation Breakpoint 1 0.0 to 100.0 % 50.0 % RW Num US
21.027 M2 Motoring Current Limit ±VM_MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT % 165.0 % 175.0 % RW Num RA US
21.028 M2 Regenerating Current Limit ±VM_MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT % 165.0 % 175.0 % RW Num RA US
21.029 M2 Symmetrical Current Limit ±VM_MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT % 165.0 % 175.0 % RW Num RA US
21.033 M2 Low Frequency Thermal Protection Mode 0 to 1 0 RW Num US
* When read via serial communications, this parameter will show pole pairs.

Issue Number: 7
10.18 Menu 22: Additional Menu 0 set-up

Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A
22.001 Parameter 00.001 Set-up 0.000 to 30.999 1.007 RW Num PT US
22.029 Parameter 00.029 Set-up 0.000 to 30.999 0.000 2.002 RW Num PT US

Issue Number: 7
Parameter Type
OL RFC-A OL RFC-A

Issue Number: 7
11 Technical data
11.1 Drive technical data
11.1.1 Power and current ratings (Derating for switching frequency and temperature)
For a full explanation of ‘Normal Duty’ and ‘Heavy Duty’ refer to section 2.2 Ratings on page 12.
Table 11-1 Maximum permissible continuous output current @ 40 °C (104 °F) ambient (size 1 to 4)
Heavy Duty
Nominal rating Maximum permissible continuous output current (A) for the following switching frequencies
Model
0.667 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
kW hp
100 V
01100017 0.25 0.33 1.7
01100024 0.37 0.5 2.4
02100042 0.75 1.0 4.2
02100056 1.1 1.5 5.6
200 V
01200017 0.25 0.33 1.7
01200024 0.37 0.5 2.4
01200033 0.55 0.75 3.3
01200042 0.75 1.0 4.2
02200024 0.37 0.5 2.4
02200033 0.55 0.75 3.3
02200042 0.75 1.0 4.2
02200056 1.1 1.5 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6
02200075 1.5 2.0 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.0
03200100 2.2 3.0 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9 7.3
04200133 3.0 3.0 13.3
04200176 4.0 5.0 17.6
400 V
02400013 0.37 0.5 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
02400018 0.55 0.75 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8
02400023 0.75 1.0 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.0
02400032 1.1 1.5 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 2.0
02400041 1.5 2.0 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 3.8 2.0
03400056 2.2 3.0 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.1 3.7 2.4
03400073 3.0 3.0 7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3 7.1 5.6 3.8
03400094 4.0 5.0 9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4 8.5 7 4.6
04400135 5.5 7.5 13.5
04400170 7.5 10.0 17

Issue Number: 7
Table 11-2 Maximum permissible continuous output current @ 40 °C (104 °F) ambient (size 5 to 6)
Nominal Maximum permissible continuous output current (A) for Nominal Maximum permissible continuous output current (A) for
Model rating the following switching frequencies rating the following switching frequencies
0.667, 1 3 4 6 8 12 16 0.667, 1 3 4 6 8 12 16
kW hp kW hp
and 2 kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz and 2 kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz
200 V
05200250 7.5 10 30 27.6 23.7 5.5 7.5 25 24.8 21.5 18.8
06200330 11 15 50 42.3 24.5 7.5 10 33.0 32 27
06200440 15 20 58 53 42.3 32.5 11 15 44.0 40 33 27.3
400 V
05400270 15 20 30 25.8 22.2 17.1 13.5 11 20 27 25.4 23.7 20.3 17.6 13.8 11.1
05400300 15 20 31 30.7 26.4 18.3 14.1 15 20 30 27.9 24 21 14.9 12.2
06400350 18.5 25 38 31 24.3 15 25 35 30 23 18.5
06400420 22 30 48 41 31 24.5 18.5 30 42 35 30 23 18.5
06400470 30 40 63 57 48 41 31 24.5 22 30 47 46 42 35 30 23 18.5
575 V
05500030 2.2 3.0 3.9 1.5 2.0 3.0
05500040 4.0 5.0 6.1 2.2 3.0 4.0
05500069 5.5 7.5 10 4.0 5.0 6.9
06500100 7.5 10.0 12 5.5 7.5 10
06500150 11.0 15.0 17 14.8 7.5 10 15 11.6
06500190 15.0 20.0 22 20.5 15 11 15 19 15.4 11.6
06500230 18.5 25.0 27 26.2 20 16 15 20 23 20 15.4 12.8
06500290 22.0 30.0 34 31 26.2 20 16.8 18.5 25 29 23.8 20 15.4 12.8
06500350 30.0 40.0 43 39.6 31 26.2 20 16.8 22 30 35 34 29.8 23.8 20 15.4 13
Table 11-3 Maximum permissible continuous output current @ 40 °C (104 °F) ambient with high IP insert installed (size 5 only)
Maximum permissible continuous output current (A) Maximum permissible continuous output current (A)
Model for the following switching frequencies for the following switching frequencies
0.667, 1 3 4 6 8 12 16 0.667, 1 3 4 6 8 12 16
200 V
05200250 25.5 25.2 24.9 24.3 23.7 22.5 21.6 25 24.8 24.3 23.8 22.5 20
400 V
05400270 17.1 15.6 14.4 12.6 11.4 9.6 8.7 17.3 15.7 14.6 12.7 11.3 9.7 8.6
05400300 19.8 19.5 18.9 17.7 16.4 14 11.8 19.8 19.5 18.9 17.7 16.2 13.8 11.7
575 V
05500030 3.9 3.0
05500040 6.1 4.0
05500069 10 6.9

Issue Number: 7
Table 11-4 Maximum permissible continuous output current @ 50 °C (122 °F) (size 1 to 4)
Heavy Duty
Maximum permissible continuous output current (A)

Model for the following switching frequencies
0.667 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
100 V
01100017* 1.7
01100024* 2.4
02100042 4.2
02100056 5.6 5.5 5.3 5.1 4.9
200 V
01200017* 1.7
01200024* 2.4
01200033* 3.3
01200042* 4.2
02200024 2.4
02200033 3.3
02200042 4.2
02200056 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.4
02200075 7.5 7.5 7.4 7.2 6.8 6.6 6.3 5.8 5.4
03200100 10 10 10 10 9.5 8.6 7.5 6.1 5
04200133
04200176
400 V
02400013 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.1
02400018 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.1
02400023 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 1.1
02400032 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 2.5 1.1
02400041 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 3.7 3.2 2.5 1.1
03400056 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 5 3.5 2.8 1.9
03400073 7.3 7.3 7.3 7.3 6.2 4.5 3.4
03400094 9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4 7.9 6.2 4.7
04400135
04400170
* CI-Keypad not installed.

Issue Number: 7
Table 11-5 Maximum permissible continuous output current @ 50 °C (122 °F) (size 5 to 6)
Maximum permissible continuous output current (A) Maximum permissible continuous output current (A)
Model for the following switching frequencies for the following switching frequencies
0.667, 1 3 4 6 8 12 16 0.667, 1 3 4 6 8 12 16
200 V
05200250 30.0 29.7 25.2 21.6 25.0 23.0 19.8 17.3
06200330 50.0 49.0 38.0 30.0 33.0 29.0 24.6
06200440 58.0 56.0 49.0 38.0 30.2 44.0 41.0 36.0 29.0 24.6
400 V
05400270 25.5 23.6 20.4 15.6 12.3 24.0 23.5 21.6 18.6 16.2 12.7 10.0
05400300 25.5 23.6 15.9 12.3 24.0 21.9 19.2 13.8 10.5
06400350 38.0 37.0 28.0 21.4 35.0 32.0 27.0 21.0 16.5
06400420 48.0 43.0 36.5 27.4 21.4 42.0 42.0 38.0 32.0 27.0 21.0 16.5
06400470 63.0 58.0 52.0 43.0 37.0 28.0 21.4 47.0 42.0 38.0 32.0 27.0 21.0 16.5
575 V
05500030 3.9 3.0
05500040 6.1 4.0
05500069 10.0 6.9
06500100 12.0 10.0
06500150 17.0 13.4 15.0 14.0 10.3
06500190 22.0 17.8 13.4 19.0 14.0 10.3
06500230 27.0 23.5 17.8 15.0 23.0 21.6 19.0 14.0 11.5
06500290 34.0 28.2 23.5 18.0 15.0 29.0 27.3 22.0 19.0 14.0 11.6
06500350 43.0 41.7 36.1 28.0 23.7 18.0 15.0 35.0 31.2 27.3 21.8 19.0 14.0 11.6

Issue Number: 7
11.1.2 Power dissipation

Table 11-6 Losses @ 40°C (104°F) ambient (size 1 to 4)
Heavy Duty
Nominal rating Drive losses (W) taking into account any current derating for the given conditions
Model
0.667 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
kW hp
100 V
01100017 0.25 0.33
01100024 0.37 0.5
02100042 0.75 1.0 34 34 35 36 37 39 41 46 50
02100056 1.1 1.5 42 43 44 46 47 50 53 59 65
200 V
01200017 0.25 0.33
01200024 0.37 0.5

01200033 0.55 0.75
01200042 0.75 1.0

02200024 0.37 0.5 24 24 24 25 25 26 27 30 32
02200033 0.55 0.75 31 31 32 33 34 35 37 40 43
02200042 0.75 1.0 37 37 38 39 40 42 44 49 53

02200056 1.1 1.5 45 46 47 48 50 53 56 62 68
02200075 1.5 2.0 58 59 61 63 65 69 74 82 84

03200100 2.2 3.0 85 87 91 96 101 110 117 121 117
04200133 3.0 3.0
04200176 4.0 5.0
400 V
02400013 0.37 0.5 25 26 30 33 36 42 48 60
02400018 0.55 0.75 29 30 34 37 40 47 53 67
02400023 0.75 1.0 33 34 38 41 45 52 59 69
02400032 1.1 1.5 41 42 46 50 54 63 71 70
02400041 1.5 2.0 49 50 55 60 64 74 78 70
03400056 2.2 3.0 55 57 62 68 75 86 90 86 77
03400073 3.0 3.0 72 74 82 90 98 113 101 92

03400094 4.0 5.0 95 99 108 116 129 128 125 113
04400135 5.5 7.5
04400170 7.5 10.0

Issue Number: 7
Nominal Drive losses (W) taking into account any current Nominal Drive losses (W) taking into account any
Model rating derating for the given conditions rating current derating for the given conditions
0.667, 1 3 4 6 8 12 16 0.667, 1 3 4 6 8 12 16
kW hp kW hp
200 V
05200250 7.5 10 291 302 324 344 356 342 5.5 7.5 245 254 272 288 284 282
06200330 11 15 394 413 452 490 480 7.5 10 277 290 316 342 382
06200440 15 20 463 484 528 522 481 11 15 366 382 417 410 388
400 V
05400270 15 20 324 353 356 355 359 362 11 20 276 282 285 290 301 310
05400300 15 20 332 367 434 441 417 424 15 20 322 333 352 374 372 439
06400350 18.5 25 417 456 532 613 652 645 15 25 389 424 498 496 502 513
06400420 22 30 515 561 657 651 646 650 18.5 30 455 497 487 486 495 513
06400470 30 40 656 659 650 646 643 22 30 500 496 487 486 495
575 V
05500030 2.2 3 92 102 121 142 1.5 2 82 91 108 126
05500040 4 5 135 150 180 209 2.2 3 94 104 124 145
05500069 5.5 7.5 194 215 260 302 4 5 153 170 204 236
06500100 7.5 10 215 239 287 334 5.5 7.5 187 208 249 291
06500150 11 15 284 315 376 438 7.5 10 265 294 351 410
06500190 15 20 362 399 484 569 11 15 317 350 418 496
06500230 18.5 25 448 505 596 682 15 20 382 421 508 523
06500290 22 30 623 712 810 822 18.5 25 533 610 628 635
06500350 30 40 798 836 813 823 22 30 546 624 622 627
Table 11-8 Losses @ 40°C (104°F) ambient with high IP insert installed (size 5 only)
Drive losses (W) taking into consideration any current Drive losses (W) taking into consideration any current
Model derating for the given conditions derating for the given conditions
0.667, 1 3 4 6 8 12 16 0.667, 1 3 4 6 8 12 16
200 V
05200250 244 249 262 274 298 328 245 251 264 278 301 306
400 V
05400270 170 173 182 194 223 268 172 177 184 194 225 265
05400300 218 240 284 329 432 564 218 240 284 325 425 560
575 V
05500030
05500040
05500069

Issue Number: 7
Heavy Duty
Nominal rating Drive losses (W) taking into account any current derating for the given conditions
Model
0.667 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
kW hp
100 V
01100017 0.25 0.33
01100024 0.37 0.5
02100042 0.75 1.0 34 34 35 36 37 39 41 46 50
02100056 1.1 1.5 42 43 44 46 47 49 47 47 57
200 V
01200017 0.25 0.33
01200024 0.37 0.5

01200033 0.55 0.75
01200042 0.75 1.0

02200024 0.37 0.5 24 24 24 25 25 26 27 30 32
02200033 0.55 0.75 31 31 32 33 34 35 37 40 43
02200042 0.75 1.0 37 37 38 39 39 40 42 45 46

02200056 1.1 1.5 44 44 46 46 47 48 44 46 50
02200075 1.5 2.0 44 44 45 46 47 48 44 46 50

03200100 2.2 3.0 86 88 92 96 96 97 93 90 86
04200133 3.0 3.0
04200176 4.0 5.0
400 V
02400013 0.37 0.5 25 26 30 33 36 42 48 58
02400018 0.55 0.75 29 30 34 37 40 47 53 58
02400023 0.75 1.0 33 34 38 41 45 52 59 58
02400032 1.1 1.5 41 42 46 50 54 63 62 70
02400041 1.5 2.0 49 50 55 60 60 63 62 58
03400056 2.2 3.0 57 58 64 70 73 63 60 60
03400073 3.0 3.0 73 75 82 91 87 77 71

03400094 4.0 5.0 96 98 109 122 111 104 97
04400135 5.5 7.5
04400170 7.5 10.0

Issue Number: 7

Drive losses (W) taking into account any current derating for Drive losses (W) taking into account any current derating
Model the given conditions for the given conditions
0.667, 1 3 4 6 8 12 16 0.667, 1 3 4 6 8 12 16
200 V
05200250 292 306 331 357 357 357 247 258 279 278 283 288
06200330 394 413 452 481 434 277 290 316 342 346
06200440 463 484 509 483 437 366 382 389 369 342
400 V
05400270 288 323 368 384 417 267 274 290 305 340 373
05400300 280 316 366 452 453 511 264 297 383 420 463 523
06400350 417 456 536 607 609 597 389 424 459 452 468 472
06400420 515 561 597 595 601 614 455 449 450 445 468 491
06400470 613 600 593 601 613 455 449 450 446 464
575 V
05500030 92 102 121 142 82 91 108 126
05500040 135 150 180 209 94 104 124 145
05500069 194 215 260 302 153 170 204 236
06500100 215 239 287 334 187 208 249 291
06500150 284 315 376 443 265 294 351 410
06500190 362 399 482 575 317 350 421 504
06500230 445 490 592 614 382 422 477 504
06500290 623 712 739 751 533 574 580 555
06500350 774 758 734 757 572 572 572 607
Table 11-11 Power losses from the front of the drive when
through-panel mounted
Frame size Power loss
5
6

Issue Number: 7
11.1.3 Supply requirements 11.1.6 Temperature, humidity and cooling method

AC supply voltage: Size 1 to 4:
100 V drive: 100 V to 120 V ±10 % Ambient temperature operating range:
200 V drive: 200 V to 240 V ±10 % - 20 °C to 40 °C (- 4 °F to 104 °F).
400 V drive: 380 V to 480 V ±10 % Output current derating must be applied at ambient temperatures
575 V drive: 500 V to 575 V ±10 % >40 °C (104 °F).
Number of phases: 3 Size 5 onwards:
Maximum supply imbalance: 2 % negative phase sequence (equivalent Ambient temperature operating range:
to 3 % voltage imbalance between phases). - 20 °C to 50 °C (- 4 °F to 122 °F).
Frequency range: 48 to 62 Hz Output current derating must be applied at ambient temperatures >40 °C
(104 °F).
For UL compliance only, the maximum supply symmetrical fault current
must be limited to 100 kA Cooling method: Forced convection
Maximum humidity: 95 % non-condensing at 40 °C (104 °F)
11.1.4 Line reactors
Input line reactors reduce the risk of damage to the drive resulting from 11.1.7 Storage
poor phase balance or severe disturbances on the supply network. Size 1 to 4:
Where line reactors are to be used, reactance values of approximately -40 °C (-40 °F) to +60 °C (140 °F) for long term storage.
2 % are recommended. Higher values may be used if necessary, but Size 5 onwards:
may result in a loss of drive output (reduced torque at high speed) -40 °C (-40 °F) to +50 °C (122 °F) for long term storage, or to +70 °C
because of the voltage drop. (158 °F) for short term storage
For all drive ratings, 2 % line reactors permit drives to be used with a Storage time is 2 years.
supply unbalance of up to 3.5 % negative phase sequence (equivalent to Electrolytic capacitors in any electronic product have a storage period
5 % voltage imbalance between phases). after which they require reforming or replacing.
Severe disturbances may be caused by the following factors, for example: The DC bus capacitors have a storage period of 10 years.
• Power factor correction equipment connected close to the drive.
The low voltage capacitors on the control supplies typically have a
• Large DC drives having no or inadequate line reactors connected to
storage period of 2 years and are thus the limiting factor.
the supply.
• Across the line (DOL) started motor(s) connected to the supply such Low voltage capacitors cannot be reformed due to their location in the
that when any of these motors are started, the voltage dip exceeds circuit and thus may require replacing if the drive is stored for a period of
20 % 2 years or greater without power being applied.
Such disturbances may cause excessive peak currents to flow in the It is therefore recommended that drives are powered up for a minimum
input power circuit of the drive. This may cause nuisance tripping, or in of 1 hour after every 2 years of storage.
extreme cases, failure of the drive. This process allows the drive to be stored for a further 2 years.
Drives of low power rating may also be susceptible to disturbance when 11.1.8 Altitude
connected to supplies with a high rated capacity. Altitude range: 0 to 3,000 m (9,900 ft), subject to the following
Line reactors are particularly recommended for use with the following conditions:
drive models when one of the above factors exists, or when the supply 1,000 m to 3,000 m (3,300 ft to 9,900 ft) above sea level: de-rate the
capacity exceeds 175 kVA: maximum output current from the specified figure by 1% per 100 m
Model sizes 04200133 to 06500350 have an internal DC choke so they (330 ft) above 1,000 m (3,300 ft)
do not require AC line reactors except for cases of excessive phase
unbalance or extreme supply conditions. For example at 3,000 m (9,900 ft) the output current of the drive would
have to be de-rated by 20 %.
When required each drive must have its own reactor(s). Three individual
reactors or a single three-phase reactor should be used. 11.1.9 IP / UL Rating
Reactor current ratings The drive is rated to IP20 pollution degree 2 (non-conductive
The current rating of the line reactors should be as follows: contamination only).
Continuous current rating: In addition to this, drive sizes 2 and 3 are rated to IP21 standard (without
Not less than the continuous input current rating of the drive an Adaptor Interface module installed).
Repetitive peak current rating: It is possible to configure drive size 5 and above to achieve IP65 rating
Not less than twice the continuous input current rating of the drive (NEMA 12) at the rear of the heatsink for through-panel mounting (some
current derating is required).
11.1.5 Motor requirements
No. of phases: 3 In order to achieve the high IP rating at the rear of the heatsink with drive
size 5 it is necessary to seal a heatsink vent by installing the high IP
Maximum voltage:
insert.
200 V drive: 240 V
400 V drive: 480 V The IP rating of a product is a measure of protection against ingress and
575 V drive: 575 V contact to foreign bodies and water. It is stated as IP XX, where the two
digits (XX) indicate the degree of protection provided as shown in Table
11-12.

Issue Number: 7
Table 11-12 IP Rating degrees of protection Frequency range: 5 to 500 Hz

Severity: 3.5 mm peak displacement from 5 to 9 Hz
First digit Second digit 10 m/s² peak acceleration from 9 to 200 Hz
Protection against contact and Protection against ingress of water 15 m/s² peak acceleration from 200 to 500 Hz
ingress of foreign bodies
Sweep rate:1 octave/minute
0 No protection 0 No protection
Duration: 15 minutes in each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes.
Protection against large
foreign bodies φ > 50 mm Protection against vertically Referenced standard: EN 61800-5-1: 2007, Section 5.2.6.4.
1 1 referring to IEC 60068-2-6:
(large area contact with the falling drops of water
hand) Frequency range: 10 to 150 Hz
Severity: 0.075 mm amplitude from 10 to 57 Hz
Protection against medium
Protection against spraywater 1g peak acceleration from 57 to 150 Hz
2 size foreign bodies φ > 12 mm 2
(up to 15 ° from the vertical) Sweep rate:1 octave/minute
(finger)
Protection against small Duration:10 sweep cycles per axis in each of 3 mutually
Protection against spraywater perpendicular axes.
3 foreign bodies φ > 2.5 mm 3
(up to 60 ° from the vertical)
(tools, wires) Testing to Environmental Category ENV3
Protection against granular Subjected to resonance search in the range listed. If no natural
Protection against splashwater
4 foreign bodies φ > 1mm (tools, 4 frequencies found then subjected only to endurance test.
(from all directions)
wires) Referenced standard: Environment Category ENV3:
Protection against dust Protection against heavy Frequency range: 5 to 13.2 Hz ± 1.0 mm
5 deposit, complete protection 5 splash water (from all 13.2 to 100 Hz ± 0.7g (6.9 ms -2)
against accidental contact. directions, at high pressure)
For more information, please refer to section 12 Vibration Test 1 of the
Protection against dust Lloyds Register Test Specification Number 1.
Protection against deckwater
6 ingress, complete protection 6
(e.g. in heavy seas)
against accidental contact.
7 - 7 Protection against immersion 11.1.13 Starts per hour
8 - 8 Protection against submersion By electronic control: unlimited
By interrupting the AC supply: ≤20 (equally spaced)
Table 11-13 UL enclosure ratings
UL rating Description
11.1.14 Start up time
This is the time taken from the moment of applying power to the drive, to
Enclosures are intended for indoor use, primarily the drive being ready to run the motor:
Type 1 to provide a degree of protection against limited
amounts of falling dirt. Size 1 to 4: 1.5 s
Enclosures are intended for indoor use, primarily 11.1.15 Output frequency / speed range
Type 12 to provide a degree of protection against dust, In all operating modes (Open loop, RFC-A) the maximum output
falling dirt and dripping non-corrosive liquids. frequency is limited to 550 Hz.
11.1.16 Accuracy and resolution
11.1.10 Corrosive gasses
Frequency:
Concentrations of corrosive gases must not exceed the levels given in:
The absolute frequency accuracy depends on the accuracy of the
• Table A2 of EN 50178:1998 oscillator used with the drive microprocessor. The accuracy of the
• Class 3C2 of IEC 60721-3-3 oscillator is ± 2 % , and so the absolute frequency accuracy is ± 2 % of
This corresponds to the levels typical of urban areas with industrial the reference, when a preset frequency is used. If an analog input is
activities and/or heavy traffic, but not in the immediate neighborhood of used, the absolute accuracy is further limited by the absolute accuracy
industrial sources with chemical emissions. of the analog input.
11.1.11 RoHS compliance The following data applies to the drive only; it does not include the
The drive meets EU directive 2002-95-EC for RoHS compliance. performance of the source of the control signals.
11.1.12 Vibration Open & closed loop resolution:
Size 1 to 4: Preset frequency reference: 0.01 Hz
Bump Test Analog input 1: 11 bit plus sign
Testing in each of three mutually perpendicular axes in turn. Analog input 2: 11 bit plus sign
Referenced standard: IEC 60068-2-27: Test Ea: Current:
Severity: 15 g peak, 11 ms pulse duration, half sine.
No. of Bumps: 18 (3 in each direction of each axis). The resolution of the current feedback is 10 bit plus sign.
Referenced standard: IEC 60068-2-29: Test Eb: Accuracy: typical 2 %

Severity: 18 g peak, 6 ms pulse duration, half sine. worst case 5 %
No. of Bumps: 600 (100 in each direction of each axis).
Random Vibration Test
Testing in each of three mutually perpendicular axes in turn.
Referenced standard: IEC 60068-2-64: Test Fh:
Severity: 1.0 m²/s³ (0.01 g²/Hz) ASD from 5 to 20 Hz
-3 db/octave from 20 to 200 Hz
Duration: 30 minutes in each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes.
Sinusoidal Vibration Test
Testing in each of three mutually perpendicular axes in turn.
Referenced standard: IEC 60068-2-6: Test Fc:

Issue Number: 7
11.1.17 Acoustic noise 11.1.20 SAFE TORQUE OFF data

The heatsink fan generates the majority of the sound pressure level at 1 m According to EN ISO 13849-1:
produced by the drive. The heatsink fan on all drive sizes is a variable
PL = e
speed fan. The drive controls the speed at which the fan runs based on
Category = 4
the temperature of the heatsink and the drive's thermal model system.
MTTFD = High
Table 11-14 gives the sound pressure level at 1 m produced by the drive
for the heatsink fan running at the maximum and minimum speeds. DCav = High
Table 11-14 Acoustic noise data Mission Time and Proof Test Interval = 20 years
Max speed Min speed The calculated PFDAVG for the complete STO function is:
Size
dBA dBA
Frame 1 to 4: 8.4 x 10 -6
1 46.7
2 45 Frame 5 to 6: 3.64 x 10 -6
3 58.6 49 According to EN 61800-5-2:
4 60.8 SIL = 3
5 57 Frame 1 to 4: PFH = 9.61 x 10 -11 h-1
6 57 40
Frame 5 to 6: PFH = 4.16 x 10 -11 h-1
7 57
8 57 Logic levels comply with IEC 61131-2:2007 for type 1 digital inputs rated
at 24 V. Maximum level for logic low to achieve SIL3 and PL e 5 V and
11.1.18 Overall dimensions 0.5 mA.
H Height including surface mounting brackets
W Width 11.1.21 Input current, fuse and cable size ratings
D Projection forward of panel when surface mounted The input current is affected by the supply voltage and impedance.
F Projection forward of panel when through-panel mounted. Typical input current
R Projection rear of panel when through-panel mounted. The values of typical input current are given to aid calculations for power
Table 11-15 Overall drive dimensions flow and power loss.
The values of typical input current are stated for a balanced supply.
Dimension
Size Maximum continuous input current
H W D F R The values of maximum continuous input current are given to aid the
160 mm 130 mm selection of cables and fuses. These values are stated for the worst case
1
(6.3 in) 75 mm (5.1 in) condition with the unusual combination of stiff supply with bad balance.
205 mm (2.95 in) 150 mm The value stated for the maximum continuous input current would only
2 be seen in one of the input phases. The current in the other two phases
(8.07 in) (5.9 in)
would be significantly lower.
226 mm 90 mm 160 mm
3 The values of maximum input current are stated for a supply with a 2 %
(8.9 in) (3.54 in) (6.3 in)
277 mm 115 mm 175 mm negative phase-sequence imbalance and rated at the maximum supply
4 fault current given in Table 11-17.
(10.9 in) (4.5 in) (6.9 in)
391 mm 143 mm 192 mm Table 11-17 Supply fault current used to calculate maximum input currents
5
(15.39 in) (5.63 in) (7.60 in)
Model Symmetrical fault level (kA)
391 mm 210 mm 221 mm
6 All 100
(15.39 in) (8.27 in) (8.70 in)
11.1.19 Weights
Table 11-16 Overall drive weights
Size Model kg lb
1 0.75 1.65
2 1.0 2.2
3 1.5 3.3
All
4 3.13 6.9
5 7.4 16.3
6 14 30.9

Issue Number: 7
Fuses
The AC supply to the drive must be installed with suitable protection against overload and short-circuits. Table 11-18, Table 11-19, Table
11-20 and Table 11-21 show the recommended fuse ratings. Failure to observe this requirement will cause risk of fire.
WARNING

Typical input
continuous overload input
current IEC gG Class CC or Class J
Model input current current
Maximum Maximum
A A A A A
01100017 8.7 8.7 10 10
01100024 11.1 11.1 16 16
02100042 18.8 18.8 20 20
02100056 24.0 24.0 25 25

Fuse rating
Maximum Maximum
Typical
continuous overload IEC UL / USA
input
Model input input
current Maximum Maximum
current current Nominal Nominal
A Class A Class
A A A A 1ph 3ph A 1ph 3ph
01200017 4.5 4.5 5
6
01200024 5.3 5.3
gG 10 CC or J
01200033 8.3 8.3 10
01200042 10.4 10.4 16 16
02200024 5.3/3.2 5.3/4.1 6 10 5
02200033 8.3/4.3 8.3/6.7 10 10
CC
02200042 10.4/5.4 10.4/7.5 16 10 gG 16 10
or J
02200056 14.9/7.4 14.9/11.3
20 16 20 16
02200075 18.1/9.1 18.1/13.5
CC
03200100 23.9/12.8 23.9/17.7 30/25 25 20 gG 25 20
or J
04200133 23.7/13.5 23.7/16.9 25 20 25 20 CC
gG
04200176 17.0 21.3 25 25 or J
CC
05200250 24 31 52 40 40 gG 40 40
or J
06200330 42 48 64 60 CC
63 63 gG 60
06200440 49 56 85 60 or J

Issue Number: 7

Typical
continuous overload
input IEC UL / USA
Model input input
current
current current Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum
Class Class
A A A A A A A
02400013 2.1 2.4
02400018 2.6 2.9 5
6
02400023 3.1 3.5 gG CC or J
02400032 4.7 5.1
10
02400041 5.8 6.2 10
03400056 8.3 8.7 13 10 10
03400073 10.2 12.2 18 gG 16 CC or J
16
03400094 13.1 14.8 20.7 20
04400135 14.0 16.3 20 20
gG CC or J
04400170 18.5 20.7 25 25
05400270 26 29 52
40 40 gG 35 35 CC or J
05400300 27 30 58
06400350 32 36 67 40
06400420 41 46 80 63 63 gG 50 60 CC or J
06400470 54 60 90 60
Maximum Fuse rating

Typical Maximum
overload
input continuous IEC UL / USA
Model input
current input current
current Nominal Maximum Nominal Maximum
Class Class
A A A A A A A
05500030 4 4 7 10
10 10
05500040 6 7 9 20 gG 10 CC or J
05500069 9 11 15 20 20 20
06500100 12 13 22 20 20
06500150 17 19 33 32 40 25 30
06500190 22 24 41 40 30
gG CC or J
06500230 26 29 50 35
50
06500290 33 37 63 63 40 50
06500350 41 47 76 63 50
NOTE
Ensure cables used suit local wiring regulations.
The nominal cable sizes below are only a guide. The mounting and grouping of cables affects their current-carrying capacity, in some cases
smaller cables may be acceptable but in other cases a larger cable is required to avoid excessive temperature or voltage drop. Refer to
local wiring regulations for the correct size of cables.
CAUTION

mm2 AWG
Model
01100017 1 1 16
6 2.5 10 16 12
01100024 1.5 1 14
02100042 2.5 1 12
6 2.5 10 16 12
02100056 4 1 10

Issue Number: 7

mm2 AWG
Model
01200017
01200024
1 6 1 2.5 16 10 16 12
01200033
01200042
02200024
02200033 1 16
02200042 6 1 2.5 10 16 12
02200056 2.5/1.5 12/14
02200075 2.5 12
03200100 4 6 1.5 2.5 10/12 10 14 12
04200133 4/2.5
6 2.5 2.5 10 10 12 12
04200176 4
05200250 10 10 10 10 8 8 8 8
06200330 16 16 4 4
25 25 3 3
06200440 25 25 3 3

mm2 AWG
Model
02400013
02400018
02400023 1 6 1 2.5 16 10 16 12
02400032
02400041
03400056 1 1 14 16
03400073 1.5 6 1 2.5 12 10 16 12
03400094 2.5 1.5 12 14
04400135 2.5
6 2.5 2.5 10 10 12 12
04400170 4
05400270
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8
05400300
06400350 10 10 6 6
06400420 16 25 16 25 4 3 4 3
06400470 25 25 3 3

mm2 AWG
Model
05500030 0.75 0.75 16 16
05500040 1 1.5 1 1.5 16 16
14 14
05500069 1.5 1.5
06500100 2.5 2.5 14 14
06500150 4 4
10 10
06500190 6 6
25 25 3 3
06500230 8 8
10
06500290 10
6 6
06500350 16

Issue Number: 7
11.1.22 Protective ground cable ratings

Table 11-26 Protective ground cable ratings
Input phase conductor size Minimum ground conductor size
≤ 10 mm2 Either 10 mm2 or two conductors of the same cross-sectional area as the input phase conductor.
> 10 mm2 and ≤ 16 mm2 The same cross-sectional area as the first input phase conductor.
> 16 mm2 and ≤ 35 mm 2

16 mm2
> 35 mm2 Half of the cross-sectional area of the input phase conductor.
11.1.23 Maximum motor cable lengths

Model Maximum permissible motor cable length for each of the following switching frequencies
0.667 kHz 1 kHz 2 kHz 3 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz
01100017 37.5 m 25 m 18.75 m 12.5 m 9m
50 m (164 ft)
01100024 (123 ft) (82 ft) (61 ft) (41 ft) (30 ft)
02100042 75 m 50 m 37.5 m 25 m 18 m
100 m (328 ft)
02100056 (246 ft) (164 ft) (123 ft) (82 ft) (59 ft)

Model 0.667 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
01200017
01200024 50 m 37.5 m 25 m 18.75 m 12.5 m 9m
01200033 (165 ft) (122 ft) (82.5 ft) (61 ft) (41 ft) (30 ft)
01200042
02200024
02200033
100 m 75 m 50 m 37.5 m 25 m 18 m
02200042
(330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (122 ft) (82.5 ft) (60 ft)
02200056
02200075
100 m 75 m 50 m 37.5 m 25 m 18 m
03200100
(330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (122 ft) (82.5 ft) (60 ft)
04200133 100 m 75 m 50 m 37.5 m 25 m 18 m
04200176 (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (122 ft) (82.5 ft) (60 ft)
200 m 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m 37 m
05200250
(660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (120 ft)
06200330 300 m 200 m 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m
06200440 (984 ft) (660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft)

Issue Number: 7

Model 0.667 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
02400013
02400018
100 m 75 m 50 m 37.5 m 25 m 18.25 m
02400023
(330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (122 ft) (82.5 ft) (60 ft)
02400032
02400041
03400056
100 m 75 m 50 m 37.5 m 25 m 18.25 m
03400073
(330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (122 ft) (82.5 ft) (60 ft)
03400094
04400135 100 m 75 m 50 m 37.5 m 25 m 18.25 m
04400170 (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (122 ft) (82.5 ft) (60 ft)
05400270 200 m 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m 37 m
05400300 (660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft) (120 ft)
06400350
300 m 200 m 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m
06400420
(984 ft) (660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft)
06400470
Table 11-30 Maximum motor cable lengths (575 V drives

Model 0.667 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16
05500030
200 m
05500040
(660 ft)
05500069
06500100
06500150
06500190 300 m 200 m 150 m 100 m 75 m 50 m
06500230 (984 ft) (660 ft) (490 ft) (330 ft) (245 ft) (165 ft)
06500290
06500350
• Cable lengths in excess of the specified values may be used only when special techniques are adopted; refer to the supplier of the drive.
• The default switching frequency is 3 kHz for Open-loop and RFC-A.
The maximum cable length is reduced from that shown in Table 11-27, Table 11-28, Table 11-29 and Table 11-30 if high capacitance motor cables are
used. For further information, refer to section 4.5.2 High-capacitance / reduced diameter cables on page 60.

Issue Number: 7
11.1.24 Minimum resistance values and peak power Table 11-34 Braking resistor resistance and power rating (575 V)
rating for the braking resistor at 40 °C
(104 °F) Minimum Instantaneous Continuous
Table 11-31 Braking resistor resistance and power rating (100 V) Ω kW kW
Minimum Instantaneous Continuous 05500030 2.6
Model resistance* power rating power rating 05500040 80 12.1 4.6
Ω kW kW 05500069 6.5
01100017 06500100 8.7
130 1.2
01100024 06500150 12.3
02100042 06500190 16.3
68 2.2 13 74
02100056 06500230 19.9
06500290 24.2
Table 11-32 Braking resistor resistance and power rating (200 V)
06500350 31.7
Minimum Instantaneous Continuous * Resistor tolerance: ±10 %
Ω kW kW For high-inertia loads or under continuous braking, the continuous power
dissipated in the braking resistor may be as high as the power rating of
01200017 the drive. The total energy dissipated in the braking resistor is dependent
01200024 on the amount of energy to be extracted from the load.
130 1.2
01200033 The instantaneous power rating refers to the short-term maximum power
01200042 dissipated during the on intervals of the pulse width modulated braking
02200024 control cycle. The braking resistor must be able to withstand this
02200033 dissipation for short intervals (milliseconds). Higher resistance values
require proportionately lower instantaneous power ratings.
02200042
68 2.2 In most applications, braking occurs only occasionally. This allows the
02200056
continuous power rating of the braking resistor to be much lower than
02200075 the power rating of the drive. It is therefore essential that the
03200100 45 3.4 2.2 instantaneous power rating and energy rating of the braking resistor are
04200133 sufficient for the most extreme braking duty that is likely to be
22 6.9 encountered.
04200176
05200250 16.5 10.3 8.6 Optimization of the braking resistor requires careful consideration of the
06200330 12.6 braking duty.
8.6 19.7
06200440 16.4 Select a value of resistance for the braking resistor that is not less than
the specified minimum resistance. Larger resistance values may give a
Table 11-33 Braking resistor resistance and power rating (400 V) cost saving, as well as a safety benefit in the event of a fault in the
braking system. Braking capability will then be reduced, which could
Minimum Instantaneous Continuous cause the drive to trip during braking if the value chosen is too large.
Ω kW kW
02400013
02400018
02400023 270 2.3
02400032
02400041
03400056 2.2
03400073 100 6.1 3
03400094 4
04400135
50 12.2
04400170
05400270 31.5 21.5 16.2
05400300 18 37.5 19.6
06400350 21.6
06400420 17 39.8 25
06400470 32.7

Issue Number: 7
11.1.25 Torque settings

Table 11-35 Drive relay terminal data
Table 11-36 Drive power terminal data
Model AC and motor terminals DC and braking Ground terminal

size Recommended Maximum Recommended Maximum Recommended Maximum
1 0.5 N m (0.4 lb ft) 0.5 N m (0.4 lb ft)
2
1.5 N m (1.1 lb ft)
3 1.4 N m (1 lb ft) 1.4 N m (1 lb ft)
4
Plug-in terminal block M4 Nut (7 mm AF) M5 Nut (8 mm AF)
5
M6 Nut (10 mm AF) M6 Nut (10 mm AF) M6 Nut (10 mm AF)
6
Table 11-37 Terminal block maximum cable sizes 11.1.26 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
This is a summary of the EMC performance of the drive. For full details,
Terminal block
Model size Max cable size refer to the EMC Data Sheet which can be obtained from the supplier of
description
the drive.
All Control connector 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) Table 11-38 Immunity compliance
All 2-way relay connector 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG) Type of
Standard Test specification Application Level
STO connector 0.5 mm2 (20 AWG) immunity
6 kV contact
1 to 4 AC input power connector 6 mm2 (10 AWG) IEC61000-4-2 Electrostatic
discharge
Module Level 3
EN61000-4-2 discharge enclosure (industrial)
AC output power 8 kV air discharge
connector 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG) 10 V/m prior to
Radio modulation
3-way AC power IEC61000-4-3
frequency 80 - 1000 MHz
Module Level 3
5 connector 8 mm2 (8 AWG) EN61000-4-3 enclosure (industrial)
radiated field 80 % AM (1 kHz)
3-way motor connector modulation
5 to 6 STO connector 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG) 5/50 ns 2 kV
Level 4
transient at 5 kHz
Control lines (industrial
repetition frequency
harsh)
IEC61000-4-4 Fast transient via coupling clamp
EN61000-4-4 burst 5/50 ns 2 kV
transient at 5 kHz Level 3
Power lines
repetition frequency (industrial)
by direct injection
Common mode 4 kV AC supply
1.2/50 μs lines: Level 4
waveshape line to ground
Differential mode
IEC61000-4-5 AC supply
Surges 2 kV
EN61000-4-5 lines: Level 3
1.2/50 μs
line to line
waveshape
Signal ports
Lines to ground Level 2
to ground 1
10V prior to
Conducted modulation
IEC61000-4-6 Control and Level 3
radio 0.15 - 80 MHz
EN61000-4-6 power lines (industrial)
frequency 80 % AM (1 kHz)
modulation
-30 % 10 ms
Voltage dips
IEC61000-4-11 +60 % 100 ms AC power
and
EN61000-4-11 -60 % 1 s ports
interruptions
<-95 % 5 s
IEC61000-6-1 Generic immunity standard for the
EN61000-6- residential, commercial and light - Complies
1:2007 industrial environment
IEC61000-6-2
Generic immunity standard for the
EN61000-6- Complies
industrial environment
2:2005
IEC61800-3 Product standard for adjustable Meets immunity
EN61800- speed power drive systems requirements for first and
3:2004 (immunity requirements) second environments
1
See section Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and
connections outside a building on page 70 for control ports for possible
requirements regarding grounding and external surge protection

Issue Number: 7
Emission IEC 61800-3:2004 and EN 61800-3:2004

The drive contains an in-built filter for basic emission control. An The 2004 revision of the standard uses different terminology to align the
additional optional external filter provides further reduction of emission. requirements of the standard better with the EC EMC Directive.
The requirements of the following standards are met, depending on the Power drive systems are categorized C1 to C4:
motor cable length and switching frequency.
Table 11-39 Size 1 emission compliance (200 V drives) Corresponding
Category Definition code used
Motor cable Switching frequency (kHz)
above
length (m) 3 4 6 8 12 16
Intended for use in the first or second
Using internal filter: C1 R
environments
0–2 Not a plug-in or movable device, and
Using internal filter and external ferrite ring (1 turn): intended for use in the first environment
C2 I
0 – 10 only when installed by a professional, or
10 - 20 in the second environment
Using external filter: Intended for use in the second
C3 E2U
environment, not the first environment
0 – 20
Rated at over 1000 V or over 400 A,
20 - 100
C4 intended for use in complex systems in E2R
Table 11-40 Size 1 emission compliance (400 V drives) the second environment
Switching frequency (kHz) Note that category 4 is more restrictive than E2R, since the rated current
Motor cable
of the PDS must exceed 400 A or the supply voltage exceed 1000 V, for
length (m) 3 4 6 8 12 16 the complete PDS.
Using internal filter:
0–5
Using internal filter and external ferrite ring (2 turns):
0 – 10
Using external filter:
0 – 20
20 - 100
Key (shown in decreasing order of permitted emission level):
E2R EN 61800-3:2004 second environment, restricted distribution
(Additional measures may be required to prevent interference)
E2U EN 61800-3:2004 second environment, unrestricted distribution
I Industrial generic standard EN 61000-6-4:2007
EN 61800-3:2004 first environment restricted distribution (The
following caution is required by EN 61800-3:2004)
This is a product of the restricted distribution class according

to IEC 61800-3. In a residential environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be
CAUTION required to take adequate measures.
R Residential generic standard EN 61000-6-3:2007

EN 61800-3:2004 first environment unrestricted distribution
EN 61800-3:2004 defines the following:
• The first environment is one that includes residential premises. It
also includes establishments directly connected without intermediate
transformers to a low-voltage power supply network which supplies
buildings used for residential purposes.The second environment is
one that includes all establishments other than those directly
connected to a low-voltage power supply network which supplies
buildings used for residential purposes.
• Restricted distribution is defined as a mode of sales distribution in
which the manufacturer restricts the supply of equipment to
suppliers, customers or users who separately or jointly have
technical competence in the EMC requirements of the application of
drives.

Issue Number: 7
11.2 Optional external EMC filters

Table 11-41 EMC filter cross reference
200 V
05200250 4200-0312
06200330 to 06200440 4200-2300
400 V
05400270 to 05400300 4200-0402
06400350 to 06400470 4200-4800
575 V
05500030 to 05500069 4200-0122
06500100 to 06500350 4200-3690
11.2.1 EMC filter ratings

Table 11-42 Optional external EMC filter details
Maximum continuous Power dissipation at

Voltage rating Ground leakage
current rated current
Discharge
CT part Balanced supply resistors
@ 40 °C @ 50 °C IP rating @ 40 °C @ 50 °C Worst
number IEC UL phase-to-phase &
(104 °F) (122 °F) (104 °F) (122 °F) case
phase-to-ground
A A V V W W mA mA MΩ
4200-0312 31 28.5 250 300 20 17 2.0 80
4200-2300 55 51 250 300 41 35 4.2 69
4200-0402 40 36.8 528 600 47 40 18.7 197
20 1.68
4200-4800 63 58 528 600 54 46 11.2 183
4200-0122 12 11 760 600
4200-3690 42 39 760 600 45 39 12 234
11.2.2 Overall EMC filter dimensions

Table 11-43 Optional external EMC filter dimensions
Dimension (mm)
CT part Weight
H W D
number
mm inch mm inch mm inch kg lb
4200-0312 437 17.20 143 5.63 60 2.36 5.5 12.13
4200-2300 434 17.09 210 8.27 60 2.36 6.5 14.30
4200-0402 437 17.20 143 5.63 60 2.36 5.5 12.13
4200-4800 434 17.09 210 8.27 60 2.36 6.7 14.80
4200-0122 437 17.20 143 5.63 60 2.36 5.5 12.13
4200-3690 434 17.09 210 8.27 60 2.36 7.0 15.40
11.2.3 EMC filter torque settings

Table 11-44 Optional external EMC Filter terminal data
Power connections Ground connections
CT part Max cable size Max torque Max torque
number Ground stud size
2 AWG Nm Ib ft Nm Ib ft
mm
4200-2300
4200-4800 16 6 2.3 1.70 M6 4.8 2.8
4200-3690

Issue Number: 7
12 Diagnostics 12.2 Trip indications

The keypad display on the drive gives various information about the The output of the drive is disabled under any trip condition so that the
drive stops controlling the motor. If the motor is running when the trip
status of the drive. The keypad display provides information on the
occurs it will coast to a stop.
following categories:
• Trip indications During a trip condition, the display indicates that a trip has occurred and
the keypad will display the trip string. Some trips have a sub-trip number
• Alarm indications
to provide additional information about the trip. If a trip has a sub-trip
• Status indications
number, the sub-trip number is flashed alternately with the trip string.
Users must not attempt to repair a drive if it is faulty, nor Trips are listed alphabetically in Table 12-2 based on the trip indication
carry out fault diagnosis other than through the use of the shown on the drive display. Alternatively, the drive status can be read in
diagnostic features described in this chapter. Pr 10.001 'Drive OK' using communication protocols. The most recent
If a drive is faulty, it must be returned to an authorized trip can be read in Pr 10.020 providing a trip number. It must be noted
WARNING Control Techniques distributor for repair. that the hardware trips (HF01 to HF19) do not have trip numbers. The
trip number must be checked in Table 12-3 to identify the specific trip.
12.1 Status modes (Keypad and LED status) Example
Figure 12-1 Keypad status modes 1. Trip code 2 is read from Pr 10.020 via serial communications.
2. Checking Table 12-2 shows Trip 2 is an Over Volts trip.
1
Comms No. Trip Keypad
code display
2 OV
 3. Look up OV in Table 12-2.

4. Perform checks detailed under Diagnosis.
12.3 Identifying a trip / trip source

Some trips only contain a trip string whereas some other trips have a trip
string along with a sub-trip number which provides the user with
additional information about the trip.
A trip can be generated from a control system or from a power system.
2 The sub-trip number associated with the trips listed in Table 12-1 is in
the form xxyzz and used to identify the source of the trip.
Table 12-1 Trips associated with xxyzz sub-trip number
 OV
OI ac
Ph.Lo
Pb.Er
OI.br OI.Sn
PSU Oht.r
Oht.I th.fb
Oht.P P.Dat
3 Oh.dc So.St
The digits xx are 00 for a trip generated by the control system. For a
drive, if the trip is related to the power system then xx will have a value of
 01, when displayed the leading zeros are suppressed.

For a control system trip (xx is zero), the y digit where relevant is defined
for each trip. If not relevant, the y digit will have a value of zero.
The zz digits give the reason for the trip and are defined in each trip
description.
1 Drive OK status
2 Trip status
3 Alarm status

Issue Number: 7
Figure 12-2 Key to sub-trip number
x x y z z
00 - Generated by the control module
01 - Generated by the power module
0 - Always zero for a single drive
00
01
. - Reason for the trip
.
07

Issue Number: 7
12.4 Trips, Sub-trip numbers

Table 12-2 Trip indications
Trip Diagnosis
C.Acc NV Media Card Write fail
The C.Acc trip indicates that the drive was unable to access the NV Media Card. If the trip occurs during the data transfer to
the card then the file being written may be corrupted. If the trip occurs when the data being transferred to the drive then the
data transfer may be incomplete. If a parameter file is transferred to the drive and this trip occurs during the transfer, the
parameters are not saved to non-volatile memory, and so the original parameters can be restored by powering the drive
185 down and up again.
Recommended actions:
• Check NV Media Card is installed / located correctly
• Replace the NV Media Card
C.bt The Menu 0 parameter modification cannot be saved to the NV Media Card
Menu 0 changes are automatically saved on exiting edit mode.
The C.bt trip will occur if a write to a Menu 0 parameter has been initiated via the keypad by exiting edit mode
and Pr 11.042 is set for auto or boot mode, but the necessary boot file has not been created on the NV Media Card to take
the new parameter value. This occurs when Pr 11.042 is changed to Auto (3) or Boot (4) mode, but the drive is not
177
subsequently reset.
• Ensure that Pr 11.042 is correctly set, and then reset the drive to create the necessary file on the NV Media Card
• Re-attempt the parameter write to the Menu 0 parameter
C.by NV Media Card cannot be accessed as it is being accessed by an option module
The C.by trip indicates that an attempt has been made to access a file on NV Media Card, but the NV Media Card is already
being accessed by an Option Module. No data is transferred.
178
• Wait for the option module to finish accessing the NV Media Card and re-attempt the required function
C.Cpr NV Media Card file/data is different to the one in the drive
A compare has been carried out between a file on the NV Media Card, a C.Cpr trip is initiated if the parameters on the NV
Media Card are different to the drive.
188
• Set Pr mm.000 to 0 and reset the trip
• Check to ensure the correct data block on the
NV Media Card has been used for the compare
C.d.E NV Media Card data location already contains data
The C.d.E trip indicates that an attempt has been made to store data on a NV Media Card in a data block which already
contains data.
179 Recommended actions:
• Erase the data in data location
• Write data to an alternative data location
C.dat NV Media Card data not found
The C.dat trip indicates that an attempt has been made to access non-existent file or block on the NV Media Card.
• Ensure data block number is correct
C.Err NV Media Card data structure error
The C.Err trip indicates that an attempt has been made to access the NV Media Card but an error has been detected in the
data structure on the card. Resetting the trip will cause the drive to erase and create the correct folder structure. The cause
of the trip can be identified by the sub-trip.
Sub-trip Reason
1 The required folder and file structure is not present
2 The HEADER.DAT file is corrupted
182
3 Two or more files in the <MCDF\> folder have the same file identification number
• Erase all the data block and re-attempt the process
• Ensure the card is located correctly
• Replace the NV Media Card

Issue Number: 7
Trip Diagnosis
C.Ful NV Media Card full
The C.Ful trip indicates that an attempt has been made to create a data block on a NV Media Card, but there is not enough
space left on the card.
• Delete a data block or the entire NV Media Card to create space
• Use a different NV Media Card
C.Opt NV Media Card trip; option modules installed are different between source drive and destination drive
The C.Opt trip indicates that parameter data or default difference data is being transferred from the NV Media Card to the
drive, but the option module category is different between the source and destination drives. This trip does not stop the data
transfer, but is a warning that the data for the option module that is different will be set to the default values and not the
values from the card. This trip also applies if a compare is attempted between the data block and the drive.
• Ensure the correct option module is installed.
• Press the red reset button to acknowledge that the parameters for the option module installed will be at their
default values
• This trip can be suppressed by setting Pr mm.000 to 9666 and resetting the drive.
C.Pr NV Media Card data blocks are not compatible with the drive derivative
The C.Pr trip is initiated either at power-up or when the card is accessed, If Drive Derivative (11.028) is different between
the source and target drives. This trip can be reset and data can be transferred in either direction between the drive and the
card.
175
• Use a different NV Media Card
• This trip can be suppressed by setting Pr mm.000 to 9666 and resetting the drive
C.rdo NV Media Card has the Read Only bit set
The C.rdo trip indicates that an attempt has been made to modify a read-only NV Media Card or a read-only data block. A
NV Media Card is read-only if the read-only flag has been set.
• Clear the read only flag by setting Pr mm.000 to 9777 and reset the drive. This will clear the read-only flag for all data
blocks in the NV Media Card
C.rtg NV Media Card Trip; The voltage and / or current rating of the source and destination drives are different
The C.rtg trip indicates that parameter data is being transferred from the NV Media Card to the drive, but the current and /
or voltage ratings are different between source and destination drives. This trip also applies if a compare (using Pr mm.000
set to 8yyy) is attempted between the data block on a NV Media Card and the drive. The C.rtg trip does not stop the data
transfer but is a warning that rating specific parameters with the RA attribute may not be transferred to the destination
186 drive.
• Reset the drive to clear the trip
• Ensure that the drive rating dependent parameters have transferred correctly
C.SI NV Media Card trip; Option module file transfer has failed
The C.Sl trip is initiated, if the transfer of an option module file to or from a module failed because the option module does
174 not respond correctly. If this happens this trip is produced with the sub-trip number indicating the option module slot
number.
C.typ NV Media Card parameter set not compatible with current drive mode
The C.typ trip is produced during a compare if the drive mode in the data block on the NV Media Card is different from the
current drive mode. This trip is also produced if an attempt is made to transfer parameters from a NV Media Card to the
drive if the operating mode in the data block is outside the allowed range of operating modes.
• Ensure the destination drive supports the drive operating mode in the parameter file.
• Clear the value in Pr mm.000 and reset the drive
• Ensure destination drive operating mode is the same as the source parameter file
cL.AI Analog input 1 current loss
The cL.A1 trip indicates that a current loss was detected in current mode on Analog input 1 (Terminal 2). In 4-20 mA and
20-4 mA modes loss of input is detected if the current falls below 3 mA.
28 • Check control wiring is correct
• Check control wiring is undamaged
• Check the Analog Input 1 Mode (07.007)
• Current signal is present and greater than 3 mA

Issue Number: 7
Trip Diagnosis
CL.bt Trip initiated from the Control Word (06.042)
The CL.bt trip is initiated by setting bit 12 on the control word in Pr 06.042 when the control word is enabled (Pr 06.043 =
On).
35 • Check the value of Pr 06.042.
• Disable the control word in Control Word Enable (Pr 06.043)
Bit 12 of the control word set to a one causes the drive to trip on Control Word
When the control word is enabled, the trip can only be cleared by setting bit 12 to zero
Cur.c Current calibration range
231 Current calibration range error.
Cur.O Current feedback offset error
The Cur.O trip indicates that the current offset is too large to be trimmed.
225
• Ensure that there is no possibility of current flowing in the output phases of the drive when the drive is not enabled
• Hardware fault – Contact the supplier of the drive
D.Ch Drive parameters are being changed
A user action or a file system write is active that is changing the drive parameters and the drive has been commanded to
enable, i.e. Drive Active (10.002) = 1.
• Ensure the drive is not enabled when defaults are loading
Der.E Derivative file error

Derivative file error with sub-trips:
Sub-trip Reason
246
1 Derivative file different
2 Derivative file missing

Issue Number: 7
Trip Diagnosis
Der.I Derivative product image error
The Der.I trip indicates that an error has been detected in the derivative product image. The reason for the trip can be
identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason Comments
1 Divide by zero
2 Undefined trip
Attempted fast parameter access set-up with non-existent

3
parameter
4 Attempted access to non-existent parameter
5 Attempted write to read-only parameter
6 Attempted and over-range write
7 Attempted read from write-only parameter
The image has failed because either its CRC is incorrect, or

Occurs when the drive powers-up or the image is
30 there are less than 6 bytes in the image or the image header
programmed. The image tasks will not run
version is less than 5
248 The image requires more RAM for heap and stack than can be
31 As 30
provided by the drive.
The image requires an OS function call that is higher than the
32 As 30
maximum allowed.
33 The ID code within the image is not valid As 30
The derivative image has been changed for an image with a

34 As 30
different derivative number
The timed task has not completed in time and has been
40
suspended
Undefined function called, i.e. a function in the host system
41 As 40
vector table that has not been assigned
51 Core menu customization table CRC check failed As 30
52 Customizable menu table CRC check failed As 30
Occurs when the drive powers-up or the image is

programmed and the table has changed. Defaults
53 Customizable menu table changed
are loaded for the derivative menu and the trip will
keep occurring until drive parameters are saved.
The option module installed in slot 1 is not allowed with the
61 As 30
derivative image
80 Image is not compatible with the control board Initiated from within the image code
81 Image is not compatible with the control board serial number As 80
• Contact the supplier of the drive
dest Two or more parameters are writing to the same destination parameter
The dest trip indicates that destination output parameters of two or more logic functions (Menus 7, 8, 9, 12 or 14) within the
drive are writing to the same parameter.
199
• Set Pr mm.000 to ‘Destinations’ or 12001 and check all visible parameters in all menus for parameter write conflicts
dr.CF Drive configuration
232 The hardware ID does not match the user software ID.

Issue Number: 7
Trip Diagnosis
EEF Default parameters have been loaded
The EEF trip indicates that default parameters have been loaded. The exact cause/reason of the trip can be identified from
the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 The most significant digit of the internal parameter database version number has changed
The CRC's applied to the parameter data stored in internal non-volatile memory indicate that a valid set
2
of parameters cannot be loaded
The drive mode restored from internal non-volatile memory is outside the allowed range for the product
3
or the derivative image does not allow the previous drive mode
4 The drive derivative image has changed
31 5 The power stage hardware has changed
6 The internal I/O hardware has changed
7 Reserved
8 The control board hardware has changed
9 The checksum on the non-parameter area of the EEPROM has failed
• Default the drive and perform a reset
• Allow sufficient time to perform a save before the supply to the drive is removed
• If the trip persists - return drive to supplier
Et An External trip is initiated
An Et trip has occurred. The cause of the trip can be identified from the sub trip number displayed after the trip string. See
table below. An external trip can also be initiated by writing a value of 6 in Pr 10.038.
Sub-trip Reason
1 External Trip (10.032) = 1
6
• Check the value of Pr 10.032.
• Select ‘Dest’ (or enter 12001) in Pr mm.000 and check for a parameter controlling Pr 10.032.
• Ensure Pr 10.032 or Pr 10.038 (= 6) is not being controlled by serial comms
Fan.f Fan fail
173 • Check that the fan is installed and connected correctly.

• Check that the fan is not obstructed.
• Contact the supplier of the drive to replace the fan.
Fi.ch File changed
247
• Power cycle the drive.
Fi.In Firmware incompatibility
The Fi.In trip indicates that the user firmware is incompatible with the power firmware.
Re-program the drive with the latest version of the drive firmware for the Unidrive M300.
HF01 Data processing error: CPU hardware fault
The HF01 trip indicates that a CPU address error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed.
HF02 Data processing error: CPU memory management fault
The HF02 trip indicates that a DMAC address error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed.
HF03 Data processing error: CPU has detected a bus fault
The HF03 trip indicates that a bus fault has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.

Issue Number: 7
Trip Diagnosis
HF04 Data processing error: CPU has detected a usage fault
The HF04 trip indicates that a usage fault has occurred.This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.
HF05 Reserved
HF06 Reserved
HF07 Data processing error: Watchdog failure

The HF07 trip indicates that a watchdog failure has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.
HF08 Data processing error: CPU Interrupt crash
The HF08 trip indicates that a CPU interrupt crash has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed. The crash level is indicated by the sub-trip number.
HF09 Data processing error: Free store overflow
The HF09 trip indicates that a free store overflow has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has
failed.
HF10 Reserved
HF11 Data processing error: Non-volatile memory comms error

The HF11 trip indicates that a non-volatile memory comms error has occurred.
Sub-trip Reason Recommended action

1 Non-volatile memory comms error. Hardware fault – contact the supplier of the drive.
EEPROM size is incompatible with the user
2 Re-program drive with compatible user firmware.
firmware.
• The crash level is indicated by the sub-trip number
• This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed
HF12 Data processing error: Main program stack overflow
The HF12 trip indicates that the main program stack over flow has occurred. The stack can be identified by the sub-trip
number. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.
Sub-trip Stack
1 Background tasks
2 Timed tasks
3 Main system interrupts
HF13 Reserved
HF14 Reserved
HF15 Reserved
HF16 Data processing error: RTOS error

The HF16 trip indicates that a RTOS error has occurred. This trip indicates that the control PCB on the drive has failed.

Issue Number: 7
Trip Diagnosis
HF17 Reserved
HF18 Data processing error: Internal flash memory has failed

The HF18 trip indicates that the internal flash memory has failed when writing option module parameter data. The reason
for the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 Option module initialization timed out
2 Programming error while writing menu in flash
3 Erase flash block containing setup menus failed
4 Erase flash block containing application menus failed
5 Incorrect setup menu CRC contained in flash
6 Incorrect application menu CRC contained in flash
Hardware fault - contact the supplier of the drive.
HF19 Data processing error: CRC check on the firmware has failed
The HF19 trip indicates that the CRC check on the drive firmware has failed.
• Re-program the drive
• Hardware fault - Contact the supplier of the drive
It.AC Output current overload timed out (I2t)
The It.AC trip indicates a motor thermal overload based on the output current (Pr 05.007) and motor thermal time constant
(Pr 04.015). Pr 04.019 displays the motor temperature as a percentage of the maximum value. The drive will trip on It.AC
when Pr 04.019 gets to 100 %.
20
• Ensure the load is not jammed / sticking
• Check the load on the motor has not changed
• Tune the motor rated speed parameter (Pr 5.008) (RFC-A mode only)
• Ensure the motor rated current is not zero
It.br Braking resistor overload timed out (I2t)
The It.br trip indicates that braking resistor overload has timed out. The value in Braking Resistor Thermal Accumulator
(10.039) is calculated using Braking Resistor Rated Power (10.030), Braking Resistor Thermal Time Constant (10.031) and
Braking Resistor Resistance (10.061). The It.br trip is initiated when the Braking Resistor Thermal Accumulator (10.039)
reaches 100 %.
19
• Ensure the values entered in Pr 10.030, Pr 10.031 and Pr 10.061 are correct
• If an external thermal protection device is being used and the braking resistor software overload protection is not
required, set Pr 10.030, Pr 10.031 or Pr 10.061 to 0 to disable the trip.
LF.Er Communication has been lost / errors detected between power, control and rectifier modules
This trip is initiated if there is no communications between power, control or the rectifier module or if excessive
communication errors have been detected. The reason for the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Source xx y zz
Control
00 0 01: No communications between the control system and the power system.
system
Control
12 00 0 02: Excessive communication errors between the control system and power system.
system
Control
01 1 00: Excessive communications errors detected by the rectifier module.
system
• Hardware fault - contact the supplier of the drive.
No.PS No power board

No communication between the power and control boards.
• Check connection between power and control board.

Issue Number: 7
Trip Diagnosis
O.LdI Digital output overload
The O.LdI trip indicates that the total current drawn from 24 V user supply or from the digital output has exceeded the limit.
A trip is initiated if the following condition is met:
• Maximum output current from one digital output is 100 mA.
• Check total loads on digital outputs
• Check control wiring is correct
• Check output wiring is undamaged
O.Spd Motor frequency has exceeded the over frequency threshold
In open-loop mode, if the Post-ramp Reference (02.001) exceeds the threshold set in the Over Frequency Threshold
(03.008) in either direction, an O.SPd trip is produced. In RFC-A mode, if the Estimated Frequency (03.002) exceeds the
Over Frequency Threshold in Pr 03.008 in either direction an O.SPd trip is produced. If Pr 3.008 is set to 0.00 the threshold
7 is then equal to 1.2 x the value set in Pr 1.006.
• Reduce the Frequency Controller Proportional Gain (03.010) to reduce the speed overshoot (RFC-A mode only)
• Check that a mechanical load is not driving motor
Oh.br Braking IGBT over-temperature
The Oh.br over-temperature trip indicates that braking IGBT over-temperature has been detected based on software
thermal model.
101
• Check braking resistor value is greater than or equal to the minimum resistance value
OHt.C Control stage over temperature
This trip indicates that a control stage over-temperature has been detected if Cooling Fan control (06.045) = 0.
• Increase ventilation by setting Cooling Fan control (06.045) > 0.
Oh.dc DC bus over temperature
The Oh.dc trip indicates a DC bus component over temperature based on a software thermal model. The drive includes a
thermal protection system to protect the DC bus components within the drive. This includes the effects of the output current
and DC bus ripple. The estimated temperature is displayed as a percentage of the trip level in Pr 07.035. If this parameter
reaches 100 % then an Oh.dc trip is initiated. The drive will attempt to stop the motor before tripping. If the motor does not
stop in 10 seconds the drive trips immediately.
Source xx y zz Description
Control system 00 2 00 DC bus thermal model gives trip with sub-trip 0
• Check the AC supply voltage balance and levels
27 • Check DC bus ripple level
• Reduce duty cycle
• Reduce motor load
• Check the output current stability. If unstable;
Check the motor map settings with motor nameplate (Pr 05.006, Pr 05.007, Pr 05.008, Pr 05.009, Pr 05.010,
Pr 05.011) – (All Modes)
Disable slip compensation (Pr 05.027 = 0) – (Open loop)
Disable dynamic V to F operation (Pr 05.013 = 0) - (Open loop)
Select fixed boost (Pr 05.014 = Fixed) – (Open loop)
Select high stability space vector modulation (Pr 05.019 = 1) – (Open loop)
Disconnect the load and complete a rotating auto-tune (Pr 05.012)
Reduce frequency loop gains (Pr 03.010, Pr 03.011, Pr 03.012) – (RFC-A)

Issue Number: 7
Trip Diagnosis
Oht.I Inverter over temperature based on thermal model
This trip indicates that an IGBT junction over-temperature has been detected based on a software thermal model.
Control system 00 1 00 Inverter thermal model gives {Oht.I} trip with sub-trip 0
21 • Reduce the selected drive switching frequency
• Ensure Auto-switching Frequency Change Disable (05.035) is set to Off
• Increase acceleration / deceleration rates
• Check DC bus ripple
• Ensure all three input phases are present and balanced
Oht.P Power stage over temperature
This trip indicates that a power stage over-temperature has been detected. From the sub-trip ‘xxyzz’, the Thermistor
location is identified by ‘zz’.
Power system 01 0 zz Thermistor location in the drive defined by zz
• Check enclosure / drive fans are still functioning correctly
22 • Force the heatsink fans to run at maximum speed
• Check enclosure ventilation paths
• Check enclosure door filters
• Increase ventilation
• Reduce the drive switching frequency
• Check the derating tables and confirm the drive is correctly sized for the application.
• Use a drive with larger current / power rating
Oht.r Rectifier over temperature
The Oht.r trip indicates that a rectifier over-temperature has been detected. The thermistor location can be identified from
Power Power module Rectifier

zz Thermistor location defined by zz
system number number
Recommend actions:
102
• Check the motor and motor cable insulation with an insulation tester
• Fit an output line reactor or sinusoidal filter
• Force the heatsink fans to run at maximum speed by setting Pr 06.045 = 1
• Check enclosure / drive fans are still functioning correctly
• Check enclosure ventilation paths
• Check enclosure door filters
• Increase ventilation
OI.A1 Analog input 1 over-current
189 Current input on analog input 1 exceeds 24 mA.

Issue Number: 7
Trip Diagnosis
OI.AC Instantaneous output over current detected
The instantaneous drive output current has exceeded VM_DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX.
Control Instantaneous over-current trip when the measured a.c. current

00 0 00
system exceeds VM_DRIVE_CURRENT[MAX].
3
Recommended actions/checks:
• Increase acceleration/deceleration rate
• If seen during auto-tune reduce the voltage boost
• Check for short circuit on the output cabling
• Check integrity of the motor insulation using an insulation tester
• Is the motor cable length within limits for the frame size?
• Reduce the values in the frequency loop gain parameters - (Pr 03.010, 03.011, 03.012) or (Pr 03.013, 03.014, 03.015)
• Reduce the values in the current loop gain parameters
OI.br Braking IGBT over current detected: short circuit protection for the braking IGBT activated
The OI.br trip indicates that over current has been detected in braking IGBT or braking IGBT protection has been activated.
Power
01 0 00 Braking IGBT instantaneous over-current trip
4 system
• Check brake resistor wiring
• Check braking resistor insulation
OI.dc Power module over current detected from IGBT on state voltage monitoring
The OI.dc trip indicates that the short circuit protection for the drive output stage has been activated.
109
• Disconnect the motor cable at the drive end and check the motor and cable insulation with an insulation tester
• Replace the drive
OI.SC Output phase short-circuit
Over-current detected on drive output when enabled. Possible motor earth fault.
228 • Check for short circuit on the output cabling
• Check integrity of the motor insulation using an insulation tester
• Is the motor cable length within limits for the frame size?
OI.Sn Snubber over-current detected
This trip indicates that an over-current condition has been detected in the rectifier snubbing circuit, The exact cause of the
trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Source xx y zz
Power system 01 1 00: Rectifier snubber over-current trip detected
92
• Ensure the internal EMC filter is installed.
• Ensure the motor cable length does not exceed the maximum for selected switching frequency.
• Check for supply voltage imbalance.
• Check for supply disturbance such as notching from a DC drive.
• Check the motor and motor cable insulation with a Megger.
• Fit an output line reactor or sinusoidal filter.
OPt.d Option module does not acknowledge during drive mode changeover
The OPt.d trip indicates that the option module did not acknowledge notifying the drive that communications with the drive
has been stopped during the drive mode changeover with in the allocated time.
215 Recommended trip:
• Reset the trip
• If the trip persists replace the option module

Issue Number: 7
Trip Diagnosis
Out.P Output phase loss detected
The Out.P trip indicates that a phase loss has been detected at the drive output. If Output Phase Loss Detection Enable
(06.059) = 1 then output phase loss is detected as follows:
1. When the drive is enabled short pulses are applied to make sure each output phase is connected.
2. During running the output current is monitored and the output phase loss condition is detected if the current contains
98
more than TBD % negative phase sequence current for TBDs.
• Check motor and drive connections
• To disable the trip set Output Phase Loss Detection Enable (06.059) = 0
OV DC bus voltage has exceeded the peak level or maximum continuous level for 15 seconds
The OV trip indicates that the DC bus voltage has exceeded the VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX] or
VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX] for 15 s. The trip threshold varies depending on voltage rating of the drive as shown below.
Voltage rating VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX] VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX]
100 415 410
200 415 410
400 830 815
Sub-trip Identification
Source xx y zz
Control 01: Instantaneous trip when the DC bus voltage exceeds
2 00 0
system VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX].
Control 02: Time delayed trip indicating that the DC bus voltage is above
00 0
system VM_DC_VOLTAGE_SET[MAX].
Power 00: Instantaneous trip when the DC bus voltage exceeds
01 0
system VM_DC_VOLTAGE[MAX].
• Increase deceleration ramp (Pr 00.004)
• Decrease the braking resistor value (staying above the minimum value)
• Check nominal AC supply level
• Check for supply disturbances which could cause the DC bus to rise
• Check motor insulation using a insulation tester
P.Dat Power system configuration data error
The P.Dat trip indicates that there is an error in the configuration data stored in the power system.
Control system 00 0 01 No data was obtained from the power board.
Control system 00 0 02 There is no data table in node 1.
The power system data table is bigger than the space available in the control pod
Control system 00 0 03
to store it.
Control system 00 0 04 The size of the table given in the table is incorrect.
220
Control system 00 0 05 Table CRC error.
Control system 00 0 06 The version number of the generator software that produced the table is too low.
Control system 0 0 07 The power data table failed to be stored in the power board.
Power system 01 0 00 The power data table used internally by the power module has an error.
The power data table that is uploaded to the control system on power up has an
Power system 01 0 01
error.
Pad Keypad has been removed when the drive is receiving the reference from the keypad
The Pad trip indicates that the drive is in keypad mode [Reference Selector (01.014) = 4 or 6] and the keypad has been
removed or disconnected from the drive.
• Re-install keypad and reset
• Change Reference Selector (01.014) to select the reference from another source

Issue Number: 7
Trip Diagnosis
Pb.Er Communication has been lost / errors detected between power control
The Pb.Er trip is initiated if there is no communications between power control. The reason for the trip can be identified by
Sub-trip Reason
1 PLL operating region out of lock
93 2 Power board lost communication with user board
3 User board lost communication with power board
4 Communication CRC error
Pb.HF Power board HF
Power processor hardware fault.
235
• Hardware fault - Contact the supplier of the drive
Pd.S Power down save error

The Pd.S trip indicates that an error has been detected in the power down save parameters saved in non-volatile memory.
• Perform a 1001 save in Pr mm.000 to ensure that the trip doesn’t occur the next time the drive is powered up.
PH.Lo Supply phase loss
The PH.Lo trip indicates that the drive has detected an input phase loss or large supply imbalance. The drive will attempt to
stop the motor before this trip is initiated. If the motor cannot be stopped in 10 seconds the trip occurs immediately. The
PH.Lo trip works by monitoring the ripple voltage on the DC bus of the drive, if the DC bus ripple exceeds the threshold, the
drive will trip on PH.Lo. Potential causes of the DC bus ripple are input phase loss, Large supply impedance and severe
output current instability.
Source xx y zz
00: Phase loss detected based on control system feedback. The drive
Control
00 0 attempts to stop the drive before tripping unless bit 2 of Action On Trip
system
Detection (10.037) is set to one.
32
Input phase loss detection can be disabled when the drive is required to operate from the DC supply or from a single phase
supply in Input Phase Loss Detection Mode (06.047).
• Check the AC supply voltage balance and level at full load
• Check the DC bus ripple level with an isolated oscilloscope
• Check the output current stability
• Reduce the duty cycle
• Reduce the motor load
• Disable the phase loss detection, set Pr 06.047 to 2.
PSU Internal power supply fault
The PSU trip indicates that one or more internal power supply rails are outside limits or overloaded.
Control system 00 0
00 Internal power supply overload.
5 Power system 01 1
• Remove the option module and perform a reset
• There is a hardware fault within the drive – return the drive to the supplier

Issue Number: 7
Trip Diagnosis
r.All RAM allocation error
The r.All trip indicates that an option module derivative image has requested more parameter RAM than is allowed. The
RAM allocation is checked in order of resulting sub-trip numbers, and so the failure with the highest sub-trip number is
given. The sub-trip is calculated as (parameter size) + (parameter type) + sub-array number.
Parameter size Value Parameter type Value
1 bit 1 Volatile 0
8 bit 2 User save 1
16 bit 3 Power-down save 2
227 32 bit 4
64 bit 5
Sub-array Menus Value

Derivative image 29 2
Option slot 1 set-up 15 4
r.b.ht Hot rectifier/brake

250 Over-temperature detected on input rectifier or braking IGBT.
Reserved Reserved trips
14-17 These trip numbers are reserved trip numbers for future use.
11 Trip Number Description
09
01 Reserved resettable trip
01
94 - 95 94 -95 Reserved resettable trip
103 - 108 103 - 108 Reserved resettable trip
191 - 198 191 – 198 Reserved resettable trip
168 - 173
238 - 245 168 - 173 Reserved resettable trip
23, 39, 99, 176, 238 - 245 Reserved non-resettable trip
205 - 214
223 - 224
rS Measured resistance has exceeded the parameter range
The rS trip indicates that the measured stator resistance during an auto-tune test has exceeded the maximum possible
value of Stator Resistance (05.017).
The stationary auto-tune is initiated using the auto-tune function (Pr 05.012) or in open loop vector mode (Pr 05.014) on the
first run command after power up in mode 4 (Ur_I) or on every run command in modes 0 (Ur_S) or 3 (Ur_Auto). This trip
can occur if the motor is very small in comparison to the rating of the drive.
33
• Check the motor cable / connections
• Check the integrity of the motor stator winding using a insulation tester
• Check the motor phase to phase resistance at the drive terminals
• Check the motor phase to phase resistance at the motor terminals
• Ensure the stator resistance of the motor falls within the range of the drive model
• Select fixed boost mode (Pr 05.014 = Fd) and verify the output current waveforms with an oscilloscope
• Replace the motor
SCL Control word watchdog has timed out
The SCL trip indicates that the control word has been enabled and has timed out
30

Issue Number: 7
Trip Diagnosis
SL.df Option module in option slot 1 has changed
The SL.df trip indicates that the option module in option slot 1 on the drive is a different type to that installed when
parameters were last saved on the drive. The reason for the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 No module was installed previously
2 A module with the same identifier is installed, but the set-up menu for this option slot has been
changed, and so default parameters have been loaded for this menu.
3 A module with the same identifier is installed, but the applications menu for this option slot has been
204 changed, and so default parameters have been loaded for this menu.
4 A module with the same identifier is installed, but the set-up and applications menu for this option slot
have been changed, and so default parameters have been loaded for these menus.
>99 Shows the identifier of the module previously installed.
• Turn off the power, ensure the correct option module is installed in the option slot and re-apply the power.
• Confirm that the currently installed option module is correct, ensure option module parameters are set correctly and
perform a user save in Pr mm.000.
SL.Er Option module in option slot 1 has detected a fault
The SL.Er trip indicates that the option module in option slot 1 on the drive has detected an error. The reason for the error
can be identified by the sub-trip number.
202
• See relevant option module User Guide for details of the trip
SL.HF Option module 1 hardware fault
The SL.HF trip indicates that the option module in option slot 1 on the drive has indicated a hardware fault. The possible
causes of the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
1 The module category cannot be identified
2 All the required customized menu table information has not been supplied or the tables supplied are corrupt
3 There is insufficient memory available to allocate the comms buffers for this module
4 The module has not indicated that it is running correctly during drive power-up
200
5 Module has been removed after power-up or it has stopped working
6 The module has not indicated that it has stopped accessing drive parameters during a drive mode change
7 The module has failed to acknowledge that a request has been made to reset the drive processor
• Ensure the option module is installed correctly
• Replace the option module
• Replace the drive
SL.nF Option module in option slot 1 has been removed
The SL.nF trip indicates that the option module in option slot 1 on the drive has been removed since the last power up.
203 • Ensure the option module is installed correctly.
• Re-install the option module.
• To confirm that the removed option module is no longer required perform a save function in Pr mm.000.
SL.tO Option module watchdog function service error
The SL.tO trip indicates that the option module installed in Slot 1 has started the option watchdog function and then failed to
service the watchdog correctly.
201
• Replace the option module

Issue Number: 7
Trip Diagnosis
SO.St Soft start relay failed to close, soft start monitor failed
The SO.St trip indicates that the soft start relay in the drive failed to close or the soft start monitoring circuit has failed.
The cause of the trip can be identified by the sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
226 1 Soft-start failure
2 DC bus capacitor failure on 110 V drive (size 2 only)
St.HF Hardware trip has occurred during last power down
The St.HF trip indicates that a hardware trip (HF01 –HF19) has occurred and the drive has been power cycled. The sub-trip
number identifies the HF trip i.e. stored HF.19.
221
• Enter 1299 in Pr mm.000 and press reset to clear the trip
Sto No SAFE TORQUE OFF board fitted
234 STO board not fitted
th Motor thermistor over-temperature
The th trip indicates that the motor thermistor connected to terminal 14 (digital input 5) on the control connections has
indicated a motor over temperature.
• Check motor temperature
• Check thermistor continuity
th.br Brake resistor over temperature
The th.br trip is initiated if the hardware based braking resistor thermal monitoring is connected and the resistor overheats.
If the braking resistor is not used, then this trip must be disabled with bit 3 of Action On Trip Detection (10.037) to prevent
this trip.
• Check brake resistor wiring
• Check braking resistor insulation
Th.Fb Internal thermistor has failed
The Th.Fb trip indicates that an internal thermistor has failed. The thermistor location can be identified by the sub-trip
number.
Source xx y zz
218 Power system 01 0 Thermistor location defined by zz
thS Motor thermistor short circuit
The thS trip indicates that the motor thermistor connected to terminal 14 (digital input 5) on the control connections, is short
circuit or low impedance (<50 Ω).
• Check thermistor continuity
• Replace motor / motor thermistor
tun.S Autotune test stopped before completion
The drive was prevented from completing an autotune test, because either the drive enable or the drive run were removed.
• Check the drive enable signal (Terminal 31 & 34) were active during the autotune
tune Measured inertia has exceeded the parameter range
The drive has tripped during a rotating autotune or mechanical load measurement test. The cause of the trip can be
identified from the associated sub-trip number.
Sub-trip Reason
13 1 Measured inertia has exceeded the parameter range during a mechanical load measurement
• Check motor cable wiring is correct

Issue Number: 7
Trip Diagnosis
U.OI User OI ac
A U.OI trip is initiated if the output current of the drive exceeds the trip level set by User Over Current Trip Level (Pr
8
04.041).
U.S User Save error / not completed
The U.S trip indicates that an error has been detected in the user save parameters saved in non-volatile memory. For
example, following a user save command, If the power to the drive was removed when the user parameters were being
saved.
36
• Perform a user save in Pr mm.000 to ensure that the trip doesn’t occur the next time the drive is powered up.
• Ensure that the drive has enough time to complete the save before removing the power to the drive.
US.24 User 24 V supply is not present on Adaptor Interface terminals (1, 2)
A US.24 trip is initiated if the User Supply Select (Pr 06.072), is set to 1 and no user 24 V supply is present on the user 24
V input on the Adaptor Interface.
91
• Ensure the user 24 V supply is present on the user terminals on the Adaptor Interface.

Issue Number: 7
Table 12-3 Serial communications look up table
No Trip No Trip No Trip

1 rES 90 LF.Er 200 SL.HF
2 OV 91 US.24 201 SL.tO
3 OI.AC 92 OI.Sn 202 SL.Er
4 OI.br 93 Pb.Er 203 SL.nf
5 PSU 94 - 95 rES 204 SL.df
6 Et 96 rES 205 - 214 rES
7 O.Spd 97 D.Ch 215 Opt.d
8 U.OI 98 Out.P 216 - 217 rES
9 rES 99 rES 218 th.fb
10 th.br 100 Rst 219 OHt.C
11 rES 101 Oh.br 220 P.Dat
12 rES 102 Oht.r 221 St.HF
13 tune 103 - 108 rES 222 rES
14 - 17 rES 109 OI.dc 223 - 224 rES
18 tun.S 110 - 111 rES 225 Cur.O
19 It.br 112 - 167 rES 226 SO.St
20 It.AC 168 - 172 rES 227 r.All
21 Oht.I 173 Fan.F 228 OI.SC
22 Oht.P 174 C.SI 229 rES
23 rES 175 C.Pr 230 rES
24 th 176 rES 231 Cur.c
25 thS 177 C.bt 232 dr.CF
26 O.Ld1 178 C.by 233 rES
27 Oh.dc 179 C.d.e 234 Sto
28 cL.A1 180 C.Opt 235 Pb.HF
29 rES 181 C.rdo 236 no.PS
30 SCL 182 C.Err 237 Fi.In
31 EEF 183 C.dat 238 - 245 rES
32 PH.Lo 184 C.Ful 246 Der.E
33 rS 185 C.Acc 247 Fich
34 Pad 186 C.rtg 248 Der.I
35 CL.bt 187 C.typ 249 rES
36 U.S 188 C.Cpr 252 - 254 rES
37 Pd.S 189 OI.A1 255 Rst.L
38 Lo.Ld 190 rES
39 rES 191 - 198 rES
40 - 89 rES 199 dest

Issue Number: 7
The trips can be grouped into the following categories. It should be noted that a trip can only occur when the drive is not tripped or is already tripped
but with a trip with a lower priority number.
Table 12-4 Trip categories
Priority Category Trips Comments

HF01, HF02, HF03, HF04,
HF05, HF06, HF07, HF08,
These indicate internal problems and cannot be reset. All drive features
1 Internal faults HF09, HF10, HF11, HF12,
are inactive after any of these trips occur.
HF13, HF14, HF15, HF16,
HF17, HF18, HF19
This trip cannot be cleared unless 1299 is entered into Parameter
1 Stored HF trip {St.HF}
(mm.000) and a reset is initiated.
Trip numbers 218 to 247,
2 Non-resettable trips These trips cannot be reset.
{Sl.HF}
This can only be reset if Parameter mm.000 is set to 1233 or 1244, or if
3 Volatile memory failure {EEF}
Load Defaults (11.043) is set to a non-zero value.
Trip numbers 174, 175
4 NV Media Card trips These trips are priority 5 during power-up.
and 177 to 188
4 Internal 24V {PSU}
Trips with extended reset {OI.AC}, {OI.br}, {OI.dc} and
5 These trips cannot be reset until 10 s after the trip was initiated.
times {Fan.f}
The drive will attempt to stop the motor before tripping if a {PH.Lo}. 000
Phase loss and d.c. link {PH.Lo} and trip occurs unless this feature has been disabled (see Action On Trip
5
power circuit protection {Oh.dc} Detection (10.037). The drive will always attempt to stop the motor before
tripping if an {Oh.dc} occurs.
5 Standard trips All other trips
12.5 Internal / Hardware trips

Trips {HF01} to {HF19} are internal faults that do not have trip numbers. If one of these trips occurs, the main drive processor has detected an
irrecoverable error. All drive functions are stopped and the trip message will be displayed on the drive keypad. If a non permanent trip occurs this may
be reset by power cycling the drive. On power up after it has been power cycled the drive will trip on St.HF. Enter 1299 in mm.000 to clear the Stored
HF trip.
12.6 Alarm indications

In any mode, an alarm is an indication given on the display by alternating the alarm string with the drive status string display. If an action is not taken
to eliminate any alarm except "tuning and LS" the drive may eventually trip. Alarms are not displayed when a parameter is being edited.
Table 12-5 Alarm indications
Alarm string Description

Brake resistor overload. Braking Resistor Thermal Accumulator (10.039) in the drive has reached 75.0 % of the value at which
br.res
the drive will trip.
Motor Protection Accumulator (04.019) in the drive has reached 75.0 % of the value at which the drive will trip and the load on the
OV.Ld
drive is >100 %.
d.OV.Ld Drive over temperature. Percentage Of Drive Thermal Trip Level (07.036) in the drive is greater than 90 %.
tuning The autotune procedure has been initialized and an autotune in progress.
LS Limit switch active. Indicates that a limit switch is active and that is causing the motor to be stopped.
Opt.AI Option slot alarm.
Lo.AC Low voltage mode. See Low AC Alarm (10.107).
I.AC.Lt Current limit active. See Current Limit Active (10.009).

Issue Number: 7
12.7 Status indications

Table 12-6 Status indications
String Description Drive output stage
The drive is inhibited and cannot be run. The SAFE TORQUE OFF signal is not applied to SAFE
inh Disabled
TORQUE OFF terminals or Pr 06.015 is set to 0.
The drive is ready to run. The drive enable is active, but the drive inverter is not active because the final
rdy Disabled
drive run is not active.
Stop The drive is stopped / holding zero speed. Enabled
S.Loss Supply loss condition has been detected. Enabled
dc.inj The drive is applying dc injection braking. Enabled
Er The drive has tripped and no longer controlling the motor. The trip code appears in the display. Disabled
UV The drive is in the under voltage state either in low voltage or high voltage mode. Disabled
Table 12-7 Option module and other status indications at power-up

String Status
PS.LOAD Waiting for power stage.
The drive is waiting for the processor in the power stage to respond after power-up.
LOAD OPtion Waiting for an option module
The drive is waiting for the option module to respond after power-up.
UPLOAD Loading parameter database
At power-up it may be necessary to update the parameter database held in the drive because an Option module has changed. This may involve data
transfer between the drive and option module. During this period 'UPLOAD' is displayed.
12.8 Displaying the trip history

The drive retains a log of the last ten trips that have occurred. Trip 0 (10.020) to Trip 9 (10.029) store the most recent 10 trips that have occurred
where Trip 0 (10.020) is the most recent and Trip 9 (10.029) is the oldest. When a new trip occurs it is written to Trip 0 (10.020) and all the other trips
move down the log, with oldest being lost. The date and time when each trip occurs are also stored in the date and time log, i.e. Trip 0 Date (10.041)
to Trip 9 Time (10.060). The date and time are taken from Date (06.016) and Time (06.017). Some trips have sub-trip numbers which give more detail
about the reason for the trip. If a trip has a sub-trip number its value is stored in the sub-trip log, i.e. Trip 0 Sub-trip Number (10.070) to Trip 9 Sub-trip
Number (10.079). If the trip does not have a sub-trip number then zero is stored in the sub-trip log.
If any parameter between Pr 10.020 and Pr 10.029 inclusive is read by serial communication, then the trip number in Table 12-2 is the value
transmitted.
NOTE
The trip logs can be reset by writing a value of 255 in Pr 10.038.
12.9 Behaviour of the drive when tripped

If the drive trips, the output of the drive is disabled so the load coasts to a stop. If any trip occurs, the following read only parameters are frozen until
the trip is cleared. This is to help diagnose the cause of the trip.
Parameter Description
01.001 Frequency reference
01.002 Pre-skip filter reference
01.003 Pre-ramp reference
02.001 Post-ramp reference
03.001 Final demand ref
03.002 Estimated frequency
03.003 Frequency error
03.004 Frequency controller output
04.001 Current magnitude
04.002 Active current
04.017 Reactive current
05.001 Output frequency
05.002 Output voltage
05.003 Power
05.005 DC bus voltage
07.001 Analog input 1
07.002 Analog input 2
07.037 Temperature nearest to trip level
If the parameters are not required to be frozen then this can be disabled by setting bit 4 of Pr 10.037.

Issue Number: 7
13 UL listing information 13.8 Thermal memory retention

Drives incorporate thermal memory retention that complies fully with the
13.1 General requirements of UL508C.
Drive sizes 1 to 6 have been assessed to meet both UL and cUL The drive is provided with motor load and speed sensitive overload
requirements. protection with thermal memory retention that complies with the US
National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) clause 430.126 and Underwriters
UL listings can be viewed online at www.UL.com. The UL file number is
Laboratories Standard UL508C, clause 20.1.11 (a). The purpose of this
E171230.
protection is to protect both drive and motor from dangerous overheating
in the event of repeated overload or failure to start, even if the power to
13.2 Mounting the drive is removed between overload events.
Drives can be installed in the following configurations:
For full explanation of the thermal protection system, refer to section
• Standard or surface mounted. This is described in section 8.4 Motor thermal protection on page 99. In order to comply with UL
3.5.1 Surface mounting on page 30. requirements for thermal memory retention, it is necessary to set the
• Bookcase mounted. Drives are mounted side by side with no space Thermal Protection Mode (04.016) to zero; and the Low Frequency
between them. This configuration minimizes the overall width of the Thermal Protection Mode (04.025) must be set to 1 if the drive is
installation. operated in Heavy Duty mode.
Alternatively, an external thermal sensor or switch may be used as a
13.3 Environment means of motor and drive overload protection that complies with the
Drives are able to meet the following UL/NEMA environmental ratings: requirements of UL508C, clause 20.1.11 (b). This protection method is
particularly recommended where independent forced cooling of the
• Type 1. The drive must either be installed with a UL Type 1 kit or be motor is used, because of the risk of overheating if the cooling is lost.
installed in a Type 1 enclosure.
• Type 12. The drive must be installed in a Type 12 enclosure. External thermal sensor
• The remote keypad is rated to both UL Type 1 and UL Type 12. The drive is provided with a means to accept and act upon a signal from
• Drives must be installed in a pollution degree 2 environment or a thermal sensor or switch imbedded in the motor or from an external
better. protective relay. Refer to section 4.10.2 Control terminal specification on
page 73.
13.4 Electrical installation
13.9 Electrical ratings
The following precautions must be observed:
• Drives are listed for connection to an AC supply capable of
• Drives are rated for use at 40 °C and 50 °C surrounding air
delivering no more than 100 kA symmetrical amperes. See Table 4-5
temperature.
• Power and current ratings are given in Table 11-1 to Table 11-5 .
• The temperature rating of the power cables must be at least 75 °C. • Fuse and circuit breaker (size 1 only with short circuit rating of 10
• If the drive control stage is powered from an external power supply
kA. Only the listed DIVQ/DIVQ7 type SU203UP ABB (E212323)
(+24 V), the power supply must be listed or recognized to UL class 2
circuit breaker may be used) ratings are given in Table 4-6 to
with appropriate fusing.
Table 4-9 .
• Ground connections must use UL listed closed loop (ring) terminals. • Unless indicated otherwise in Table 4-6 to Table 4-9 , fuses may be
any UL listed Class J or CC with a voltage rating of at least 600 Vac.
13.5 UL listed accessories • Unless indicated otherwise in Table 4-6 to Table 4-9 ,circuit breakers
The following options are UL listed: may be any UL listed type, category control number: DIVQ or
• CI-Keypad DIVQ7, with a voltage rating of at least 600 Vac.
• CI-485 Adaptor
• AI-485 Adaptor 13.10 cUL requirements for frame size 4
• AI-Backup Adaptor For frame size 4, models Mxxx-042 00133A, Mxxx-042 00176A, Mxxx-
• Remote Keypad 044 00135A and Mxxx-044 00170A, transient surge suppression shall
• UL Type 1 kit be installed on the line side of this equipment and shall be rated 480 Vac
• NV Media card (phase to ground), 480 Vac (phase to phase), suitable for overvoltage
category III, and shall provide protection for a rated impulse withstand
13.6 Motor overload protection voltage peak of 6 kV and a clamping voltage of maximum 2400 V.
The drives are installed with solid state motor overload protection. NOTE
The default overload protection level is less than 150 % of full load rated Mxxx denotes M100, M101, M200, M201, M300 or M400.
current for open loop operation.
The default overload protection level is less than 180 % of full load rated 13.11 Group installation
current for rotor flux control operation. 13.11.1 Definition
In order for the motor protection to work correctly, the motor rated Group Installation Definition: A motor branch circuit for two or more
current must be entered into Pr 00.006 or Pr 05.007. motors, or one or more motors with other loads, protected by a circuit
The protection level may be adjusted below 150 % if required. See breaker or a single set of fuses.
section 8.3 Current limits on page 99. 13.11.2 Limitations on use
All motors rated less than 1 hp
13.7 Motor overspeed protection The drives may be used in group installations where each of the motors
The drive is installed with solid state motor overspeed protection. is rated 1 hp or less. The full-load current rating of each motor must not
However, this feature does not provide the level of protection provided exceed 6 A. The motor drive provides individual overload protection in
by an independent, high-integrity overspeed protection device. accordance with the NEC clause 430.32.

Issue Number: 7
Smallest motor protected

The drives may be used in group installations where the smallest motor
is protected by the branch fuses or circuit breaker. Limits on the current
rating of branch circuit protective fuses and circuit breakers are given in
the NEC Table: 430.52.
Other installations
The motor drives described in this user guide are not UL listed for group
installation.

Issue Number: 7
Index
A F
AC supply contactor ................................................................58 Field weakening (constant power) operation ........................100
AC supply requirements ..........................................................51 Fire protection .........................................................................21
Acceleration ..................................................................... 91, 92 Fixed V/F mode .......................................................................15
Access ....................................................................................21 Fuse ratings ..........................................................................175
Accuracy ...............................................................................174 Fuse types ...............................................................................58
Acoustic noise .......................................................................175
Advanced menus ....................................................................79 G
Advanced parameters ...........................................................104 Getting Started ........................................................................76
Air-flow in a ventilated enclosure ............................................36 Ground connections ......................................................... 58, 67
Alarm .....................................................................................204 Ground leakage .......................................................................63
Alarm Indications ..................................................................204 Ground terminals .....................................................................43
Altitude ..................................................................................173 Grounding bracket ...................................................................64
Autotune ..................................................................................94
H
B Hazardous areas .....................................................................22
Basic requirements .................................................................87 Humidity ................................................................................173
Braking ....................................................................................61
Braking resistor values ..........................................................180 I
Input current ratings ..............................................................175
C Input inductor calculation ........................................................51
Cable clearances ....................................................................68 Internal EMC filter ...................................................................65
Cable lengths (maximum) .....................................................179 IP Rating (Ingress protection) ...............................................173
Cable size ratings .................................................................175 Isolator switch .........................................................................70
Cable types and lengths .........................................................58 Items supplied with the drive ...................................................20
Cautions ....................................................................................9
Control connections ................................................................71 K
Control terminal specification ..................................................73 Keypad ....................................................................................76
Cooling ....................................................................................21
Cooling method .....................................................................173 L
Current limits ...........................................................................99 Line reactors .................................................................. 51, 173
Current ratings ......................................................................165
D
DC bus voltage .......................................................................61
Deceleration ............................................................... 61, 91, 92
Defaults (restoring parameter) ................................................80
Derating ................................................................................165
Destination parameter .............................................................72
Diagnostics ...........................................................................185
Dimensions (overall) .............................................................175
Display ....................................................................................76
Display messages ...................................................................79
Drive enable ............................................................................74
E
Electrical safety .......................................................................21
Electrical terminals ..................................................................43
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ....................... 22, 63, 182
EMC - Compliance with generic emission standards ..............68
EMC - General requirements ..................................................66
EMC - Variations in the wiring .................................................69
EMC filter dimensions (external, overall) ..............................184
EMC filter torque settings (external) .....................................184
EMC filters (optional external) ...............................................184
Emission ...............................................................................183
EN61800-3:2004 (standard for power drive systems) ............68
Enclosure ................................................................................38
Enclosure Layout ....................................................................35
Enclosure sizing ......................................................................35
Environmental protection ........................................................21

Issue Number: 7
M P
Mechanical Installation ............................................................21 Parameter access level .......................................................... 80
Menu 0 ....................................................................................78 Parameter ranges ................................................................. 107
Menu 01 - Frequency / speed reference ...............................114 Parameter security ................................................................. 80
Menu 02 - Ramps ..................................................................118 Planning the installation .......................................................... 21
Menu 03 - Slave frequency, speed feedback and Power ratings ........................................................................ 165
speed control ...................................................................121 Power terminals ...................................................................... 43
Menu 04 - Torque and current control ...................................126 Product information ................................................................ 11
Menu 05 - Motor control ........................................................129
Menu 06 - Sequencer and clock ...........................................133 Q
Menu 07 - Analog I/O ............................................................135 Quick start commissioning ...................................................... 92
Menu 08 - Digital I/O .............................................................138 Quick start commissioning / Start-up ...................................... 91
Menu 09 - Programmable logic, motorized pot and Quick start connections .......................................................... 87
binary sum .......................................................................144
Menu 10 - Status and trips ....................................................148 R
Menu 11 - General drive set-up .............................................150 Ratings ............................................................................. 52, 55
Menu 12 - Threshold detectors and variable selectors .........151 Reactor current ratings ................................................... 51, 173
Menu 14 - User PID controller ...............................................156 Relay contacts ........................................................................ 74
Menu 18 - Application menu 1 ..............................................160 Residual current device (RCD) ............................................... 63
Menu 19 - Application menu 2 ..............................................161 Resolution ............................................................................. 174
Menu 20 - Application menu 3 ..............................................161 RFC-A mode ........................................................................... 15
Menu 21 - Second motor parameters ....................................162 Routine maintenance .............................................................. 45
Menu 22 - Additional Menu 0 set-up .....................................163
Menu structure ........................................................................78 S
Minimum connections to get the motor running SAFE TORQUE OFF .............................................................. 74
in any operating mode .......................................................88 SAFE TORQUE OFF/drive enable ......................................... 74
Mode parameter ......................................................................72 Safety Information .............................................................. 9, 21
Motor (running the motor) ........................................................87 Saving parameters ................................................................. 80
Motor cable - interruptions .......................................................70 Sealed enclosure - sizing ....................................................... 36
Motor isolator / disconnector-switch ........................................70 Serial comms lead .................................................................. 71
Motor number of poles ............................................................93 Serial communications connections ....................................... 71
Motor operation .......................................................................61 Serial communications look-up table .................................... 187
Motor rated current ..................................................................93 Single line descriptions ........................................................... 82
Motor rated current (maximum) ...............................................99 Solutions Module - Installing / removing ................................. 26
Motor rated frequency .............................................................93 Speed range ......................................................................... 174
Motor rated power factor .........................................................93 Start up time ......................................................................... 174
Motor rated speed ...................................................................93 Starts per hour ...................................................................... 174
Motor rated voltage .................................................................93 Status ................................................................................... 205
Motor requirements ...............................................................173 Status Indications ................................................................. 205
Motor thermal protection .........................................................99 Storage ................................................................................. 173
Motor winding voltage .............................................................60 Supply requirements ............................................................. 173
Multiple motors ........................................................................60 Supply types ........................................................................... 51
Surface mounting the drive ..................................................... 30
N Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables
NEMA rating ..........................................................................174 and connections outside a building .................................. 70
Notes .........................................................................................9 Surge suppression for analog and bipolar inputs and outputs 71
Surge suppression for digital and unipolar inputs and outputs 70
O Switching frequency ............................................................. 100
Open loop mode ......................................................................15
Open loop vector mode ...........................................................15 T
Operating mode (changing) ............................................. 80, 87 Technical data ...................................................................... 165
Operating modes .....................................................................15 Temperature ......................................................................... 173
Optimization ............................................................................93 Terminal block in the enclosure .............................................. 70
Options ....................................................................................19 Terminal cover removal .......................................................... 22
Output contactor ......................................................................61 Terminal sizes .................................................................. 43, 44
Output frequency ...................................................................174 Thermal protection circuit for the braking resistor .................. 62
Torque settings ............................................................... 44, 182
Trip ....................................................................................... 185
Trip History ........................................................................... 205
Trip Indications ..................................................................... 185
U
UL Listing Information ........................................................... 206
User Security .......................................................................... 80

Issue Number: 7
V
Ventilation ...............................................................................38
Vibration ................................................................................174
Voltage mode ................................................................... 94, 95
W
Warnings ...................................................................................9
Weights .................................................................................175

Issue Number: 7
0478-0043-07

Variador M300, Centrífuga 3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Variador M300, Centrífuga 3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Variador M300, Centrífuga 3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Guide

Part Number: 0478-0043-07

Copyright © June 2014 Control Techniques Ltd

7 Running the motor

9 NV media card operation

3 Mechanical installation .......................21 8 Optimization ........................................ 93

4 Electrical installation ...........................47

4 Unidrive M300 User Guide

11 Technical data ...................................165

13 UL listing information .......................206

Unidrive M300 User Guide 5

Control Techniques Ltd Moteurs Leroy-Somer

Maaa-bbcddddd Valid characters:

Adjustable speed electrical power drive

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), Limits,

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), Limits,

EN 61000-3-2:2006 Applicable where input current <16 A. No limits

6 Unidrive M300 User Guide

The harmonised standards used are shown below:

Person authorised to compile the technical file:

Unidrive M300 User Guide 7

05200250A, 05400270A, 05400300A, 05500030A, 05500040A, 05500069A

Notified Body identification number: 0035

The harmonised standards used are shown below:

8 Unidrive M300 User Guide

1 Safety information 1.5 Access

1.6 Fire protection

1.7 Compliance with regulations

1.4 Environmental limits

Unidrive M300 User Guide 9

1.11 Electrical installation

10 Unidrive M300 User Guide

Unidrive M300 Reserved:

Unidrive M300 User Guide 11

Normal Duty Heavy Duty (default)

Motor total Motor total

15% 50% 100% Motor speed as a 50% 100% Motor speed as a

12 Unidrive M300 User Guide

Table 2-1 100 V drive ratings (100 V to 120 V ±10 %)

01100017 1.7 2.6 3.1 0.25 0.33

02100042 4.2 6.3 7.6 0.75 1

Table 2-2 200 V drive ratings (200 V to 240 V ±10 %)

Normal Duty Heavy Duty

Unidrive M300 User Guide 13

Table 2-3 400 V drive ratings (380 V to 480 V ±10 %)

Normal Duty Heavy Duty

Table 2-4 575 V drive ratings (500 V to 575 V ±10 %)

2.2.1 Typical short term overload limits

14 Unidrive M300 User Guide

2.3 Operating modes

2.3.1 Open loop mode

Open loop vector mode

Unidrive M300 User Guide 15

2.4 Drive features

16 Unidrive M300 User Guide

Figure 2-3 Features of the drive (size 5 to 6)

2.5 Keypad and display

Unidrive M300 User Guide 17